Home

Altova XMLSpy 2011

1. 231 Edit Menu 12 2 231 Undo Redo 12 2 1 231 Cut Copy Paste Delete 12 2 2 231 Insert 12 2 3 234 Copy XPath 12 2 4 234 Copy XPointer 12 2 5 235 Pretty Print XML Text 12 2 6 Altova XMLSpy 2011 5 235 Select All 12 2 7 235 Find Find Next 12 2 8
2. 34 Assigning an XSLT File 2 4 1 35 Transforming the XML File 2 4 2 36 Modifying the XSL File 2 4 3 38 Project Management 2 5 38 Benefits of Projects 2 5 1 2 Altova XMLSpy 2011 38 Building a Project 2 5 2 40 That s It 2 6 41 3 Editing Views 42 Text View 3 1 42 Formatting in Text View 3 1 1
3. 126 XQuery Documents 6 2 1 127 XQuery Entry Helpers 6 2 2 127 XQuery Syntax Coloring 6 2 3 129 XQuery Intelligent Editing 6 2 4 130 XQuery Validation and Execution 6 2 5 132 7 Authentic 134 Authentic View Tutorial 7 1 135 Opening an XML Document in Authentic View 7 1 1 136 The Authentic View Interface 7 1 2 138 Node Operations 7 1 3
4. 141 Entering Data in Authentic View 7 1 4 143 Entering Attribute Values 7 1 5 143 Adding Entities 7 1 6 144 Printing the Document 7 1 7 146 Editing in Authentic View 7 2 146 Basic Editing 7 2 1 150 Tables in Authentic View 7 2 2 150 SPS Tables 151 CALS HTML Tables
5. 184 Assigning Files and Folders 9 2 1 187 Changing Configurations 9 2 2 188 10 Projects 189 Creating and Editing Projects 10 1 192 Using Projects 10 2 194 11 Source Control 196 Supported Source Control Systems 11 1 201 Installing Source Control Systems 11 2 208 SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing 11 3 214 12 User Reference 215 File Menu 12 1
6. 297 Collapse 12 9 7 298 Expand Fully 12 9 8 Altova XMLSpy 2011 7 298 Collapse Unselected 12 9 9 298 Optimal Widths 12 9 10 298 Word Wrap 12 9 11 298 Go to Line Character 12 9 12 299 Go to File 12 9 13 299 Text View Settings 12 9 14 301 Browser Menu 12 10
7. 44 Displaying the Document 3 1 2 47 Editing in Text View 3 1 3 49 Entry Helpers in Text View 3 1 4 51 Grid View 3 2 52 Entry Helpers in Grid View 3 2 1 54 Schema View 3 3 54 Schema Overview 3 3 1 58 Content Model View 3 3 2 70 Base Type Modification 3 3 3
8. 110 Processing with XSLT and XQuery 4 7 112 Additional Features 4 8 113 5 DTDs and XML Schemas 114 DTDs 5 1 115 XML Schemas 5 2 Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 116 Catalogs in XMLSpy 5 3 120 6 XSLT and XQuery 121 XSLT 6 1 121 XSLT Documents 6 1 1 123 XSLT Processing 6 1 2 125 XQuery 6 2
9. 344 Altova Extension Functions 1 5 1 344 General Functions 348 2 Technical Data 349 OS and Memory Requirements 2 1 350 Altova XML Parser 2 2 351 Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines 2 3 352 Unicode Support 2 4 352 Windows XP 2 4 1 353 Right to Left Writing Systems 2 4 2 354 Internet Usage 2 5 355 3 Licens
10. 167 Keystrokes in Authentic View 7 2 7 168 Authentic Scripting 7 3 170 8 HTML CSS JSON 4 Altova XMLSpy 2011 171 HTML 8 1 173 CSS 8 2 177 9 Altova Global Resources 178 Defining Global Resources 9 1 180 Files 9 1 1 182 Folders 9 1 2 183 Copying Configurations 9 1 3 184 Using Global Resources 9 2
11. 249 Share from Source Control 250 Show History 251 Show Differences 252 Show Properties 253 Refresh Status 253 Source Control Manager 253 Change Source Control 254 Add Files to Project 12 3 7 254 Add Global Resource to Project 12 3 8
12. 287 Assign XSL FO 12 7 6 287 Assign Sample XML File 12 7 7 288 Go to XSL 12 7 8 289 Authentic Menu 12 8 289 New Document 12 8 1 290 Edit Database Data 12 8 2 291 Assign Edit a StyleVision Stylesheet 12 8 3 291 Select New Row with XML Data for Editing 12 8 4 292 Define XML Entities 12 8 5
13. 215 New 12 1 1 218 Open 12 1 2 222 Reload 12 1 3 222 Encoding 12 1 4 222 Close Close All Close All But Active 12 1 5 223 Save Save As Save All 12 1 6 228 Send by Mail 12 1 7 229 Print 12 1 8 229 Print Preview Print Setup 12 1 9 230 Recent Files Exit 12 1 10
14. 324 Table of Contents 12 13 1 324 Index 12 13 2 324 Search 12 13 3 325 Keyboard Map 12 13 4 325 Activation Order Form Registration Updates 12 13 5 326 Support Center FAQ Downloads 12 13 6 327 On the Internet 12 13 7 327 About 12 13 8 328 Command Line 12 14 Appendices 330 331 1 Engine Information
15. 241 Open from Source Control 242 Enable Source Control 243 Get Latest Version 243 Get 244 Get Folders 245 Check Out 246 Check In 247 Undo Check Out 248 Add to Source Control 249 Remove from Source Control
16. 271 Go to DTD 12 5 3 272 Go to Schema 12 5 4 272 Go to Definition 12 5 5 272 Generate XML from DB Excel EDI with MapForce 12 5 6 272 Design HTML PDF Word Output with StyleVision 12 5 7 272 Generate Sample XML File 12 5 8 274 Flush Memory Cache 12 5 9 275 Schema Design Menu 12 6 275 Schema Settings 12 6 1
17. 332 XSLT 1 0 Engine Implementation Information 1 1 334 XSLT 2 0 Engine Implementation Information 1 2 334 General Information 1 2 1 336 XSLT 2 0 Elements and Functions 1 2 2 337 XQuery 1 0 Engine Implementation Information 1 3 340 XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 1 4 340 General Information 1 4 1 341 Functions Support 1 4 2 344 Extensions 1 5
18. 155 CALS HTML Table Editing Icons 157 Editing a DB 7 2 3 157 Navigating a DB Table 158 DB Queries 162 Modifying a DB Table 163 Working with Dates 7 2 4 163 Date Picker 164 Text Entry 164 Defining Entities 7 2 5 166 Images in Authentic View 7 2 6
19. 304 Commands 305 Toolbars 306 Keyboard 310 Menu 312 Options 312 Restore Toolbars and Windows 12 11 4 313 Options 12 11 5 313 File 314 File Types 315 Editing
20. 294 Hide Markup Show Small Large Mixed Markup 12 8 6 294 Append Insert Duplicate Delete Row 12 8 7 295 Move Row Up Down 12 8 8 296 View Menu 12 9 296 Text View 12 9 1 296 Enhanced Grid View 12 9 2 296 Schema Design View 12 9 3 297 Authentic View 12 9 4 297 Browser View 12 9 5 297 Expand 12 9 6
21. 71 Entry Helpers in Schema View 3 3 4 74 Identity Constraints 3 3 5 78 Smart Restrictions 3 3 6 82 xml base xml id xml lang xml space 3 3 7 84 Back and Forward Moving through Positions 3 3 8 85 Authentic View 3 4 85 Overview of the GUI 3 4 1 86 Authentic View Toolbar Icons 3 4 2 88 Authentic View Main Window 3 4 3
22. 301 Back 12 10 1 301 Forward 12 10 2 301 Stop 12 10 3 301 Refresh 12 10 4 301 Fonts 12 10 5 301 Separate Window 12 10 6 303 Tools Menu 12 11 303 Global Resources 12 11 1 304 Active Configuration 12 11 2 304 Customize 12 11 3
23. 276 Configure View 12 6 2 279 Zoom 12 6 3 280 Display All Globals 12 6 4 280 Display Diagram 12 6 5 281 XSL XQuery Menu 12 7 281 XSL Transformation 12 7 1 282 XSL FO Transformation 12 7 2 283 XSL Parameters XQuery Variables 12 7 3 286 XQuery Execution 12 7 4 287 Assign XSL 12 7 5
24. 236 Replace 12 2 9 236 Bookmark Commands 12 2 10 236 Comment In Out 12 2 11 238 Project Menu 12 3 239 New Project 12 3 1 240 Open Project 12 3 2 240 Reload Project 12 3 3 240 Close Project 12 3 4 240 Save Project Save Project As 12 3 5 240 Source Control 12 3 6
25. 10 Main Window 1 1 1 11 Project Window 1 1 2 13 Info Window 1 1 3 13 Entry Helpers 1 1 4 14 Output Window Messages 1 1 5 15 Menu Bar Toolbars Status Bar 1 1 6 16 The Application Environment 1 2 16 Settings and Customization 1 2 1 16 Tutorials Projects Examples 1 2 2 17 XMLSpy Features and Help and Altova Products 1 2 3
26. 90 Authentic View Entry Helpers 3 4 4 94 Authentic View Context Menus 3 4 5 97 Browser View 3 5 98 4 XML 99 Creating Opening and Saving XML Documents 4 1 101 Assigning Schemas and Validating 4 2 103 Editing XML in Text View 4 3 105 Editing XML in Grid View 4 4 106 Editing XML in Authentic View 4 5 108 Entry Helpers for XML Documents 4 6
27. 316 View 316 Grid Fonts 316 Schema Fonts 317 Text Fonts 318 Colors 319 Encoding 319 XSL 321 Source Control 322 Window Menu 12 12 322 Cascade 12 12 1 322 Tile Horizontal
28. Right clicking a document tab opens a context menu with a selection of File commands such as Print and Close Views in the Main Window The active document can be displayed and edited in multiple views The available views are displayed in a bar above the document tabs see illustration above and the active view is highlighted A view is selected by clicking the required view button or by using the commands in the View menu The available views are either editing or browser views Text View An editing view with syntax coloring for source level work Grid View For structured editing The document is displayed as a structured grid which can be manipulated graphically This view also contains an embeddedTable View which shows repeating elements in a tabular format In Standard Edition Grid View is read only Editing is available in Enterprise and Professional Editions Schema View For viewing and editing XML Schemas In Standard Edition Schema View is read only Editing is available in Enterprise and Professional Editions Authentic View For editing XML documents that are based on StyleVision Power Stylesheets Browser View An integrated browser view that supports both CSS and XSL stylesheets Note The default view for individual file extensions can be customized in the Tools Options dialog in the Default View pane of the File Types tab 1 1 2 Project Window A project is a collection of files that are
29. Entry helpers are the windows that provide context sensitive data entry options For example the elements or attributes that can be validly added at a given document location are displayed in an entry helper and any one of these options can be inserted by double clicking it Switching to Text View To open the Text View of a document click the Text button at the bottom of the Document Window or select View Text View 3 1 1 Formatting in Text View Text View offers a number of text formatting options These are listed below 2011 Altova GmbH Text View 43 Editing Views User Manual Fonts The font family font size font style and text background color can be customized separately for the following groups of documents i generic XML documents including HTML ii XQuery documents and iii CSS documents Text items in a document that have different semantics can be colored differently For example you can color element names attribute names and element content differently When you set different colors for different text items the syntax coloring feature is enabled Text fonts are customized in the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog and how to do this is described in the section User Reference Options Text Fonts section of this documentation Indentation Well formed XML documents can be pretty printed This means that the document can be formatted so that the hierarchical structure of the document is displ
30. 254 Add URL to Project 12 3 9 255 Add Active File to Project 12 3 10 255 Add Active And Related Files to Project 12 3 11 255 Add Project Folder to Project 12 3 12 255 Add External Folder to Project 12 3 13 258 Add External Web Folder to Project 12 3 14 261 Properties 12 3 15 263 Most Recently Used Projects 12 3 16 264 XML Menu 12 4 264
31. PushOK SVN SCC x64 version 1 6 3 1 TamTam SVN SCC 1 2 24 ComponentSoftware CS RCS PRO Version ComponentSoftware CS RCS PRO 5 1 Clients ComponentSoftware CS RCS PRO 5 1 Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere for VSS 2011 Altova GmbH Supported Source Control Systems 197 Source Control User Manual Version Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere for VSS 5 3 2 Standard Professional Server Clients Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere for VSS 5 3 2 Client Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Hosted Version Server hosted in a Bell Data Center Clients Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Hosted Client 22252 Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Standalone Version SourceAnywhere Standalone 2 2 Server Clients Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Standalone 2 2 Client IBM Rational ClearCase 7 Version 7 0 1 LT Clients IBM Rational ClearCase 7 0 1 LT March Hare CVSNT 2 5 Version 2 5 03 2382 Clients Aigenta Unified SCC 1 0 6 March Hare CVS Suite 2008 Version Server 2008 3321 Clients Jalindi Igloo 1 0 3 March Hare CVS Suite Client 2008 3321 PushOK CVS SCC NT 2 1 2 5 PushOK CVS SCC x64 version 2 2 0 4 TamTam CVS SCC 1 2 40 Mercurial Version Mercurial 1 0 2 for Windows Clients Sergey Antonov HgSCC 1 0 1 Microsoft SourceSafe 2005 198 Source Control Supported Source Control Systems 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Version 2005 with CTP Clients Microsoft Sourc
32. 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Customizing Grid View To resize columns place the cursor over the appropriate border and drag so as to achieve the desired width To resize a column to the width of its largest entry double click on the grid line to the right of that column To adjust column widths to display all content select the menu item View Optimal widths command or click on the Optimal widths icon The heights of cells are determined by their contents They can be adjusted with the menu option Tools Options View Grid View Limit cell height to xx lines Please note If you mark data in Grid View and switch to Text View that data will be marked also in Text View 3 2 1 Entry Helpers in Grid View Note In Standard Edition Grid View is available as a read only view Editing in Grid View is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions Elements Entry Helper In Grid View the Elements Entry Helper has three tabs Append Insert and Add Child The Append tab displays elements that can be appended after all the siblings of the current element the Insert tab displays all elements that can be inserted before the current element and the Add Child tab displays those elements you can insert as a child of the current element To insert an element select the appropriate tab and double click the required element Note that mandatory elements are indicated with an exclamation mark Siblings
33. No output formatting has been specified for element xs restriction After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog File Types The File types tab allows you to customize the behavior of XMLSpy on a per file type basis Choose a file type from the File Types list box to customize the functions for that particular file type Windows Explorer settings You can define the file type description and MIME compliant content type used by Windows Explorer and whether XMLSpy is to be the default editor for documents of this file type Conformance 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 315 User Reference User Manual XMLSpy provides specific editing and other features for various file types The features for a file type are set by specifying the conformance in this option XMLSpy lets you set file type to conform with XML XQuery ZIP JSON and other text grammars Furthermore XML conformance is differentiated between XML DTD and XML Entity file types A large number of file types are defined with a default conformance that is appropriate for the file type We recommend that you do not modify these settings unless you are adding a new file type or deliberately wish to set a file type to another kind of conformance Default view This group lets you define the default view to be used for each file type The screenshot above shows the Filetypes tab of the Enterprise edition If your edition is not the Enterprise edit
34. Selecting an entire element Drag and drop and context menus Find and replace Unlimited undo Spelling check For some document types such as XML and XQuery additional specialized features are available and these are described respectively in the sections that deal with those document types Note For large files Auto completion and entry helpers can be disabled thus enabling faster loading and editing The threshold file size is specified by the user For more details see the reference section Options Editing Syntax coloring Syntax coloring is applied according to the semantic value of the text For example in XML documents depending on whether the XML node is an element attribute content CDATA section comment or processing instruction the node name and in some cases the node s content is colored differently Four groups of document type are distinguished i generic XML which includes HTML ii XQuery iii CSS and iv JSON The text properties including color of each group can be set in the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog Tools Options Start tag and end tag matching When you place the cursor inside a start or end tag of a markup element pressing Ctrl E highlights the other member of the pair Pressing Ctrl E repeatedly enables you to switch between the start and end tags This is an excellent aid to locating the start and end tags of an XML element Intelligent Editing 48
35. Entities entry helper in Authentic View 90 Entry Helper 19 in Grid View 32 Entry helpers 13 for XML documents 108 for XQuery 127 in Schema View 71 toggling display on and off 323 updating 270 Entry helpers in Text View 49 Entry Helper 322 323 Evaluation key for your Altova software 325 Evaluation period of Altova s software products 355 356 358 Example files tutorial 18 Examples location of installed files 16 Expand fully 298 Explorer 314 Extension functions for XSLT and XQuery 344 external functions in XQuery document 337 External parsed entites 314 External XSL processor 319 F Favorites 324 File closing 222 creating new 215 default encoding 319 encoding 222 opening 218 opening options 313 printing options 229 saving 223 sending by e mail 228 tab 313 File extensions customizing 267 for XQuery files 126 setting extensions as file type 116 File menu 215 File paths 2011 Altova GmbH Index 375 File paths inserting in XMl document 103 File types 314 Files adding to source control 248 most recently used 230 Find and replace text in document 236 text in document 235 Floating windows 9 fn base uri in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn collection in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn count in XPath 2 0 and whitespace 340 fn current date in XPath 2 0 support in Alto
36. File Menu 221 User Reference User Manual Right clicking a file pops up a context menu containing commands available for that file screenshot above The various file icons are shown below Checked in Available for check out Checked out by another user Not available for check out Checked out locally Can be edited and checked in After you check out a file you can edit it in your Altova application and save it using File Save Ctrl S You can check in the edited file via the context menu in the Open URL dialog see screenshot above or via the context menu that pops up when you click the file tab in the Main Window of your application screenshot below When a file is checked out by another user it is not available for check out When a file is checked out locally by you you can undo the check out with the Undo Check Out command in the context menu This has the effect of returning the file unchanged to the server If you check out a file in one Altova application you cannot check it out in another Altova application The file is considered to be already checked out to you The available commands at this point in any Altova application supporting Microsoft SharePoint Server will be Check In and Undo Check Out 222 User Reference File Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Opening and saving files via Global Resources To open or save a file via a global resources click Sw
37. Update Entry Helpers command 270 URL sending by e mail 228 User interface description 9 User Manual 3 6 User Reference 214 UTF 16 319 V Validating XML documents 29 Validating XML documents 101 Validation 16 267 assigning DTD to XML document 271 assigning XML Schema to XML document 271 Validation messages 14 Validator in Altova products 350 Version control Diffdog differencing editor 208 installation procedures 201 Version Number 327 View Browser view 297 Collapse 297 298 Enhance Grid view 296 Expand 297 298 Go to File 299 Go to line char 298 Optimal widths 298 Schema Design view 296 Text view 296 View menu 296 W Watch for changes 313 Web Server 326 327 Well formedness check 266 for XML document 29 Well formedness of XML documents 101 whitespace handling and XPath 2 0 functions 340 whitespace in XML document handling by Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine 334 Whitespace markers 299 whitespace nodes in XML document and handling by XSLT 1 0 Engine 332 Window Cascade 322 Entry Helper 322 323 Info 322 323 Open 323 Project 322 323 Tile horizontally 322 Tile vertically 322 Window menu 322 Windows auto hiding 9 Index 2011 Altova GmbH 382 Windows floating docking tabbing 9 managing display of 9 overview 19 support for Altova products 349 Word wrap enable disable 298 Word wrapping i
38. 18 2 XMLSpy Tutorial 19 XMLSpy Interface 2 1 20 XML Schemas 2 2 22 XML Documents 2 3 22 Creating a New XML File 2 3 1 24 Specifying the Type of an Element 2 3 2 25 Entering Data in Text View 2 3 3 29 Validating the Document 2 3 4 32 Adding Elements and Attributes 2 3 5 34 XSLT Transformations 2 4
39. To change the logo to be used 1 Select the CompanyLogo element by clicking a CompanyLogo tag The attributes of the CompanyLogo element are displayed in the Attributes Entry Helper 2 In the Attributes Entry Helper change the value of the href attribute from nanonull gif to Altova_right_300 gif an image in the Examples folder This causes the Nanonull logo to be replaced by the Altova logo Note Entities cannot be entered in the Attributes entry helper 7 1 6 Adding Entities An entity in Authentic View is typically XML data but not necessarily such as a single character a text string and even a fragment of an XML document An entity can also be a binary file such as an image file All the entities available for a particular document are displayed in the Entities Entry Helper screenshot below To insert an entity place the cursor at the location in the document where you want to insert it and then double click the entity in the Entities entry helper Note that you cannot enter entities in the Attributes entry helper 144 Authentic Authentic View Tutorial 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The ampersand character amp has special significance in XML as have the apostrophe less than and greater than symbols and the double quote To insert these characters entities are used so that they are not confused with XML significant characters These characters are available as entities in Authentic View In Nanonu
40. case you have only a limited license to use any output that contains generated program code including Unrestricted Source Code such as Java C C VB NET or XSLT and associated project files and build scripts as well as generated XML XML Schemas documentation UML diagrams and database structures only for the thirty 30 day evaluation period i Reverse Engineering Except and to the limited extent as may be otherwise specifically provided by applicable law in the European Union you may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code underlying ideas underlying user interface techniques or algorithms of the Software by any means whatsoever directly or indirectly or disclose any of the foregoing except to the extent you may be expressly permitted to decompile under applicable law in the European Union if it is essential to do so in order to achieve operability of the Software with another software program and you have first requested Altova to provide the information necessary to achieve such operability and Altova has not made such information available Altova has the right to impose reasonable conditions and to request a reasonable fee before providing such information Any information supplied by Altova or obtained by you as permitted hereunder may only be used by you for the purpose described herein and may not be disclosed to any third party or used to create any software which is su
41. click the Date Picker icon To select a date click on the desired date month or year The date is entered in the XML document and the date in the display is modified accordingly You can also enter a time zone if this is required Text Entry For date fields that do not have a Date Picker see screenshot you can edit the date directly by typing in the new value Please note When editing a date you must not change its format If you edit a date and change it such that it is out of the valid range for dates the date turns red to alert you to the error If you place the mouse cursor over the invalid date an error message appears see screenshot If you try to change the format of the date the date turns red to alert you to the error see screenshot 7 2 5 Defining Entities You can define entities for use in Authentic View whether your document is based on a DTD or an XML Schema Once defined these entities are displayed in the Entities Entry Helper and in the Insert Entity submenu of the context menu When you double click on an entity in the Entities Entry Helper that entity is inserted at the cursor insertion point 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 165 Authentic User Manual An entity is useful if you will be using a text string XML fragment or some other external resource in multiple locations in your document You define the entity which is basically a short name that stands in for the require
42. command enables you to open an editable view of a database DB in Authentic View All the information about connecting to the DB and how to display the DB and accept changes to it in Authentic View is contained in a StyleVision Power Stylesheet It is such a DB based StyleVision Power Stylesheet that you open with the Edit Database Data command This sets up a connection to the DB and displays the DB data through an XML lens in Authentic View Clicking the Edit Database Data command opens the Edit Database Data dialog 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic Menu 291 User Reference User Manual Browse for the required SPS file and select it This connects to the DB and opens an editable view of the DB in Authentic View The design of the DB view displayed in Authentic View is contained in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Please note If with the Edit Database Data command you attempt to open a StyleVision Power Stylesheet that is not based on a DB or to open a DB based StyleVision Power Stylesheet that was created in a version of StyleVision prior to the StyleVision 2005 release you will receive an error Please note StyleVision Power Stylesheets are created using Altova StyleVision 12 8 3 Assign Edit a StyleVision Stylesheet Assign a StyleVision Stylesheet The Assign a StyleVision Stylesheet command assigns a StyleVision Power Stylesheet SPS to an XML document to enable the viewing and editing of that XML document in Aut
43. 1 1 Note The namespace binding context is not used in the element scheme because the element scheme does not support qualified names 12 2 4 Copy XPath The Copy XPath command is available in Text View and Grid View and creates an XPath expression that selects the currently selected node s and copies the expression to the clipboard This enables you to paste the expression into a document for example in an XSLT document All expressions start from the document root The XPath expression is resolved differently in Grid View and Text View In Grid View if a single element is highlighted the XPath expression will select not that specific element but all elements of that name at that hierarchical level of the document In Text View that specific element is selected For example if an element called LastName of the third Person element of the second Company element is selected the XPath expressions would be as follows Grid View Companies Company Person LastName Text View Companies Company 2 Person 3 LastName Note In Grid View the Copy XPath command can also be accessed via the context menu 12 2 5 Copy XPointer The Copy XPointer command is available in Text View and Grid View It creates an element scheme XPointer for the currently selected node s and copies it to the clipboard This enables you to paste the XPointer into a document for example in the xpointer attribute of an XInclude element in an XML
44. 12 9 6 Expand Hotkey on the numeric keypad This command expands the selected element by one level The command can be used in the Grid View In the Grid View the element and all its children remain selected after expansion This allows you to expand a large element by pressing the key repeatedly You can expand and collapse any element by clicking on the gray bar to the left of each element 12 9 7 Collapse Hotkey on the numeric keypad This command collapses the selected element by one level The command can be used in the Grid View 298 User Reference View Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 You can expand and collapse any element by clicking on the gray bar to the left of each element 12 9 8 Expand Fully Hotkey on the numeric keypad This command expands all child items of the selected element down to the last level of nesting The command can be used in the Grid View 12 9 9 Collapse Unselected Hotkey CTRL key on the numeric keypad This command allows you to focus on one element and its children and ignore all the other surrounding elements The command can be used in the Grid View Select the item that you want to work with and choose this command to collapse all other unselected elements 12 9 10 Optimal Widths This command adjusts the widths of all columns so that each has a width that exactly accommodates in one line the longest text string in any o
45. 2011 Altova GmbH File Menu 217 User Reference User Manual Specifying the document element of a new XML document If you select an XML Schema there can be more than one global element in it all of which are potential document or root elements You can select which of these is to be the root element of the XML document in the Select a Root Element dialog which pops up if you select Schema in the New File dialog and if the XML Schema has more than one global element The new XML document is created with this element as its document element Assigning a StyleVision Power Stylesheet when creating a new document When a new XML document is created you can associate a StyleVision Power Stylesheet sps file to view the document in Authentic View In the Create New Document dialog see screenshot above when you click the Select StyleVision Stylesheet the Create New Document dialog shown below appears You can browse for the required StyleVision Power Stylesheet in the folder tabs displayed in the New dialog Alternatively you can click the Browse button to navigate for and select the StyleVision Power Stylesheet The tabs that appear in the New dialog correspond to folders in 218 User Reference File Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 the sps Template folder of your application folder 12 1 2 Open Ctrl O The Open command pops up the familiar Windows Open dialog and allows you to open any XML related document
46. 2011 Altova GmbH View Menu 297 User Reference User Manual 12 9 4 Authentic View This command switches the current document into the Authentic View Authentic View enables you to edit XML documents based on StyleVision Power Stylesheet templates created in StyleVision The templates in StyleVision are saved as StyleVision Power Stylesheets sps files and supply all the necessary information needed by Authentic View To open a template select the File New command and then click the Select a StyleVision stylesheet button Please see the Authentic View documentation for further information Please note If when you try to switch to Authentic View you receive a message saying that a temporary temp file could not be created contact your system administrator The system administrator must change the default Security ID for non power users to allow them to create folders and files 12 9 5 Browser View This command switches the current document into Browser View This view uses an XML enabled browser to render the XML document using information from potential CSS or XSL style sheets When switching to browser view the document is first checked for validity if you have selected Validate upon saving in the File tab of the Options dialog Use the menu command Tools Options to open this dialog For further information on this view please see the detailed description of the various views in the Main Window section
47. 205 Source Control User Manual 3 Type the command gt regsvr32 svncom dll PushOK SVN SCC x64 version 1 6 3 1 http www pushok com soft_svn php A standard installation of PushOK SVN SCC is sufficient for use with Altova products When installing under Vista it is possible that the COM library svncom dll cannot be registered In this case finish the installation and then register the library manually by following these steps 1 Start a command window using the option Run as administrator 2 Enter cd C Program Files PushOK Software SVNSCC svn 3 Type the command gt regsvr32 svncom dll QSC Team Coherence Client 7 2 1 35 http www teamcoherence com A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products If the server is installed on the client machine a default connection is created after the client installation If the server resides on a different machine you need to change the HOSTNAME property in the Connection Properties dialog of Team Coherence client to point to the relevant machine Qumasoft QVCS Enterprise 2 1 18 http www qumasoft com Requirements J2SE 1 5 or later http java sun com j2se downloads html To install Qumasoft QVCS Enterprise client run the installer If your operating system is Vista you must modify the installation directory from the default value C Program Files QVCS Enterprise Client to C QVCS Enterprise Client This must be done as
48. 334 XSLT parameters passing to stylesheet via interface 283 XSLT processors in Altova products 351 XSLT stylesheet assigning to XML document 287 assigning XML document to 287 opening 288 XSLT stylesheet for FO assigning to XML document 287 XSLT transformation 281 assigning XSLT file 34 in XMLSpy 35 to FO 282 to PDF 282 tutorial 34 Index 2011 Altova GmbH 384 Z Zoom feature in Schema Design View 279 Zooming in Text View 44
49. CTRL mouse wheel back Zoom Out 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 309 User Reference User Manual Currently assigned keyboard shortcuts Hotkeys by function Abandon edits Esc Add Child Attribute CTRL ALT I Add Child CDATA CTRL ALT D Add Child Comment CTRL ALT M Add Child Element CTRL ALT E Add Child Text CTRL ALT T Append Attribute CTRL I Append CDATA CTRL D Append Comment CTRL M Append Element CTRL E Grid View Append Text CTRL T Check well formedness F7 Closes active window CTRL F4 Close XMLSpy Alt F4 Collapse Num Collapse unselected CTRL Num Confirms a selection Return Space bar Copy CTRL C Cut SHIFT Del or CTRL X Cycle through windows CTRL TAB and CTRL F6 Delete item Del Expand Num Expand fully Num File New CTRL N File Open CTRL O File Print CTRL P File Save CTRL S Find CTRL F Find Next F3 Goto line char CTRL G Help Menu F1 Highlight other tag in pair when cursor is inside a start or end element tag CTRL E Text View Insert Attribute CTRL SHIFT I Insert CDATA CTRL SHIFT D Insert Comment CTRL SHIFT M Insert Element CTRL SHIFT E Insert Text content CTRL SHIFT T Move selection bar Arrow keys up down Open last file Alt F 1 Paste CTRL V Redo CTRL Y Refresh F5 Replace CTRL H Selec
50. Note If you wish to change the current source control provider this can be done in any of two ways i via the Source Control options Tools Options Source Control or ii in the Change Source Control dialog Project Source Control Change Source Control Note Note that a Source Control project is not the same as an XMLSpy project Source Control projects are directory dependent while XMLSpy projects are logical constructions without direct directory dependence For additional information see the section Source Control Open from Source Control The Open from Source Control command creates an existing source control project locally This command is enabled only if an XMLSpy project has previously been added to source control using the menu option Add to Source Control 1 Select Project Source Control Open from Source Control Enter your login details in the Login dialog that appears 2 The Create Local Project from SourceSafe dialog box appears screenshot below Select the folder to contain the local project This folder becomes the Working Folder or Checkout Folder in the screenshot below C Repository 3 Select the source control project you want to download In the screenshot above the source control project folder NewJavaV2010 has been selected Files in the source control project folder will be downloaded to the local folder If the local folder you have 242 User Reference Project Menu 2011 A
51. Options XSL FO Transformation output The XSL FO Transformation command pops up the Choose XSL FO Output dialog screenshot below If the active document is an XML document without an XSLT assignment you are first prompted for an XSLT file 2011 Altova GmbH XSL XQuery Menu 283 User Reference User Manual You can view the output of the FO processor directly on screen using FOP viewer or you can generate an output file in any one of the following formats PDF text an XML area tree MIF PCL or PostScript You can also switch on messages from the FO processor to show i the processor s standard output message in the Messages window and ii the processor s error messages in the Messages window To switch on either these two options check the appropriate check box at the bottom of the dialog Please note The Apache FOP processor can be downloaded free of charge using the link at the Altova Download Center After downloading and installing FOP you must set the path to the FOP batch file in the of the Options dialog Tools Options 12 7 3 XSL Parameters XQuery Variables The XSL XQuery XSL Parameters XQuery Variables command opens the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog see screenshot You can enter the name of one or more parameters you wish to pass to the XSLT stylesheet or one or more external XQuery variables you wish to pass to the XQuery document and their respective values These par
52. Project properties The properties of a folder are stored in the Properties dialog of that folder It is accessed by first selecting the folder and then the Properties command in the Project menu or context menu obtained by right clicking the folder Note that properties can be defined not only for the top 2011 Altova GmbH Creating and Editing Projects 191 Projects User Manual level project folder but also for folders at various levels of the project hierarchy The following properties of a folder can be defined and edited in the Properties dialog Folder name cannot be edited for the top level project folder for which instead of a name a filepath is displayed File extensions cannot be edited for the top level project Validation specifies the DTD or XML Schema file that should be used to validate XML files in a folder Transformations specifies i the XSLT files to be used for transforming XML files in the folder and ii the XML files to be transformed with XSLT files in the folder Destination files for the output of transformations specifies the file extension and the folder where the files are to be saved SPS files for Authentic View specifies the SPS files to be used so that XML files in a folder can be viewed and edited in Authentic View Source control in projects Source control systems that are compatible with Microsoft Visual Source Safe are supported in projects How to use thi
53. Scrolling over a minimized sidebar rolls out that sidebar To auto hide and restore sidebars click the drawing pin icon in the title bar of the sidebar window or right click the title bar and select Auto Hide 1 1 1 Main Window The Main Window screenshot below is where you view and edit documents Files in the Main Window Any number of files can be opened and edited at once Each open document has its own window and a tab with its name at the bottom of the Main Window To make an open document active click its tab If several files are open some document tabs might not be visible for lack of space in the document tabs bar Document tabs can be brought into view by i using the scroll buttons at the right of the document tab bar or ii selecting the required document from the list at the bottom of the Window menu When the active document is maximized its Minimize Restore and Close buttons are located at the right side of the Menu Bar When a document is cascaded tiled or 2011 Altova GmbH The Graphical User Interface GUI 11 Introduction User Manual minimized the Maximize Restore and Close buttons are located in the title bar of the document window When you maximize one file all open files are maximized Open files can be cascaded or tiled using commands in the Window menu You can also activate open files in the sequence in which they were opened by using Ctrl Tab or Ctrl F6
54. archival copy of the Software provided your backup and archival copies are not installed or used on any computer and further provided that all such copies shall bear the original and unmodified copyright patent and other intellectual property markings that appear on or in the Software You may not transfer the rights to a backup or archival copy unless you transfer all rights in the Software as provided under Section 3 f Home Use Personal and Non Commercial In order to further familiarize yourself with the Software and allow you to explore its features and functions you as the primary user of the computer on which the Software is installed for commercial purposes may also install one copy of the Software on only one 1 home personal computer such as your laptop or desktop solely for your personal and non commercial HPNC use This HPNC copy may not be used in any commercial or revenue generating business activities including without limitation work from home teleworking telecommuting or other work related use of the Software The HPNC copy of the Software may not be used at the same time on a home personal computer as the Software is being used on the primary computer g Key Codes Upgrades and Updates Prior to your purchase and as part of the registration for the thirty 30 day evaluation period as applicable you will receive an evaluation key code You will receive a purchase key code when you elect to purchase the So
55. directory If you have pinned one of the files in the history dialog box then the pinned file will be used in the Compare text box Any two files can be selected using the Browse buttons To show the differences between two files do the following 1 Check out a file from your project Click on the file in the project window 252 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 Select the menu option Project Source control Show Differences A dialog box prompting for more information may appear at this time 3 Select the appropriate entries and confirm with OK The differences between the two files are highlighted in both windows this example uses MS Source Safe Show Properties The Show Properties command displays the properties of the currently selected file screenshot below The properties displayed depends on the source control provider you use 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 253 User Reference User Manual Note that this command can only be used on single files Refresh Status The Refresh Status command refreshes the status of all project files independent of their current status Source Control Manager The Source Control Manager command starts your source control software with its native user interface Change Source Control The Change Source Control command pops up the Change Source Control dialog box screenshot below which enables you to change the sourc
56. indicated with and the record is displayed in Authentic View as a regular record Modifying a record To modify a record place the cursor at the required point in the DB table and edit the record as required If the number of displayed records is limited you may need to navigate to the required record see Navigating a DB Table When you modify a record entries in all fields of the record are underlined and the AltovaRowStatus of all primary instances of this record is set to U for Updated All secondary instances of this record have their AltovaRowStatus set to u lowercase Primary and secondary instances of a record are defined by the structure of the DB and correspondingly of the XML Schema generated from it For example if an Address table is included in a Customer table then the Address table can occur in the Design Document in two types of instantiations as the Address table itself and within instantiations of the Customer table Whichever of these two types is modified is the type that has been primarily modified Other types there may be more than one other type are secondary types Datatype errors are flagged by being displayed in red The modifications are saved to the DB by clicking File Save After a modified record is saved to the DB its AltovaRowStatus field is initialized indicated with and the record is displayed in Authentic View as a regular record Please note If even a single field of a reco
57. pressing Enter inside the chapter but outside any paragraph element including within the title element causes a new chapter to be appended after the current chapter assuming that multiple chapters are allowed by the schema Please note The Enter key does not insert a new line This is the case even when the cursor is inside a text node such as paragraph Using the keyboard The keyboard can be used in the standard way for typing and navigating Note the following special points The Tab key moves the cursor forward stopping before and after nodes and highlighting node contents it steps over static content The add and add Node hyperlinks are considered node contents and are highlighted when tabbed They can be activated by pressing either the spacebar or the Enter key 168 Authentic Authentic Scripting 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 7 3 Authentic Scripting The Authentic Scripting feature provides more flexibility and interactivity to SPS designs These designs can be created or edited in StyleVision Enterprise and Professional editions and can be viewed in the Authentic View of the Enterprise and Professional editions of Altova products A complete listing of support for this feature in Altova products is given in the table below Note however that in the trusted version of Authentic Browser plug in internal scripting is turned off because of security concerns Altova Product Authentic Scripts C
58. resource A public identifier is a location independent identifier which enables some processors to identify the resource If you specify both a public and system identifier the public identifier resolves to the system identifier and the system identifier is used 4 If you have selected PUBLIC as the Type enter the public identifier of your resource in the PUBLIC field If you have selected Internal or SYSTEM as your Type the PUBLIC field is disabled 5 In the Value Path field you can enter any one of the following If the entity type is Internal enter the text string you want as the value of your entity Do not enter quotes to delimit the entry Any quotes that you enter will be treated as part of the text string If the entity type is SYSTEM enter the URI of the resource or select a resource on your local network by using the Browse button If the resource contains parsed data it must be an XML file i e it must have a xml extension Alternatively the resource can be a binary file such as a GIF file If the entity type is PUBLIC you must additionally enter a system identifier in this field 166 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 6 The NDATA entry tells the processor that this entity is not to be parsed but to be sent to the appropriate processor The NDATA field must therefore contain some value to indicate that the entity is an unparsed entity Dialog features You ca
59. second screenshot below The Text View Settings dialog is accessed via the View Text View Settings command or the Text View Settings button in the Text toolbar Settings in the Text View Settings dialog apply to 2011 Altova GmbH Text View 45 Editing Views User Manual the entire application not only to the active document Other useful features are the Zooming and Go to Line Character features Line numbers Line numbers are displayed in the line numbers margin screenshot below which can be toggled on and off In the Text View Settings dialog see screenshot above When a section of text is collapsed the line numbers of the collapsed text are also hidden A related command is the Go to Line Character command Bookmarks Lines in the document can be separately bookmarked for quick reference and access If the bookmarks margin is toggled on bookmarks are displayed in the bookmarks margin otherwise bookmarked lines are highlighted in cyan The bookmarks margin can be toggled on or off in the Text View Settings dialog screenshot above You can edit and navigate bookmarks using commands in the Edit menu and Text toolbar Bookmarks can be inserted with the Edit Insert Remove Bookmark command enabling you to mark a line in the document for reference A bookmark can be removed by selecting the bookmarked line and then selecting the Edit Insert Remove Bookmark command To navigate through the bookmarks in a document us
60. such as annotations simple types and attribute groups do not have a content model Those components for which content models are possible have a icon to the left of the component name Clicking on this icon opens the Content Model View for that global component Key terms Simple type and complex type A simple type is used to define all attributes and elements that contain only text and that have no associated attribute A simple type therefore has no content model only text which can be restricted by the datatype A complex type is one that has at least one child element or attribute Declaring a child element on an element automatically assigns the element a type of complex Global and local components A global component can be any of the five listed above A global component can be defined in Schema Overview and it then immediately appears in the list of global components in Schema Overview If the global component is a complex type an element declaration or a model group you can subsequently define its content model by editing it in Content Model View Once a global component has been defined it can be referenced by local components A local component is created directly within the content model of some component Note that in the Content Model View a local component can be converted into a global component via the right click context menu 56 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011
61. user manual find out about the various support options available to you and discover other products in the Altova range 2011 Altova GmbH The Graphical User Interface GUI 9 Introduction User Manual 1 1 The Graphical User Interface GUI The Graphical User Interface GUI consists of a Main Window and several sidebars see illustration below By default the sidebars are located around the Main Window and are organized into the following groups Project Window Info Window Entry Helpers Elements Attributes Entities etc depending upon the type of document currently active Output Windows Messages The main window and sidebars are described in the sub sections of this section The GUI also contains a menu bar status bar and toolbars all of which are described in a subsection of this section Switching on and off the display of sidebars Sidebar groups Project Window Info Window Entry Helpers Output Windows can be displayed or hidden by toggling them on and off via the commands in the Window menu A displayed sidebar or a group of tabbed sidebars can also be hidden by right clicking the title bar of the displayed sidebar or tabbed sidebar group and selecting the command Hide Floating and docking the sidebars An individual sidebar window can either float free of the GUI or be docked within the GUI When a floating window is docked it docks into its last docked position A window can also
62. 356 358 Dockable window 322 Docking windows 9 Documents in Main Window 10 DTD assigning to XML document 271 generate outline XML file from 272 generating from XML Schema Enterprise and Professional editions 115 go to definition in from XML document 272 go to from XML document 271 menu commands related to 271 DTD Schema menu 271 DTDs 113 313 314 converting to XML Schemas Enterprise and Professional editions 114 Index 2011 Altova GmbH 374 DTDs 113 313 314 editing in Grid View Enterprise and Professional editions 114 editing in Text View 114 generating XML document from 114 Duplicate row in Authentic View 294 Dynamic SPS tables in Authentic View usage of 150 Dynamic tables editing 86 E Edit menu 231 Edited with XMLSPY 313 Editing in Text View 47 Editing views 41 element type specifying in XML document 24 ElementFormDefault settings in Schema Design View 275 Elements entry helper in Authentic View 90 E mail sending files with 228 Empty elements 314 Empty lines in XML documents in Text View 103 encoding default 319 in XQuery document 337 of files 222 End User License Agreement 355 359 End of line markers 299 Engine information 331 Enhanced Grid View 296 Enter key effects of using 167 Entities defining in Authentic View 146 164 in XML Schema based XML 101 inserting in Authentic View 143 146
63. Altova XSLT engines XSLT parameters can be stored in a convenient GUI dialog All the stored parameters are passed to the XSLT document each time you transform For more information see the description of the XSLT Parameters XQuery Variable command Batch processing with AltovaXML AltovaXML is a free standalone application that contains Altova s XML validator XSLT engines and XQuery engine It can be used from the command line via a COM interface in Java programs and in NET applications to validate XML documents transform XML documents using XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 stylesheets and execute XQuery documents XSLT transformation tasks can therefore be automated with the use of Altova XML For example you can create a batch file that calls AltovaXML to transform a set of documents See the Altova XML documentation for details 2011 Altova GmbH XQuery 125 XSLT and XQuery User Manual 6 2 XQuery Altova website XQuery Editor XQuery documents can be edited in Text View The Entry Helpers syntax coloring and intelligent editing are different than for XML documents see screenshot line numbering and folding margins in Enterprise and Professional Editions only We call this mode of Text View its XQuery Mode In addition you can validate your XQuery document in Text View and execute the code in an XQuery document with an optional XML file if required using the built in Altova XQuery Engine Please note XQuery files can be edit
64. Comments and processing instructions In XML Schema documents comments and processing instructions within simple types and complex types are collected and moved to the end of the enclosing object In such cases it is therefore recommended that you use annotations instead of comments Creating global components To create a global component in Schema Overview 1 Click the Insert or Append icon at the top of the Schema Overview This pops up a menu listing the various component types element simple type complex type model group etc 2 Select the type of component you want An entry of that type is created in the list of global components 3 Enter the name of the component in the entry and press Enter The name of the new global component is added to the appropriate list s Elm Grp Com Sim etc in the Component Navigator entry helper You can edit the content model of the new global component either by double clicking the component name in the Component Navigator or by clicking the icon to the left of the new component s name in the list of global components Please note You can also create a global component while editing in Content Model View Right click anywhere in the window and select New Global Element While editing in Content Model View you can make a local element a global element or even a complex type if the element has an element or attribute child Select the local element right click anywhere
65. DTD refers to the current project Please note Files referenced by processing instructions such as XSLT files are not considered to be related files 12 3 12 Add Project Folder to Project The Project Add Project Folder to Project command adds a new folder to the current project Use this command to add a new folder to the current project or a sub folder to a project folder You can also access this command from the context menu when you right click on a folder in the project window Note A project folder can be dragged and dropped into another project folder or to any other location in the project Also a folder can be dragged from Windows File Explorer and dropped into any project folder Note Project folders are green while external folders are yellow 12 3 13 Add External Folder to Project The Project Add External Folder to Project command adds a new external folder to the current project Use this command to add a local or network folder to the current project You can also access this command from the context menu when you right click a folder in the project window Note External folders are yellow while project folders are green Note Files contained in external folders cannot be placed under source control Adding external folders to projects To add an external folder to the project 256 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 Select the menu option Project Add E
66. Edition you cannot edit this document in Schema View Schema View is a drag and drop editing view in the Enterprise and Professional editions in which you can edit an overview of the schema s global components and then edit each global component in a separate view that component s content model view The XML file you create in the next part of the tutorial will be based on the AddressLast xsd schema so make sure that you do not modify the AddressLast xsd schema that is supplied withy our installation 22 XMLSpy Tutorial XML Documents 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 3 XML Documents In this section you will learn how to create and work with XML documents in XMLSpy You will also learn how to use the various intelligent editing features of XMLSpy Objective The objectives of this section are to learn how to do the following Create a new XML document based on the AddressLast xsd schema Specify the type of an element so as to make an extended content model for that element available to the element during validation Insert elements and attributes and enter content for them in Text View using intelligent entry helpers Validate the XML document Commands used in this section In this section of the tutorial you will mostly use the Grid View and Text View and in one section Schema View The following commands are used File New Creates a new type of XML file View Text View Switches to Text Vi
67. FO document which can then be further processed to generate PDF output XMLSpy contains built in XSLT processors for XSLT 1 0 and XSLT 2 0 and can link to an FO processor on your system to transform XML files and generate various kinds of outputs The location of the FO processor must be specified in the XSL tab of the Options dialog in order to be able to use it directly from within the XMLSpy interface XMLSpy also has a built in XQuery engine which can be used to execute XQuery documents with or without reference to an XML document Commands to deal with all the above transformations are accessible in the XSL XQuery menu In addition this menu also contains commands to work with the Altova XSLT XQuery Debugger 12 7 1 XSL Transformation F10 The XSL XQuery XSL Transformation command transforms an XML document using an assigned XSLT stylesheet The transformation can be carried out using the appropriate built in Altova XSLT Engine Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine for XSLT 1 0 stylesheets Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine for XSLT 2 0 stylesheets the Microsoft supplied MSXML module or an external XSLT processor If your XML document contains a reference to an XSLT stylesheet then this stylesheet is used for the transformation An XSLT stylesheet can be assigned to an XML document using the Assign XSL command If an XSLT stylesheet has not been assigned to an XML file you are prompted for the XSLT stylesheet to use You can also select a file via
68. Note Pretty printing is also used in the background when you save the document or switch views If the document is not well formed you will get an error message to that effect Correct the error and then pretty print The extent of indentation of a line is indicated by indentation guides which are vertical dotted lines see screenshot at the start of this section that are toggled on and off with the Indentation Guides check box in the Visual Aid pane of the Text View Settings dialog see screenshot above Using tabs and spaces for formatting You can use tabs and spaces for formatting text especially for non XML documents where the pretty printing option is not available When you press Return or Shift Return the cursor will jump to a position on the next line that corresponds to the starting position of the previous line Word wrapping Lines of text that are longer than the breadth of the Main Window can be made to wrap by toggling the View Word Wrap command on the corresponding icon is in the Text toolbar 3 1 2 Displaying the Document Text View has visual features to make the display and editing of large sections of text easier Some very useful features are i Line Numbers ii Bookmarks iii Source Folding expanding and collapsing the display of nodes iv Indentation Guides and v End of Line and Whitespace Markers These commands are available in the Text View Settings dialog first screenshot below and the Text toolbar
69. Note that the finished tutorial file CompanyFirst xml is in the Tutorial folder so you may need to rename it before you give that name to the file you have created Please note An XML document does not have to be valid in order to save it Saving an invalid document causes a prompt to appear warning you that you are about to save an invalid document You can select Save anyway if you wish to save the document in its current invalid state 2 3 5 Adding Elements and Attributes At this point there is only one Person element in the document To add a new Person element 1 Place the cursor after the already created Person element 2 Press Enter This creates a new line with the cursor positioned at the start of the new line Notice that the Person element is now available in the Elements Entry Helper 3 Double click the Person element in the Elements Entry Helper A new Person element with all mandatory child elements is appended screenshot below Notice that the optional Title child element of Person is not inserted 2011 Altova GmbH XML Documents 33 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual 4 Place the cursor before the closing angular bracket of the opening tag Then in the Append tab of the Attributes Entry Helper double click the Programmer entry This inserts an empty Programmer attribute after the Manager attribute The Programmer attribute is now grayed out in the Attributes Entry Helper Select the menu option File Sav
70. OK Note the following points As a shortcut for the Check In command right click a checked out item in the project window and select Check In from the context menu The following items can be checked in i single files in the Project window click the required file to select it use Ctrl Click to select multiple files use Ctrl Click ii folders in the Project window click the required folder to select it use Ctrl Click to select multiple folders The lock symbol denotes that the file folder is under source control but is currently not checked out The Differences button is enabled when a line in the Files pane is selected Clicking it enables you to see differences between two file versions Source control symbols Folders and files display certain symbols the meanings of which are given below Checked in Available for check out 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 247 User Reference User Manual Checked out by another user Not available for check out Checked out locally Can be edited and checked in Undo Check Out The Undo Check Out command rejects changes made to previously checked out files that is your locally updated files and retains the old files from the source control database To undo a check out do the following 1 Select the files in the Project window 2 Select Project Source Control Undo Check Out 3 In the Undo Check Out dialog that pops up select the files for
71. Standard Edition Schema View is available as a read only view Editing in Schema View is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions Organization of this section This section has been organized into the following sub sections Schema Overview describes how global components are displayed in Schema Overview and how they are edited Content Model View describes how the content models of individual global components are edited Entry Helpers explains the organization of the entry helpers in Schema View Identity Constraints describes how identity constraints are displayed and edited in Schema View Smart Restrictions is a XMLSpy editing feature that facilitates the graphical creation and editing of derived types from their base types this section describes how the Smart Restrictions feature is used 3 3 1 Schema Overview Schema Overview displays a list of all the global components of the schema global elements complex types etc You can insert append or delete global components as well as modify their properties To 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 55 Editing Views User Manual insert append or delete use the respective buttons at the top of Schema Overview To modify properties select the required component in the Schema Overview list and edit its properties in either the entry helpers at right of view or the Attributes Identity Constraints pane at bottom of view You can edit the con
72. Table 12 4 1 264 Display as Table 265 Ascending Sort 265 Descending Sort 266 Check Well Formedness 12 4 2 6 Altova XMLSpy 2011 267 Validate XML 12 4 3 270 Update Entry Helpers 12 4 4 271 DTD Schema Menu 12 5 271 Assign DTD 12 5 1 271 Assign Schema 12 5 2
73. The shortcut for the command is available as an icon in the Text toolbar 300 User Reference View Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Margins In the Margins pane the Line Number Bookmark and Source Folding margins can be toggled on and off These are separate margins and display respectively line numbers bookmarks and source folding icons to expand and collapse nodes These settings determine whether the margins are displayed in Text View or not Bookmark commands are in the Edit menu To expand and collapse nodes the Folding margin must be toggled on Tabs The Tab pane enables you to set the tab size in terms of spaces The radio buttons for inserting either tabs or spaces determine whether documents are displayed with tab or space indentation when pretty printing with indentation is toggled on Visual Aid The Visual Aid pane contains settings to toggle on indentation guides dotted vertical lines that show the indentation of the text end of line markers and whitespace markers Key map The key map is a list of XMLSpy shortcuts and their associated commands 2011 Altova GmbH Browser Menu 301 User Reference User Manual 12 10 Browser Menu The commands in the Browser menu are enabled in Browser View only 12 10 1 Back Backspace Alt Left Arrow In Browser View the Back command displays the previously viewed page The Backspace key also achieves the same effect The Back command is useful if
74. Toolbar When active the Show ScreenTips on toolbars check box displays a popup when the mouse pointer is placed over an icon in any of the icon bars The popup contains a short description of the icon function as well as the associated keyboard shortcut if one has been assigned The Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips check box allows you to decide if you want to have the shortcut displayed in the tooltip When active the Large icons check box switches between the standard size icons and larger versions of the icons 12 11 4 Restore Toolbars and Windows The Restore Toolbars and Windows command closes down XMLSpy and re starts it with the default settings Before it closes down a dialog pops up asking for confirmation about whether XMLSpy should be closed screenshot below 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 313 User Reference User Manual This command is useful if you have been resizing moving or hiding toolbars or windows and would now like to have all the toolbars and windows as they originally were 12 11 5 Options The Tools Options command enables you to define global application settings These settings are specified in a tabbed dialog box and saved in the registry They apply to all current and future document windows The Apply button in the Options dialog displays the changes in the currently open documents and fixes the current settings The changes are seen immediately in the background windows Each tab of the Opt
75. View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 3 3 Base Type Modification If the base type of a derived type is changed in Schema View content attributes facets and sample values defined within the derived type can be handled in one of two ways They can be preserved if they are still applicable in combination with the new base type They can be removed automatically whether or not they are still applicable in combination with the new base type When changing the base type of a derived type which contains content attributes facets or sample values the Base Type Modification dialog screenshot below is displayed If the Request Confirmation check box is de selected a pop up screenshot below indicates that the confirmation can be turned on again in the View tab of the Options dialog Tools Options View In the Schema View pane screenshot below of the View tab of the Options dialog Tools Options View you can specify whether content should be preserved and whether user confirmation is required for every base type modification Check the respective check boxes to preserve content and require confirmation if you wish 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 71 Editing Views User Manual these to be the default options 3 3 4 Entry Helpers in Schema View There are three Entry Helpers in Schema View Component Navigator Details Entry Helper and Facets Entry Helper The entry helpers are the same in both S
76. When a component is not selected it is white Single optional element Details The rectangle indicates an element and the dashed border means the element is optional The absence of a number range indicates a single element i e minOcc 0 and maxOcc 1 Element name is Location Note The context menu option Optional converts a mandatory element into an optional one Mandatory multiple element Details The rectangle indicates an element and the solid border indicates that the element is required The number range 1 5 means that minOcc 1 and maxOcc 5 Element name is Alias Mandatory multiple element containing child elements Details The rectangle indicates an element and the solid border indicates that the element is required The number range 1 infinity means that minOcc 1 and maxOcc unbounded The plus sign means complex content i e at least one element or attribute child Element name is Division Note The context menu option Unbounded changes maxOcc to unbounded Clicking on the sign of the element expands the tree view and shows the child elements 62 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Element referencing global element Details The arrow in the bottom left means the element references a global element The rectangle indicates an element and the solid border indicates that the element is required The number range 1 infinity means that minOcc 1 and maxOcc unbound
77. XML document copying to the clipborad 234 XPointers 231 XQuery document validation 130 editing in Text View 125 engine information 331 entry helpers 127 execution 130 Extension functions 344 intelligent editing features 129 opening file 126 passing variables to the XQuery document 283 syntax coloring 127 XQuery 1 0 Engine information about 337 XQuery 1 0 functions general information about 340 implementation information 340 see under fn for specific functions 340 XQuery Execution 286 XQuery files setting file extensions in XMLSpy 126 XQuery processor in Altova products 351 xs QName also see QName 341 xsi type usage 24 XSL see XSLT 288 XSL transformation see XSLT 34 XSL XQuery menu 281 XSL FO and XSLT transformations 123 xsl preserve space 332 xsl strip space 332 XSLT 298 and batch transformations 123 auto completion in Text View 121 documents 121 engine information 331 entry helpers for 121 Extension functions 344 functionality in XMLSpy 121 modifying in XMLSpy 36 processor 319 transformations in XMLSpy 123 validating 121 XSLT 1 0 Engine limitations and implementation specific behavior 332 XSLT 2 0 Engine general information about 334 information about 334 XSLT 2 0 functions implementation specific behavior of 336 see under fn for specific functions 336 XSLT 2 0 stylesheet namespace declarations in
78. XML document The XML data and consequently the XML Infoset that is passed to the Altova XPath 2 0 Engine and Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine is stripped of boundary whitespace only text nodes A boundary whitespace only text node is a child whitespace only text node that occurs between two elements within an element of mixed content This stripping has an effect on the value returned by the fn position fn last fn count and fn deep equal functions For any node selection that selects text nodes also boundary whitespace only text nodes would typically also be included in the selection However since the XML Infoset used by the Altova engines has boundary whitespace only text nodes stripped from it these nodes are not present in the XML Infoset As a result the size of the selection and the numbering of nodes in the selection will be different than that for a selection which included these text nodes The fn position fn last fn count and fn deep equal functions therefore could produce results that are different from those produced by some other processors A situation in which boundary whitespace only text nodes are evaluated as siblings of other elements arises most commonly when xsl apply templates is used to apply templates When the fn position fn last and fn count functions are used in patterns with 2011 Altova GmbH XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 341 Engine Information Appendices a name test for e
79. XPath 2 0 functions see the section XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 1 2 1 General Information The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine conforms to the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XSLT 2 0 Recommendation of 23 January 2007 Note the following general information about the engine Backwards Compatibility The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine is backwards compatible The only time the backwards compatibility of the XSLT 2 0 Engine comes into play is when using the XSLT 2 0 Engine of Altova XML to process an XSLT 1 0 stylesheet Note that there could be differences in the outputs produced by the XSLT 1 0 Engine and the backwards compatible XSLT 2 0 Engine In all other Altova products the backwards compatibility issue never arises This is because these products automatically select the appropriate engine for the transformation For example consider that in XMLSpy you specify that a certain XML document be processed with an XSLT 1 0 stylesheet When the transformation command is invoked XMLSpy automatically selects the XSLT 1 0 Engine of XMLSpy to carry out the transformation Note The stylesheet version is specified in the version attribute of the stylesheet or transform element of the stylesheet Namespaces Your XSLT 2 0 stylesheet should declare the following namespaces in order for you to be able to use the type constructors and functions available in XSLT 2 0 The prefixes given below are conventionally used you could use alternative prefixes if
80. XSLT engines the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine and Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine The Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine is used to process XSLT 1 0 stylesheets The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine is used to process XSLT 2 0 stylesheets The correct engine is automatically selected by XMLSpy on the basis of the version attribute in the xsl stylesheet or xsl transform element In this tutorial transformation we use XSLT 1 0 stylesheets The Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine will automatically be selected for transformations with these stylesheets when the XSL Transformation command is invoked 2 4 1 Assigning an XSLT File To assign an XSLT file to the CompanyLast xml file 1 Click the CompanyLast xml tab in the main window so that CompanyLast xml becomes the active document and switch to Text View 2 Select the menu command XSL XQuery Assign XSL 3 Click the Browse button and select the Company xsl file from the Tutorial folder In the dialog you can activate the option Make Path Relative to CompanyLast xml if you wish to make the path to the XSL file in the XML document relative 4 Click OK to assign the XSL file to the XML document 5 Switch to Grid View to see the assignment screenshot below 2011 Altova GmbH XSLT Transformations 35 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual An XML stylesheet processing instruction is inserted in the XML document that references the XSL file If you activated the Make Path Relative to CompanyLast xml check box then the path is relative o
81. a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button Automating XSLT transformations with AltovaXML 2011 AltovaXML is a free application which contains Altova s XML Validator XSLT 1 0 XSLT 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 engines It can be used from the command line via a COM interface in Java programs and in NET applications to validate XML documents transform XML documents using XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 stylesheets and execute XQuery documents XSLT transformation tasks can therefore be automated with the use of AltovaXML For example you can create a batch file that calls AltovaXML to transform a set of documents See the AltovaXML documentation for details Transformations to ZIP files In order to enforce output to a ZIP file including Open Office XML OOXML files such as docx one must specify the ZIP protocol in the file path of the output file For example filename zip zip filename xxx filename docx zip filename xxx Note The directory structure might need to be created before running the transformation If 282 User Reference XSL XQuery Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 you are generating files for an Open Office XML archive you would need to zip the archive files in order to create the top level OOXML file for example docx 12 7 2 XSL FO Transformation Ctrl F10 FO is an XML format that describes paged documents An FO processor such a
82. an URL disable the cache DTD Schema files in memory option to have changes made to the schema appear immediately and not use the cached version of the schema Project When you start XMLSpy you can open the last used project automatically Save File When saving an XML document XMLSpy includes a short comment lt Edited with XMLSpy http www altova com gt near the top of the file This option can only be deactivated by licensed users and takes effect when editing or saving files in the Enhanced Grid or Schema Design View If a StyleVision Power Stylesheet is associated with an XML file the Authentic save link to design file option will cause the link to the StyleVision Power Stylesheet to be saved with the XML file Line breaks When you open a file the character coding for line breaks in it are preserved if Preserve old is selected Alternatively you can choose to code line breaks in any of three codings CR amp LF for PC CR for MacOS or LF for Unix No output formatting for In Text View the indentation of an element can be made to reflect its position in the element hierarchy see Save File You can however override this indentation for individual elements To do this enter the element name in the No output formatting for field All elements entered in this field will be formatted such that their descendant elements have no whitespace between them see screenshots Hierarchical indentation for all elements
83. an attribute of xml base in order to preserve the base URIs of the included element If the resulting XML document containing the included XML document s or tree fragment s must be valid according to a schema then the document element of the included document or the top level element of the tree fragment must be created with a content model that allows an attribute of xml base If according to the schema the xml base attribute is not allowed on this element then the resulting document will be invalid How to define an xml base attribute in an element s content model using XMLSpy s Schema View is described in the xml Prefixed Attributes section of the Schema View section of the documentation XPointers XMLSpy supports XPointers in XInclude The relevant W3C recommendations are the XPointer Framework and XPointer element Scheme recommendations The use of an XPointer in an XInclude element enables a specific part of the XML document to be included instead of the entire XML document XPointers are used within an XInclude element as follows lt xi include href PersonalAddressBook xml xpointer element usa gt lt xi include href BusinessAddressBook xml xpointer element 1 1 gt lt xi include href BobsAddressBook xml xpointer element usa 3 1 gt lt xi include href PatsAddressBook xml xpointer element usa element 1 1 gt In the element scheme of XPointer an NCName or a child sequence directed by integers may be
84. and fn count functions For any node selection that selects text nodes also boundary whitespace only text nodes would typically also be included in the selection However since the XML Infoset used by the Altova engines has boundary whitespace only text nodes stripped from it these nodes are not present in the XML Infoset As a result the size of the selection and the numbering of nodes in the selection will be different than that for a selection which included these text nodes The fn position fn last and fn count functions therefore could produce results that are different from those produced by some other processors A situation in which boundary whitespace only text nodes are evaluated as siblings of other elements arises most commonly when xsl apply templates is used to apply templates When the fn position fn last and fn count functions are used in patterns with a name test for example para 3 which is short for para position 3 boundary whitespace only nodes are irrelevant since only the named elements para in the above example are selected Note however that boundary whitespace only nodes are relevant in patterns that use the wildcard for example 10 Note If a boundary whitespace only text node is required in the output then insert the required whitespace within one of the two adjoining child elements For example the XML fragment lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt
85. appears you can select the Add Global Resource menu item to add a global resource The menu command itself pops up the Choose Global Resource dialog which lists all the file type and folder type global resources in the currently active Global Resources XML File Select the required global resource and it will be added to the selected project folder Projects and source control providers If you intend to add an project to a source control repository please ensure that the project files position in the hierarchical file system structure is one which enables you to add files only from below it taking the root directory to be the top of the directory tree In other words the directory where the project file is located essentially represents the root directory of the project within the source control repository Files added from above it the project root directory will be added to the project but their location in the repository may be an unexpected one if they are allowed to be placed there at all For example given the directory structure show above if a project file is saved in Folder3 and placed under source control Files added to Folder1 may not be placed under source control Files added to Folder2 are added to the root directory of the repository instead of to the project folder but are still under source control Files located in Folder3 and Folder4 work as expected and are placed under source control 12 3 1
86. assuming that all applications use this file You can also re name the file and save it to any location if you wish Consequently you may have multiple Global Resources XML files However only one of these Global Resources XML File can be active at any time and only the definitions contained in this file will be available to the application To select a Global Resources XML file to be the active file in the Manage Global Resources dialog screenshot below browse for it in the Definitions File entry and select it 2011 Altova GmbH Defining Global Resources 179 Altova Global Resources User Manual Managing global resources adding editing deleting In the Manage Global Resources dialog screenshot above you can add a global resource to the selected Global Resources XML File or edit or delete a selected global resource The Global Resources XML File organizes the aliases you add into a list of several sections files and folders see screenshot above To add a global resource click the Add button and define the global resource in the Global Resource dialog that pops up see description below After you define a global resource and save it the global resource or alias is added to the library of global definitions in the selected Global Resources XML File To edit a global resource select it and click Edit This pops up the Global Resource dialog in which you can make the necessary changes see the descriptions of files f
87. b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt or lt para gt This is lt b gt bold amp x20 lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt or lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt amp x20 italic lt gt lt para gt When such an XML fragment is processed with the same XSLT template given above it will produce This is bold italic XSLT 2 0 elements and functions 336 Engine Information XSLT 2 0 Engine Implementation Information 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Limitations and implementation specific behavior of XSLT 2 0 elements and functions are listed in the section XSLT 2 0 Elements and Functions XPath 2 0 functions Implementation specific behavior of XPath 2 0 functions is listed in the section XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 1 2 2 XSLT 2 0 Elements and Functions Limitations The xsl preserve space and xsl strip space elements are not supported Implementation specific behavior Given below is a description of how the Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine handles implementation specific aspects of the behavior of certain XSLT 2 0 functions xsl result document Additionally supported encodings are x base16tobinary and x base64tobinary function available The function tests for the availability of in scope functions XSLT 2 0 XPath 2 0 and extension functions unparsed text The href attribute accepts i relative paths for files in the base uri folder and ii absolute paths with or without the fil
88. be a section chapter article etc A paragraph in a valid XML file would already have ancestors Therefore adding a higher level element in Authentic View creates the new element as a sibling of the relevant ancestor For example if a section 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View Tutorial 139 Authentic User Manual element is inserted after a paragraph it is created as a sibling of the section that contains the current paragraph element Carrying out node operations Node operations can be carried out by selecting a command in the context menu or by clicking the node operation entry in the Elements entry helper In some cases an element or attribute can be added by clicking the Add Node link in the Authentic View of the document In the special cases of elements defined as paragraphs or list items pressing the Enter key when within such an element creates a new sibling element of that kind This section also describes how nodes can be created and deleted by using the Apply Element Remove Node and Clear Element mechanisms Inserting elements Elements can be inserted at the following locations The cursor location within an element node The elements available for insertion at that location are listed in a submenu of the context menu s Insert command In the Elements entry helper elements that can be inserted at a location are indicated with the icon In the NanonullOrg xml document place the cursor inside the para element
89. be configured using settings in the Schema Display Configuration dialog How to define what property descriptor lines are displayed in Content Model View has been described above The other settings are described below Single line settings You can define whether a property descriptor line is to contain single or double content and whether individual lines must appear for every element or only for elements that contain that property Use the appropriate radio buttons to define your settings Note that these two settings can be set for individual lines separately select the required line and make the setting 2011 Altova GmbH Schema Design Menu 279 User Reference User Manual Common line settings This option toggles the line descriptions i e the name of the property on and off Widths These sliders enable you to set the minimum and maximum size of the element rectangles in Content Model View Change the sizes if line descriptor text is not fully visible or if you want to standardize your display Distances These sliders let you define the horizontal and vertical distances between various elements onscreen Show in diagram The Annotations check box toggles the display of annotation text on or off as well as the annotation text width with the slider You can also toggle the display of the substitution groups on or off The Attributes and Identity Constraints appear in the Content Model diagram if their check boxes are selected
90. can be expanded Note The identity constraints listed in the content model of a component show constraints as defined with the key and keyref elements and with the unique element Identity constraints defined using the ID datatype are not shown in the content model diagram but in the Details Entry Helper Identity constraints can be displayed and edited in the Content Model View or in the Identity Constraints tab of Schema Overview In Content Model View you can toggle the Constraints box on and off with the Display Constraints icon Please note Property descriptor lines you have defined in the Schema Display Configuration dialog can be turned on and off by clicking the Add Predefined Details toolbar icon You can toggle Attributes and Identity Constraints to appear either in the diagram of the content model itself or in a pane below the Content Model View by clicking the Display in Diagram icons for attributes and constraints and respectively In Content Model View you can jump to the content model view of any global component within the current content model by holding down the CTRL key and double clicking the required component You can go to the content model of a base type by double clicking the name of the base type Other editing operations in Content Model View Editing operations in Content Model View are carried out via the context menu see screenshot that appears when you right click within Content Model View A
91. can use the Properties dialog to set the default folder whose settings should be used when you choose to validate or transform the file in non batch mode To do this use the Use settings in current folder as default check box see screenshot To access the Properties dialog and check this check box 1 Copy an XML file in a project to a different folder 2 Right click the copied file in the Project window and select Properties from the context menu Authentic View The Use config option allows you to select a StyleVision Power Stylesheet SPS file when editing XML files using Authentic View in the current folder After you have associated the schema SPS and XML files with each other and entered them in a project changing the location of any of the files could cause errors among the associations To avoid such errors it is best to finalize the locations of your schema SPS and XML files before associating them with each other and assigning them to a project 12 3 16 Most Recently Used Projects This command displays the file name and path for the nine most recently used projects allowing quick access to these files Also note that XMLSpy can automatically open the last project that you used whenever you start XMLSpy Tools Options File tab Project Open last project on program start 264 User Reference XML Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 4 XML Menu The XML menu contains commands commonly us
92. cell that intersects both headers or by selecting the element created as the table or any of its ancestors Non existent Elements When an element or attribute does not exist in the XML document then it can be given different background colors when selected and unselected This is shown in the screenshot below in 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 319 User Reference User Manual which the first row is selected Please note In addition to the colors you define here XMLSpy uses the regular selection and menu color preferences set in the Display Settings in the Control Panel of your Windows installation After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog Encoding The Encoding tab specifies options for file encodings Default encoding for new XML files The default encoding for new XML files can be set by selecting an option from the dropdown list A new document is created with an XML declaration containing the encoding value you specify here If a two or four byte encoding is selected as the default encoding i e UTF 16 UCS 2 or UCS 4 you can also choose between little endian and big endian byte ordering The encoding of existing XML files will be retained and can only be changed with the File Encoding command Open XML files with unknown encoding as If the encoding of an XML file cannot be determined or if the XML document has no encoding specification the file will be opened with the encoding
93. comparing files the DiffDog full path TamTam CVS SCC 1 2 40 TamTam SVN SCC 1 2 24 http www daveswebsite com software tamtamGo The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into TamTam CVS SCC and TamTam SVN SCC 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Specify the DiffDog full file path as the external tool for Diff Merge and Conflict Warning The default differencing editor CvsConflictEditor has problems comparing files with excessively long lines We recommended that you pretty print all files particularly ump files before storing them in the repository This limits the line length avoiding problems with the CVSConflictEditor 2011 Altova GmbH SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing 213 Source Control User Manual 214 User Reference 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 User Reference The User Reference section contains a complete description of all XMLSpy menu commands and explains their use in general We have tried to be comprehensive If however you have questions which are not covered in the User Reference or other parts of this documentation please look up the FAQs and Discussion Forums on the Altova website If you cannot find a suitable answer at these locations please do not hesitate to contact the Altova Support Center Standard Windows commands such as Open Save Cut Copy and Paste are in the File and Edit menus These menus additionally contain XML and Interne
94. created specifically for viewing and editing XML documents in Authentic View and for 2011 Altova GmbH Editing XML in Authentic View 107 XML User Manual generating standard output such as HTML PDF RTF and Word 2007 documents from XML SPSs are created with Altova StyleVision Editing document structure Valid nodes can be added to the document at any time by selecting a location and then adding the required node via the entry helpers Elements and Attributes or context menu The nodes available at any given location are restricted to the nodes that can be validly added as siblings or children at the selected location For example when the cursor is located within a paragraph you can append another paragraph if this is allowed by the schema When editing the structure of an XML document in Authentic View it could be useful to see the markup of the document Markup can therefore be switched on as tags screenshot below using the Authentic Show Large Markup command or the corresponding toolbar icon Editing content Content is created and edited by typing it into the nodes of the document Entities and CDATA sections can be added via the context menu entities also via the Entities entry helper More about editing in Authentic View For more details of how to edit in Authentic View see the Authentic View section 108 XML Entry Helpers for XML Documents 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 4 6 Entry Helpers for X
95. customization options are described in the User Reference section 1 2 2 Tutorials Projects Examples The XMLSpy installation package contains tutorials projects and example files Location of tutorials projects and example files The XMLSpy tutorials projects and example files are installed in the folder C Documents and Settings lt username gt My Documents Altova XMLSpy2011 Examples The My Documents Altova XMLSpy2011 folder will be installed for each user registered on a PC within that user s lt username gt folder Under this installation system therefore each user will have his or her own Examples folder in a separate working area Note about the master XMLSpy folder 2011 Altova GmbH The Application Environment 17 Introduction User Manual When XMLSpy is installed on a machine a master Altova XMLSpy2011 folder is created at the following folder location C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data When a user on that machine starts XMLSpy for the first time XMLSpy creates a copy of this master folder in the user s lt username gt My Documents folder It is therefore important not to use the master folder when working with tutorial or example files otherwise these edited files will be copied to the user folder of a user subsequently using XMLSpy for the first time Location of tutorial project and examples files All tutorial project and example files are located in the Examples folder Spe
96. description of the operations are given below 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 65 Editing Views User Manual Adding child compositors components and inserting appending compositors components 1 Right click the compositor or component This opens the context menu with only the allowed operations enabled 2 Select the required operation from the context menu Changing a compositor 1 Right click the compositor you want to change 2 Select the context menu option Change Model and from the sub menu select the compositor to which you want to change The currently selected compositor is checked If a compositor is not allowed at that point it is disabled Creating global components To create a new global component right click anywhere in Content Model View select New Global and from the sub menu the required component To make a local element a global element or global complex type right click the local element select Make Global and from the sub menu select either Element or Complex type If any of these components cannot legally be created then it is disabled 66 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Changing the occurrence definition You can toggle the minimum and maximum occurrences values of a compositor between 0 and 1 for minOccurs and 1 and unbounded for maxOccurs respectively Do this as follows 1 Right click the compositor or component for which the o
97. dll as follows 3 Open a command prompt window if you work with Vista start Windows Explorer go to C Windows System32 right click and run cmd exe As administrator 4 Go to the lt installation AccuRev dir gt bin directory 5 Enter the following command at the command prompt Regsvr32 AccuRev dll Regsvr32 SccAcc dll 6 Run the SwitchScc exe program and set AccuRev as the provider 7 Perform a Windows log off and log in again Aigenta Unified SCC 1 0 6 http aigenta com products UnifiedScc aspx Requirements source control client Aigenta Unified SCC works with subversion command line client 1 5 4 at http subversion tigris org CVSNT 2 5 client at http www cvsnt org Bazaar 1 9 Windows and related pre requisites at http bazaar vcs org http bazaar vcs org WindowsInstall A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products Borland StarTeam Cross Platform Client 2008 R2 http www borland com us products starteam To install the Borland StarTeam Microsoft SCC integration run the setup program and choose to install the SCC API Integration Altova products can now connect to the repository by specifying the server address the end point user and password to log on your project and working path Codice Software Plastic SCM Professional 2 7 127 10 SCC Plugin http www codicesoftware com xpproducts aspx A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products It
98. do so select a configuration and click the Copy Configuration icon Then select or enter a configuration name and click OK This creates a copy of the selected configuration which you can now change as required 184 Altova Global Resources Using Global Resources 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 9 2 Using Global Resources There are several types of global resources file type folder type Particular scenarios in XMLSpy allow the use of particular types of global resources For example you can use file type or folder type global resources for a Working XML File or a CSS file The various scenarios in which you can use global resources in XMLSpy are listed in this section Files and Folders Selections that determine which resource is used There are two application wide selections that determine what global resources can be used and which global resources are actually used at any given time The active Global Resources XML File is selected in the Global Resource dialog The global resource definitions that are present in the active Global Resources XML File are available to all files that are open in the application Only the definitions in the active Global Resources XML File are available The active Global Resources XML File can be changed at any time and the global resource definitions in the new active file will immediately replace those of the previously active file The active Global Resources XML File therefore dete
99. element and an instance of this child element exists in the original element then the child element of the original is retained in the new 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View 93 Editing Views User Manual element s content If the applied element has no child element with the same name as that of an instantiated child of the original element then the instantiated child of the original element is appended as a sibling of any child element or elements that the new element may have If the applied element has a child element for which no equivalent exists in the original element s content model then this child element is not created directly but Authentic View offers you the option of inserting it If a text range is selected rather than an element applying an element to the selection will create the applied element at that location with the selected text range as its content Applying an element when the cursor is an insertion point is not allowed Clear Element when range selected This icon appears when text within an element of mixed content is selected Clicking the icon clears the element from around the selected text range Clear Element when insertion point selected This icon appears when the cursor is placed within an element that is a child of a mixed content element Clicking the icon clears the inline element Attributes Entry Helper The Attributes Entry Helper consists of a drop down combo box and a list of a
100. ensure that the copied text does not invalidate the document The copied text should therefore be i lexically valid in the new location for example non numeric characters in a numeric node would be invalid and ii not otherwise invalidate the node for example four digits in a node that accepts only three digit numbers would invalidate the node If the pasted text does in any way invalidate the document this will be indicated by the text being displayed in red Delete The Delete command removes the selected node and its contents A node is considered to be selected for this purpose by placing the cursor within the the node or by clicking either the start or end tag of the node 2011 Altova GmbH Browser View 97 Editing Views User Manual 3 5 Browser View Browser View is typically used to view XML files that have an associated XSLT file When you switch to Browser View the XML file is transformed on the fly using the associated XSLT stylesheet and the result is displayed directly in Browser View HTML files which are either created directly as HTML or created via an XSLT transformation of an XML file To view XML and HTML files in Browser View click the Browser tab Note about Microsoft Internet Explorer and XSLT Browser View requires Microsoft s Internet Explorer 5 0 or later If you wish to use Browser View for viewing XML files transformed by an XSLT stylesheet we strongly recommend Internet Explore
101. entities and can be entered in the document by double clicking the respective entity in the Entities entry helper If these characters occur frequently for example in program code listings then they can be entered within CDATA sections To insert a CDATA section right click at the location where you wish to enter the CDATA section and select Insert CDATA Section from the context menu The XML processor ignores all markup characters within CDATA sections This also means that if you want a special character inside a CDATA section you should enter that character and not its entity reference Special characters that cannot be entered via the keyboard should be entered by copying them from the character map of your system to the required location in the document 142 Authentic Authentic View Tutorial 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 A frequently used text string can be defined as an entity which appears in the Entities entry helper The entity is inserted at the required locations by placing the cursor at each required location and double clicking the entity in the entry helper This is useful for maintenance because the value of the text string is held in one location if the value needs to be changed then all that needs to be done is to change the entity definition Note When markup is hidden in Authentic View an empty element can easily be overlooked To make sure that you are not overlooking an empty element switch l
102. explorer and browse to the directory that contains the Altova application executable Right click and run the Altova executable As Administrator The SCC registration will now be successful 208 Source Control SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 11 3 SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing You can configure certain Source Control Systems so that they use Altova DiffDog as their differencing tools The systems that support this feature are listed below together with the setup steps for each In XMLSpy you access the setup process via the Source Control tab of the Options dialog Tools Options screenshot below When using a 64 bit version of XMLSpy with a 32 bit source control program the Perform background status updates every ms option Tools Options is automatically grayed out and cannot be selected The Perform background status updates every xx ms check box is unchecked per default which means that status updates are not performed at all Activate the check box and enter a value in the field if you want to perform status updates every xx ms For 64 bit versions using 32 bit source control plugins this option has no effect In the Source Control tab select the required Source Control System and then click the Advanced button The dialog box that opens will be different for each Source Control System For the setup process note the following If you have perf
103. file you will be prompted to assign one to it You must use an SPS that is based on the same schema as the XML file A new XML file is created and displayed in Authentic View by selecting the File New command and then clicking the Select a StyleVision Stylesheet button This new file is a template file associated with the SPS you open It can have a variable amount of starting data already present in it This starting data is contained in an XML file a Template XML File that may optionally be associated with the SPS After the Authentic View of an XML file is displayed you can enter data in it and save the file You can also open an SPS via the Authentic New Document command If a 2011 Altova GmbH 133 Authentic User Manual Template XML File has been assigned to the SPS then the data in the Template XML File is used as the starting data of the XML document template created in Authentic View In this section This section contains an Authentic View tutorial which shows you how to use Authentic View It is followed by the section Editing in Authentic View which explains individual editing features in detail More information about Authentic View For more information about Authentic View information see i the section Editing Views Authentic View in this documentation which describes the Authentic View editing window and ii the Authentic menu section of the User Reference part of this documentation 134 Au
104. following respective locations Example files are usually located in a sub folder of the My Documents folder Windows XP C Documents and Settings lt username gt My Documents Windows Vista Windows 7 C Users lt username gt Documents Application folder The Application folder is the folder where your Altova application is located The path to the Application folder is by default the following Windows XP C Program Files Altova Windows Vista Windows 7 C Program Files Altova 32 bit package on 64 bit Windows OS XP Vista 7 C Program Files x86 Altova 8 Introduction 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 Introduction This introduction describes The application GUI and The application environment The GUI section starts off by presenting an overview of the GUI and then goes on to describe each of the the various GUI windows in detail It also shows you how to re size move and otherwise work with the windows and the GUI The Application Environment section points out the various settings that control how files are displayed and can be edited It also explains how and where you can customize your application In this section you will learn where important example and tutorial files have been installed on your machine and later in the section you are linked to the Altova website where you can explore the feature matrix of your application learn about the multiple formats of your
105. for individual folders take precedence over files specified for ancestor folders File extensions The File extensions help to determine the automatic file to folder distribution that occurs when you add new files to the project as opposed as to one particular folder User ID and password for external folders Among the properties of external folders including external Web folders you can save the User ID and password that might be required for accessing the server Validate Define the DTD or Schema document that should be used to validate all files in the current folder Main Pages in this example XSL transformation of XML files You can define the XSL Stylesheet to be used for XSL Transformation of all files in the folder If you are developing XSL Stylesheets yourself you can also assign an example XML document 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 263 User Reference User Manual to be used to preview the XSL Stylesheet in response to an XSL Transformation command issued from the stylesheet document instead of the XML instance document XSL FO transformation of XML files You can define the XSL Stylesheet containing XSL FO markup to be used for XSL FO Transformation of all files in the folder Destination files of XSL transformation For batch XSL Transformations you can define the destination directory the transformed files should be placed in If you have added one file or URL to more than one folder in your project you
106. for the required file in descendant folders One advantage of addressing files for editing via global resources is that related files can be saved under different configurations of a single global resource and accessed merely by changing configurations Any editing changes would have to be saved before changing the configuration 186 Altova Global Resources Using Global Resources 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Saving as global resource A newly created file can be saved as a global resource Also an already existing file can be opened and then saved as a global resource When you click the File Save or File Save As commands the Save dialog appears Click the Switch to Global Resource button to access the available global resources screenshot below which are the aliases defined in the current Global Resources XML File Select an alias and the click Save If the alias is a file alias the file will be saved directly If the alias is a folder alias a dialog will appear that prompts for the name of the file under which the file is to be saved In either case the file will be saved to the location that was defined for the currently active configuration Note Each configuration points to a specific file location which is specified in the definition of that configuration If the file you are saving as a global resource does not have the same filetype extension as the file at the current file location of the configuration then the
107. gt lt Notation Declarations gt lt NOTATION GIF PUBLIC urn mime img gif gt Indentation is indicated by indentation guides and is best obtained by using the tab key The amount of tab indentation can be set in the Text View Settings dialog Grid View In Grid View the DTD document is displayed as a table The screenshot below shows the Grid View display of the DTD listed above DTD features in XMLSpy XMLSpy offers the following very useful features Generate sample XML file from DTD With the DTD Schema Generate Sample XML File command an XML document can be generated that is based on the active DTD 2011 Altova GmbH XML Schemas 115 DTDs and XML Schemas User Manual 5 2 XML Schemas XML Schema documents can be edited in Text View and can be viewed but not edited in Grid View and Schema View XML Schema documents are typically saved with the extension xsd or xs Editing in Text View In Text View an XML Schema is edited as an XML document the editing features available for XML documents are also available for XML Schemas As with all XML documents where the schema is identified and accessible Text View entry helpers display the items available for addition at the cursor location point XML Schema features in XMLSpy Additionally XMLSpy offers the following very useful features Generate sample XML file from XML Schema With the DTD Schema Generate Sample XML File command an XML document
108. has a built in license metering module that helps you to avoid any unintentional violation of this Software License Agreement Altova may use your internal network for license metering between installed versions of the Software b Software Activation Altova s Software may use your internal network and Internet connection for the purpose of transmitting license related data at the time of installation registration use or update to an Altova operated license server and validating the authenticity of the license related data in order to protect Altova against unlicensed or illegal use of the Software and to improve customer service Activation is based on the exchange of license related data between your computer and the Altova license server You agree that Altova may use these measures and you agree to follow any applicable requirements You further agree that use of license key codes that are not or were not generated by Altova and lawfully obtained from Altova or an authorized reseller as part of an effort to activate or use the Software violates Altova s intellectual property rights as well as the terms of this Software License Agreement You agree that efforts to circumvent or disable Altova s copyright protection mechanisms or license management mechanism violate Altova s intellectual property rights as well as the terms of this Software License Agreement Altova expressly reserves the rights to seek all available legal and equitable re
109. identity constraints box in the design see screenshot below You can also toggle on and off the display of the Constraints box with the Display Constraints icon in the Schema Design toolbar 3 Ensure that the Visualize ID Constraints icon in the Schema Design toolbar is toggled on This ensures that relationship lines and ID constraint information are displayed in Content Model View see screenshot below Note The Visualize ID Constraints icon switches on ID Constraint editing and validating functionality in Schema View If an XPath expression in an ID Constraint does not locate a node an error or warning might be displayed This error or warning is to alert you to the incorrect XPath expression the XML Schema document itself is not invalid because of the incorrect XPath expression To re check the validity of the document without the XPath expression check switch to Text View or Grid View and validate You can also disable validation in Schema View by toggling the Visualize ID Constraints icon off The screenshot below shows the graphical display of identity constraints There are two identity constraints in the identity constraints box TeamKey and TeamKeyRef The properties of TeamKeyRef are highlighted with a solid green line since TeamKeyRef is selected The 76 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 properties of TeamKey unselected are shown with a dotted green line For each identity constraint
110. in the XML file where the error was found Validating XML documents To validate an XML file make the XML document active in the Main Window and click XML Validate or F8 The XML document is validated against the schema referenced in the XML file If no reference exists an error message is displayed in the Messages Window As long as the XML document is open the schema is kept in memory see Flush Memory Cache in the DTD 268 User Reference XML Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Schema menu Validating schema documents DTDs and XML Schema XMLSpy supports major schema dialects including DTD and XML Schema To validate a schema document make the document active in the Main Window and click XML Validate or F8 Schema validation messages in the Validation window If the schema DTD or XML Schema is valid a successful validation message is displayed in the Validation window the Validation window pops up at the bottom of the application window If the schema is not valid one or more error messages are displayed in the Validation window screenshot below The error message is divided into three parts 1 A description of the error The description contains links to the relevant declarations or definitions 2 The location of the error within the schema structure Clicking a node in the location path highlights that node in the document 3 Details of the error provides more information about the error and cont
111. in the project window Absolute and relative paths Each project is saved as a project file and has the spp extension These files are actually XML documents that you can edit like any regular XML File In the project file absolute paths are used for files folders on the same level or higher and relative paths for files folders in the current folder or in sub folders For example if your directory structure looks like this Folder1 Folder2 Folder3 Folder4 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 239 User Reference User Manual If your spp file is located in Folder3 then references to files in Folder1 and Folder2 will look something like this c Folder1 NameOfFile ext c Folder1 Folder2 NameOfFile ext References to files in Folder3 and Folder4 will look something like this NameOfFile ext Folder4 NameOfFile ext If you wish to ensure that all paths will be relative save the spp files in the root directory of your working disk Drag and drop In the Project window a folder can be dragged to another folder or to another location within the same folder A file can be dragged to another folder but cannot be moved within the same folder within which files are arranged alphabetically Additionally files and folders can be dragged from Windows File Explorer to the Project window Global resources in the context menu When you right click a folder in the Project window in the context menu that
112. limitations or exclusions of warranties and liability contained herein do not prejudice applicable statutory consumer rights of person acquiring goods otherwise than in the course of business The disclaimer and limited liability above are fundamental to this Software License Agreement between Altova and you d Infringement Claims Altova will indemnify and hold you harmless and will defend or settle any claim suit or proceeding brought against you by a third party that is based upon a claim that the content contained in the Software infringes a copyright or violates an intellectual or proprietary right protected by United States or European Union law Claim but only to the extent the Claim arises directly out of the use of the Software and subject to the limitations set forth in Section 5 of this Agreement except as otherwise expressly provided You must notify Altova in writing of any Claim within ten 10 business days after you first receive notice of the Claim and you shall provide to Altova at no cost such assistance and cooperation as Altova may reasonably request from time to time in connection with the defense of the Claim Altova shall have sole control over any Claim including without limitation the selection of counsel and the right to settle on your behalf on any terms Altova deems desirable in the sole exercise of its discretion You may at your sole cost retain separate counsel and participate in the defense or settlement n
113. lt para gt when processed with the XSLT template lt xsl template match para gt lt xsl apply templates gt lt xsl template gt will produce This is bolditalic 2011 Altova GmbH XSLT 1 0 Engine Implementation Information 333 Engine Information Appendices To get a space between bold and italic in the output insert a space character within either the lt b gt or lt i gt elements in the XML source For example lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt italic lt i gt lt para gt or lt para gt This is lt b gt bold amp x20 lt b gt lt i gt italic lt i gt lt para gt or lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt amp x20 italic lt i gt lt para gt When any of the para elements above is processed with the same XSLT template given above it will produce This is bold italic 334 Engine Information XSLT 2 0 Engine Implementation Information 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 2 XSLT 2 0 Engine Implementation Information The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine is built into Altova s XMLSpy StyleVision Authentic and MapForce XML products It is also available in the free AltovaXML package This section describes the engine s implementation specific aspects of behavior It starts with a section giving general information about the engine and then goes on to list the implementation specific behavior of XSLT 2 0 functions For information about implementation specific behavior of
114. menu with commands relevant to the selection or cursor location Inserting elements The figure below shows the Insert submenu which is a list of all elements that can be inserted at that current cursor location The Insert Before submenu lists all elements that can be inserted before the current element The Insert After submenu lists all elements that can be inserted after the current element In the figure below the current element is the para element The bold and italic elements can be inserted within the current para element 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View 95 Editing Views User Manual As can be seen below the para and Office elements can be inserted before the current para element The node insertion replacement Apply and markup removal Clear commands that are available in the context menu are also available in the Authentic View entry helpers and are fully described in that section Insert entity Positioning the cursor over the Insert Entity command rolls out a submenu containing a list of all declared entities Clicking an entity inserts it a the selection See Define Entities for a description of how to define entities for the document Insert CDATA Section This command is enabled when the cursor is placed within text Clicking it inserts a CDATA section at the cursor insertion point The CDATA section is delimited by start and end tags to see these tags you should switch on large or small markup Within CDATA se
115. modify the file as required This file will be the template file 3 When you are done select File Save as to save the file back to the Template 216 User Reference File Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 folder with a suitable name say my xml xml You now have a template called my xml which will appear in the list of files in the Create New Document dialog 4 To open the template select File New and then the template my xml in this case Please note To delete a template delete the template file from the template folder Assigning a DTD XML Schema to a new XML document When you create a new document of a certain type that is based on a standard schema DTD or XML Schema the document is automatically opened with the correct DTD or XML Schema association For example an XHTML file will be opened with the DTD http www w3 org TR xhtml1 DTD xhtml1 strict dtd associated with it And an XML Schema xsd file is associated with the http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema schema document If you are creating a new file for which the schema is not known for example an XML file then you are prompted to associate a schema DTD or XML Schema with the document that is to be created If you choose to associate a DTD or XML Schema with your document clicking OK in the New File dialog enables you to browse for the schema Clicking Cancel in this dialog will create a new file that is not associated with any schema
116. of a data structure Each row represents an occurrence of a single element Each row therefore has the same XML substructure as the next The dynamic table editing commands manipulate the rows of a dynamic SPS table That is you can modify the number and order of the element occurrences You cannot however edit the columns of a dynamic SPS table since this would entail changing the substructure of individual element occurrences The icons for dynamic table editing commands appear in the toolbar and are also available in the Authentic menu Append row to table Insert row in table Duplicate current table row i e cell contents are duplicated Move current row up by one row Move current row down by one row Delete the current row Please note These commands apply only to dynamic SPS tables They should not be used inside static SPS tables The various types of tables used in Authentic View are described in the Using tables in Authentic View section of this documentation Creating and editing XML tables You can insert your own tables should you want to present your data as a table Such tables are inserted as XML tables You can modify the structure of an XML table and format the table The icons for creating and editing XML tables are available in the toolbar and are shown below They are described in the section XML table editing icons The commands corresponding to these icons are not available as menu items Note also tha
117. of allowed elements that cannot themselves be inserted at the cursor point are unavailable Please note In the Options dialog Tools Options Editing you can specify that mandatory child elements are inserted when an element is inserted Attributes Entry Helper The Attributes Entry Helper displays a list of available attributes for the element you are currently editing Mandatory attributes are indicated with an exclamation mark before the name of the attribute If an attribute has already been entered for that element that attribute is shown in gray 2011 Altova GmbH Grid View 53 Editing Views User Manual To use the attributes in the Append and Insert tabs select in Grid View an existing attribute or an element that is a child of the attribute s parent element and double click the required attribute in the Entry Helper To use the attributes in the Add Child tab select the attribute s parent element in Grid View and double click the required attribute in the Entry Helper Please note Existing attributes which cannot legally be added to the current element a second time are shown in gray Entities Entry Helper The Entities Entry Helper displays all parsed or unparsed entities that are declared inline or in an external DTD If a text node or attribute node is selected in Grid View the Add Child tab will appear empty because by definition such nodes cannot have any children To use the cursor to in
118. otherwise they appear as tabs in a pane at the bottom of the Content Model window Draw direction These options define the orientation of the element tree on screen horizontal or vertical Editing the content model in the diagram itself You can change element properties directly in the content model diagram To do this double click the property you wish to edit and start entering data If a selection is available a drop down list appears from which you can select an option Otherwise enter a value and confirm with Enter Buttons in the Schema display configuration dialog This dialog has the following buttons The Load Save button allows you to load and save the settings you make here The Predefined button resets the display configuration to default values The Clear all button empties the list box of all entries Enabling smart restrictions To enable smart restrictions check the Enable Schema Restrictions check box 12 6 3 Zoom The Schema Design Zoom command controls the zoom factor of the Content Model View This feature is useful if you have a large content model and wish to zoom out so that the entire content model fits in the Main Window You can zoom between 10 and 200 of actual size To zoom in and out either drag the slider or click in the entry box and enter a percentage value 280 User Reference Schema Design Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 6 4 Display All Globals The Sch
119. outward inward one level at a time To delete a criterion in a DB Query select the criterion and click Delete Modifying a DB Query To modify a DB Query 162 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 Click the Query button The Edit Database Query dialog box opens You can now edit the expressions in any of the listed criteria add new criteria re order criteria or delete criteria in the DB Query 2 Click OK The data from the DB is automatically re loaded into Authentic View so as to reflect the modifications to the DB Query Modifying a DB Table Adding a record To add a record to a DB table 1 Place the cursor in the DB table row and click the icon to append a row or the icon to insert a row This creates a new record in the temporary XML file 2 Click the File Save command to add the new record in the DB In Authentic View a row for the new record is appended to the DB table display The AltovaRowStatus for this record is set to A for Added When you enter data for the new record it is entered in bold and is underlined This enables you to differentiate added records from existing records if existing records have not been formatted with these text formatting properties Datatype errors are flagged by being displayed in red The new record is added to the DB when you click File Save After a new record is saved to the DB its AltovaRowStatus field is initialized
120. person is the schema annotation of the First element 2011 Altova GmbH Text View 49 Editing Views User Manual Auto completion can be switched on and off in the Editing tab of the Options dialog Tools Options Editing Moving sibling elements relative to each other When the cursor is within an element pressing Alt ArrowUp or Alt ArrowDown moves the selected element up or down relative to its siblings Drag and Drop and Context Menus You can also use drag and drop to move a text block to a new location as well as right click to directly access frequently used editing commands such as Cut Copy Paste Delete Send by Mail and Go to line char in a context menu Find and Replace You can use the Find and Replace commands to quickly locate and change text These commands also take regular expressions as input thereby giving you powerful search capabilities See Edit Find for details Unlimited Undo XMLSpy offers unlimited levels of Undo and Redo for all editing operations Spelling check In Text View documents can be spellchecked with any of the built in language dictionaries A user dictionary can also be created and edited to allow words not contained in the language dictionary For details see the descriptions of the Spelling and Spelling Options commands 3 1 4 Entry Helpers in Text View What entry helpers are available in Text View depends upon the type of document being edited A list of entry helpers is
121. refer to the Altova Software License Agreement at the end of this section 2011 Altova GmbH Software Activation and License Metering 357 License Information Appendices 3 2 Software Activation and License Metering As part of Altova s Software Activation the software may use your internal network and Internet connection for the purpose of transmitting license related data at the time of installation registration use or update to an Altova operated license server and validating the authenticity of the license related data in order to protect Altova against unlicensed or illegal use of the software and to improve customer service Activation is based on the exchange of license related data such as operating system IP address date time software version and computer name along with other information between your computer and an Altova license server Your Altova product has a built in license metering module that further helps you avoid any unintentional violation of the End User License Agreement Your product is licensed either as a single user or multi user installation and the license metering module makes sure that no more than the licensed number of users use the application concurrently This license metering technology uses your local area network LAN to communicate between instances of the application running on different computers Single license When the application starts up as part of the license metering proces
122. related to each other in some way you determine For example in the screenshot below a project named Examples collects the files for various examples in separate example folders each of which can be further organized into sub folders Within the Examples project for instance the OrgChart example folder is further organized into sub folders for XML XSL and Schema files 12 Introduction The Graphical User Interface GUI 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Projects thus enable you to gather together files that are used together and to access them quicker Additionally you can define schemas and XSLT files for individual folders thus enabling the batch processing of files in a folder Project operations Commands for folder operations are available in the Project menu and some commands are available in the context menus of the project and its folders right click to access One project is open at a time in the Project Window When a new project is created or an existing project opened it replaces the project currently open in the Project Window After changes have been made to a project the project must be saved by clicking the Project Save Project command The project has a tree structure composed of folders files and other resources Such resources can be added at any level and to an unlimited depth Project folders are semantic folders that represent a logical grouping of files They do not need to cor
123. reseller in the event that you fail to make your license payment or other monies due and payable In addition the Software License Agreement governing your use of a previous version that you have upgraded or updated of the Software is terminated upon your acceptance of the terms and conditions of the Software License Agreement accompanying such upgrade or update Upon any termination of the Software License Agreement you must cease all use of the Software that this Software License Agreement governs destroy all copies then in your possession or control and take such other actions as Altova may reasonably request to ensure that no copies of the Software remain in your possession or control The terms and conditions set forth in Sections 1 h 1 i 1 j 1 k 2 5 b 5 c 5 d 7 d 7 e 9 10 and 11 survive termination as applicable 9 RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE AND EXPORT RESTRICTIONS The Software was developed entirely at private expense and is commercial computer software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or a U S Government contractor or subcontractor is subject to the restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in FAR 12 211 and 12 212 48 C F R 12 211 and 12 212 or DFARS 227 7202 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with the above as applicable Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Documentation licensed to U S government end users only as com
124. schema can also be assigned or changed at any subsequent time using the Assign DTD or Assign Schema commands in the DTD Schema menu The path to the schema file that is inserted in the XML document can be made relative by checking the relative path check box in the dialog Global resources for schemas A global resource is an alias for a file or folder The target file or folder can be changed within the GUI by changing the active configuration of the global resource via the menu command Tools Active Configuration Global resources therefore enable the assigned schema to be switched among multiple schemas which can be useful for testing How to use global resources is described in the section Altova Global Resources XML Schema plus DTD One very useful DTD feature that XML Schema does not have is the use of entities However if you wish to use entities in your XML Schema validated XML document you can add a DOCTYPE declaration to the XML document and include your entity declarations in it lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt DOCTYPE OrgChart lt ENTITY name int value gt lt ENTITY name ext SYSTEM extfile xml gt gt lt OrgChart xmlns http www xs com org xsi schemaLocation http www xs com org OrgChart xsd gt lt OrgChart gt After declaring the entities in the DTD they can be used in the XML document The document will be well formed and valid Note however that external parsed entities are n
125. select another HTML file via the Set Link to HTML command To remove the link to the HTML file click the icon to the right of the Linked HTML item and select the command Remove Link The icon to the right of the Open HTML With item enables applications to be added to the Open HTML With list All the browsers installed on the system or any other application such as a text editor can be added via the menu commands accessed via the Open HTML With icon The associated applications would typically be browser or editor applications After an application has been added to the Open HTML With list except when added with the Add Installed Browsers command its name in the Open HTML With list can be changed by selecting it pressing F2 and editing the name The icons to the right of each application listed in the Open HTML With list each opens a menu containing commands to i open the application ii open the application and load the linked HTML file iii remove the application from the list Double clicking an application name opens the linked HTML file in that application Applications added to or removed from the Open HTML With list are also added to or removed from the HTML Info window The Imported item displays a list of the CSS files imported by the active CSS document 2011 Altova GmbH 177 Altova Global Resources User Manual 9 Altova Global Resources Altova Global Resources is a collection of alia
126. the appropriate element markup For information about how to do this see the Insert Element command in the Elements Entry Helper section of the documentation Inserting entities In XML documents some characters are reserved for markup and cannot be used in normal text These are the ampersand amp apostrophe less than lt greater than gt and quote characters If you wish to use these characters in your data you must insert them as entity references via the Entities Entry Helper screenshot below XML also offers the opportunity to create custom entities These could be i special characters that are not available on your keyboard ii text strings that you wish to re use in your document content iii XML data fragments or iv other resources such as images You can define your own entities within the Authentic View application Once defined these entities appear in the Entities Entry Helper and can then be inserted as in the document 150 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Inserting CDATA sections CDATA sections are sections of text in an XML document that the XML parser does not process as XML data They can be used to escape large sections of text if replacing special characters by entity references is undesirable this could be the case for example with program code or an XML fragment that is to be reproduced with its markup tags CDATA sections can occur within
127. the node selected by the XPath expression for selector and field are show with the icons and respectively If a node is collapsed as is the case with the field element of the TeamKey constraint the relationship line ends with an ellipsis see screenshot below To create an identity constraint in Content Model View do the following 1 In the Constraints box right click the Constraints entry or the name of an existing identity constraint 2 Select Insert or Append and then select the kind of identity constraint to insert at the top of the list of existing constraints or append at the bottom of the list of existing constraints The identity constraint will be created with an empty selector element and an empty field element 3 The XPath expression can be entered in the selector and field element boxes in one of two ways i By typing it in or ii By dragging the target node into the selector or field element box and dropping it when the box becomes highlighted the XPath expression will be created automatically 4 To add an additional field element to an identity constraint either right click the 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 77 Editing Views User Manual constraint name and select Add child Field from the context menu or right click the selector or field element and select Insert Field or Append Field from the context menu 5 To enter an ID attribute on any element in a constraint select that element and ent
128. the shortcut key F8 to validate an XML file You can create your own shortcuts in the Keyboard tab of the Customize dialog Tools Customize Toolbars The toolbars see illustration contain icons that are shortcuts for selecting menu commands The name of the command appears when you place your mouse pointer over the icon To execute the command click the icon Toolbar buttons are arranged in groups In the Tools Customize Toolbars dialog you can specify which toolbar groups are to be displayed These settings apply to the current view To make a setting for another view change to that view and then make the setting in the Tools Customize Toolbars In the GUI you can also drag toolbar groups by their handles or title bars to alternative locations on the screen Double clicking the handle causes the toolbar to undock and to float double clicking its title bar causes the toolbar to dock at its previous location Status Bar The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the application window see illustration and displays i status information about the loading of files and ii information about menu commands and command shortcuts in the toolbars when the mouse cursor is placed over these 16 Introduction The Application Environment 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 2 The Application Environment In this section we describe various aspects of the application that are important for getting started Reading through t
129. to FO 12 7 7 Assign Sample XML File The XSL XQuery Assign Sample XML File command assigns an XML file to an XSLT document The command inserts a processing instruction naming an XML file to be processed with this XSLT file when the XSL Transformation is executed on the XSLT file lt altova_samplexml C workarea html2xml article xml gt Please note You can make the path of the assigned file relative by clicking the Make Path Relative To check box You can also select a file via a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button 288 User Reference XSL XQuery Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 7 8 Go to XSL The XSL XQuery Go to XSL command opens the associated XSLT document If your XML document contains a stylesheet processing instruction i e an XSLT assignment such as this lt xml stylesheet type text xsl href Company xsl gt then the Go to XSL command opens the XSLT document in XMLSpy 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic Menu 289 User Reference User Manual 12 8 Authentic Menu Authentic View enables you to edit XML documents based on StyleVision Power Stylesheets sps files created in Altova s StyleVision product These stylesheets contain information that enables an XML file to be displayed graphically in Authentic View In addition to containing display information StyleVision Power Stylesheets also allow you to wr
130. to make an assignment when you click the XSLT Transformation F8 command To transform an XSLT document that is active in the GUI On clicking the XSLT Transformation F8 command you are prompted for the XML file you wish to process with the active XSLT stylesheet To transform project folders and files Right click the project folder or file and select the command XSL FO Transformation The XSL FO Transformation command can be used in the following scenarios To transform an XML document that is active in the GUI and has an XSLT document assigned to it The XML document will first be transformed to FO using the specified XSLT engine The FO document will then be processed with the specified FO processor to produce the PDF output If no XSLT document is assigned you are prompted to make an assignment when you click the XSL FO Transformation command 124 XSLT and XQuery XSLT 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 To transform an FO document to PDF using the specified FO processor To transform an XSLT document that is active in the GUI On clicking the XSL FO Transformation command you are prompted for the XML file you wish to process with the active XSLT stylesheet To transform project folders and files Right click the project folder or file and select the command For a description of the options in the XSL FO output dialog see the User Reference section Parameters for XSLT If you are using the
131. tutorial Please note The xsi prefix allows you to use special XML Schema related commands in your XML document instance Notice that the the namespace for the xsi prefix was automatically added to the document element when you assigned a schema to your XML file In the above case you have specified a type for the Address element See the XML Schema specification for more information 2 3 3 Entering Data in Text View Text View is ideal for editing the actual data and markup of XML files because of its DTD XML Schema related intelligent editing features Structural layout features In addition Text View has a number of viewing and structural editing features that make editing large sections of text easy These features can be switched on and off in the Text View Settings dialog View Text View Settings screenshot below 26 XMLSpy Tutorial XML Documents 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The following margins in Text View can be switched on and off Line number margins Bookmark margins in which individual lines can be highlighted with a marker Source folding margins which contain icons to expand and collapse the display of elements Additionally visual aids such as indentation guides end of line markers and whitespace markers can be switched on and off by checking and unchecking respectively their check boxes in the Visual Aid pane of the Text View Settings dialog see screenshot above The bookma
132. used In the first xi include element listed above the xpointer attribute uses the element scheme with an NCName of usa According to the XPointer Framework this NCName identifies the element that has an ID of usa In the second xi include listed above the xpointer attribute with a value of element 234 User Reference Edit Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 1 identifies in the first step the first child element of the document root which if the document is well formed will be its document or root element In the second step the first child element of the element located in the previous step is located in our example this would be the first child element of the document element The xpointer attribute of the third xi include listed above uses a combination of NCName and child sequence This XPointer locates the first child element of the third child element of the element having an ID of usa If you are not sure whether your first XPointer will work you can back it up with a second one as shown in the fourth xi include listed above xpointer element usa element 1 1 Here if there is no element with an ID of usa the back up XPointer specifies that the first child element of the document element is to be selected Additional backups are also allowed Individual XPointers may not be separated or they may be separated by whitespace for example xpointer element usa element addresses 1 element
133. variable first is declared in the XQuery document and is then used in the return clause of the FLWOR expression xquery version 1 0 declare variable first as xs string external let last Jones return concat first last This XQuery returns Peter Jones if the value of the external variable entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog is Peter Note the following The external keyword in the variable declaration in the XQuery document indicates that this variable is an external variable Defining the static type of the variable is optional If a datatype for the variable is not specified in the variable declaration then the variable value is assigned the type xs untypedAtomic If an external variable is declared in the XQuery document but no external variable of that name is passed to the XQuery document then an error is reported If an external variable is declared and is entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog then it is considered to be in scope for the XQuery document being executed If a new variable with that name is declared within the XQuery document the new variable temporarily overrides the in scope external variable For example the XQuery document below returns Paul Jones even though the in scope external variable first has a value of Peter xquery version 1 0 declare variable first as xs string external let first Paul let
134. well formedness check a corresponding error message is displayed Please note The output of the Messages window has 9 tabs The validation output is always displayed in the active tab Therefore you can check well formedness in tab1 for one schema file and keep the result by switching to tab 2 before validating the next schema document 2011 Altova GmbH XML Menu 267 User Reference User Manual otherwise tab 1 is overwritten with the validation result It is generally not permitted to save a malformed XML document but XMLSpy gives you a Save Anyway option This is useful when you want to suspend your work temporarily in a not well formed condition and resume it later 12 4 3 Validate XML F8 The XML Validate F8 command enables you to validate XML documents against DTDs XML Schemas and other schemas Validation is automatically carried out when you switch from Text View to any other view You can specify that a document be automatically validated when a file is opened or saved Tools Options File The Validate command also carries out a well formedness check before checking validity so there is no need to use the Check Well Formedness command before using the Validate command If a document is valid a successful validation message is displayed in the Validation window Otherwise a message that describes the error is displayed Please note You can click on the links in the error message to jump to the spot
135. which check out should be undone then click OK Check out of the following items can be undone i single files in the Project window click the required file to select it use Ctrl Click to select multiple files use Ctrl Click ii folders in the Project window click the required folder to select it use Ctrl Click to select multiple folders Advanced Allows you to define the Replace writable and Set timestamp options in the respective combo boxes The Make writable check box removes the read only attribute of the retrieved files Source control symbols Folders and files display certain symbols the meanings of which are given below Checked in Available for check out 248 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Checked out by another user Not available for check out Checked out locally Can be edited and checked in Add to Source Control The Add to Source Control command adds the selected files in a project folder to the source control database and places them under source control To add files to source control do the following 1 In the Project window click a file and select the menu option Project Source Control Add to Source Control If you select a folder the files in that folder will be added to source control 2 In the Add to Source Control dialog that pops up ensure that the files to be added are checked If the file to be added should be kept checked out check th
136. xsl stylesheet version 1 0 xmlns xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform xmlns fo http www w3 org 1999 XSL Format gt lt xsl param name footer select document footer1 gt lt xsl template match gt lt fo root gt lt xsl copy of select fo layout master set gt lt fo page sequence master reference default page initial page number 1 format 1 gt lt fo static content flow name xsl region after 2011 Altova GmbH XSL XQuery Menu 285 User Reference User Manual display align after gt lt fo inline color 800000 font size 10pt font weight bold gt lt xsl value of select footer gt lt fo inline gt lt fo static content gt lt fo page sequence gt lt fo root gt lt xsl template gt lt xsl stylesheet gt In the XSLT Input Parameters dialog a new value for the footer parameter can be entered such as the XPath document footer2 see screenshot above or a text string During transformation this value is passed to the footer parameter in the template for the root element and is the value used when the footer block is instantiated Note If you use the XSL FO Transformation command XSL XQuery XSL FO Transformation parameters entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog are not passed to the stylesheet In order for these parameters to be used in PDF output first transform from XML to FO using the XSLT Transforma
137. you to specify images that will be used in the final output document HTML RTF PDF and Word 2007 You should note that some image formats might not be supported in some formats or by some applications For example the SVG format is supported in PDF but not in RTF and would require a browser add on for it to be viewed in HTML So when selecting an image format be sure to select a format that is supported in the output formats of your document Most image formats are supported across all the output formats see list below Authentic View is based on Internet Explorer and is able to display most of the image formats that your version of Internet Explorer can display The following commonly used image formats are supported GIF JPG PNG BMP WMF Microsoft Windows Metafile EMF Enhanced Metafile SVG for PDF output only Relative paths Relative paths are resolved relative to the SPS file 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 167 Authentic User Manual 7 2 7 Keystrokes in Authentic View Enter key In Authentic View the Enter key is used to append additional elements when it is in certain cursor locations For example if the chapter of a book may according to the schema contain several paragraphs then pressing Enter inside the text of the paragraph causes a new paragraph to be appended immediately after the current paragraph If a chapter can contain one title and several paragraphs
138. you wish Namespace Name Prefix Namespace URI XML Schema types xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema XPath 2 0 functions fn http www w3 org 2005 xpath functions Typically these namespaces will be declared on the xsl stylesheet or xsl transform element as shown in the following listing lt xsl stylesheet version 2 0 xmlns xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema xmlns fn http www w3 org 2005 xpath functions lt xsl stylesheet gt The following points should be noted 2011 Altova GmbH XSLT 2 0 Engine Implementation Information 335 Engine Information Appendices The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine uses the XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions namespace listed in the table above as its default functions namespace So you can use XPath 2 0 and XSLT 2 0 functions in your stylesheet without any prefix If you declare the XPath 2 0 Functions namespace in your stylesheet with a prefix then you can additionally use the prefix assigned in the declaration When using type constructors and types from the XML Schema namespace the prefix used in the namespace declaration must be used when calling the type constructor for example xs date With the CRs of 23 January 2007 the untypedAtomic and duration datatypes dayTimeDuration and yearMonthDuration which were formerly in the XPath Datatypes namespace typically prefixed xdt have been moved to the XML Schema
139. 137 Authentic User Manual By default the node tags are not displayed in Authentic View You can switch on the node tags by selecting the menu item Authentic Show Large Markup or the toolbar icon Large markup tags contain the names of the respective nodes Alternatively you can select small markup no node names in tags and mixed markup a mixture of large small and no markup tags which is defined by the designer of the stylesheet the default mixed markup for the document is no markup You can view the text of the XML document in the Text View of your Altova product or in a text editor Entry helpers There are three entry helpers in the interface screenshot below located by default along the right edge of the application window These are the Elements Attributes and Entity entry helpers Elements entry helper The Elements entry helper displays elements that can be inserted and removed with reference to the current location of the cursor or selection in the Main Window 138 Authentic Authentic View Tutorial 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Note that the entry helper is context sensitive its content changes according to the location of the cursor or selection The content of the entry helper can be changed in one other way when another node is selected in the XML tree of the Elements entry helper the elements relevant to that node are displayed in the entry helper The Elements entry helper can be expanded t
140. 2 13 4 Keyboard Map The Help Keyboard Map command causes an information box to be displayed that contains a menu by menu listing of all commands in XMLSpy Menu commands are listed with a description and shortcut keystrokes for the command To view commands in a particular menu select the menu name in the Category combo box You can print the command by clicking the printer icon You should note the following points about shortcuts Certain commands and their shortcuts are applicable only within a certain view For example most of the commands in the XML menu are applicable only in Grid View Other commands such as File Save or XML Check Well Formedness are available in multiple views Other cool shortcuts For example Shift F10 brings up the context menu in Text View and Schema View Ctrl E when the cursor is inside an element start or end tag in Text View moves the cursor to the end or start tag respectively In the Keyboard tab of the Customize dialog you can also set your own shortcuts for various menu commands 12 13 5 Activation Order Form Registration Updates Software Activation After you download your Altova product software you can activate it using either a free evaluation key or a purchased permanent license key 326 User Reference Help Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Free evaluation key When you first start the software after downloading and installing it the Softwa
141. 2 2 11 Comment In Out The Comment In Out command is available in Text View and is used to comment and uncomment XML text fragments Text in an XML document can be commented out using the XML start comment and end comment delimiters respectively lt and gt In XMLSpy these comment delimiters can be easily inserted using the Comment In Out menu command To comment out a block of text select the text to be commented out and then select the command Comment In Out either from the Edit menu or the context menu that you get on right clicking the selected text The commented text will be grayed out see screenshot below 2011 Altova GmbH Edit Menu 237 User Reference User Manual To uncomment a commented block of text select the commented block excluding the comment delimiters and select the command Comment In Out either from the Edit menu or the context menu that you get on right clicking the selected text The comment delimiters will be removed and the text will no longer be grayed out 238 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 3 Project Menu uses the familiar tree view to manage multiple files or URLs in XML projects Files and URLs can be grouped into folders by common extension or any arbitrary criteria allowing for easy structuring and batch manipulation Please note Most project related commands are also available in the context menu which appears when you right click any item
142. 2011 Copying XPath and XPointer expressions to the clipboard The XPath and XPointer expressions of the selected node can be copied to the clipboard using the Edit Copy XPath and Edit Copy XPointer commands respectively This enables you to obtain the correct XPath and XPointer expressions for a given node The copied expressions can then be inserted at the required location for example an XPath expression in an XSLT stylesheet and an XPointer expression in the href attribute of an xinclude element For more detailed descriptions of the commands see their descriptions in the User Reference section 2011 Altova GmbH Editing XML in Grid View 105 XML User Manual 4 4 Editing XML in Grid View Grid View shows the hierarchical structure of XML documents through a set of nested containers that can be expanded and collapsed This provides a clear picture of the document s structure In Grid View both structure and contents can be easily manipulated In Standard Edition Grid View is read only in Enterprise and Professional Editions you can also edit your document in Grid View In the screenshot above notice that the document is displayed as a hierarchy in a grid form When a node can contains content it is divided into two fields for name and for content Node names are displayed in bold face and node content in normal face More about Grid View For a more detailed description of Grid View see under Editing Views 106 XML E
143. 8 2011 User Manual Altova XMLSpy 2011 6 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 User Manual The User Manual part of this documentation contains all the information you need to get started using XMLSpy and to learn the various XMLSpy features It is organized into four broad parts i an Introduction ii a Tutorial iii a Working With part and iv a User Reference We suggest that you start by reading the Introduction in order to get a feel for the GUI and to understand key application settings If you are new to XML the XMLSpy tutorial will help you not only to get to know XMLSpy but also to easily create and use your first XML documents After that you should read the Editing Views section and then the sections in the Working With part that are of most interest to you The User Reference part can be used thereafter as a reference Introduction The introduction describes the GUI important settings in the Options dialog and the application environment Tutorial The XMLSpy tutorial helps you get started and shows you how to use the most common XMLSpy features Working With The Working With part of the documentation describes the functionality that XMLSpy offers for working with various XML and XML related technologies It starts with a description of XMLSpy s multiple editing views The sections that immediately follow explain the functionality for each technology separately The Working With part concludes with a series o
144. Altova GmbH DTD Schema Menu 273 User Reference User Manual Elements to be generated One of the following choices can be selected i mandatory elements only ii all elements mandatory and non mandatory iii mandatory and minimum number of non mandatory elements for example the first definition in a choice If elements are defined as being repeatable the number of elements to be generated for each of these repeatable elements can be specified Generate non mandatory attributes Activating this option generates not only mandatory attributes but also the non mandatory attributes defined in the schema Generate X elements if marked repeatable in Schema DTD Activating this option generates the number of repeatable elements you enter in the text box Fill elements and attributes with data Activating this option inserts the data type descriptors values for the respective elements attributes For example Boolean 1 xsd string string Max Min inclusive the value defined in the schema Nillable elements and abstract types The contents of nillable elements can be treated as non mandatory and elements with an abstract type can use a non abstract type for its xsi type attribute Schema assignment for the generated XML file 274 User Reference DTD Schema Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The schema used to generate the XML file can be assigned to the generated XML file with a relative or absolute path Ro
145. B tables and save data back to a DB This section contains a full description of interface features available to you when editing a DB table The following general points need to be noted The number of records in a DB table that are displayed in Authentic View may have been deliberately restricted by the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet in order to make the design more compact In such cases only that limited number of records is initially loaded into Authentic View Using the DB table row navigation icons see Navigating a DB Table you can load and display the other records in the DB table You can query the DB to display certain records You can add modify and delete DB records and save your changes back to the DB See Modifying a DB Table To open a DB based StyleVision Power Stylesheet in Authentic View Click Authentic Edit Database Data and browse for the required StyleVision Power Stylesheet Navigating a DB Table The commands to navigate DB table rows are available as buttons in the Authentic View document Typically one navigation panel with either four or five buttons accompanies each DB table 158 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The arrow icons are from left to right Go to First Record in the DB Table Go to Previous Record Open the Go to Record dialog see screenshot Go to Next Record and Go to Last Record To navigate a DB table cl
146. Editing Views User Manual The keybase complex type shown above was declared in Schema Overview with a base type of xs annotated The base type is displayed as a rectangle with a dashed gray border and a yellow background color Then in Content Model View the child elements xs selector and xs field were created Note the tiny arrows in the bottom left corner of the xs selector and xs field rectangles These indicate that both elements reference global elements of those names A local complex type is defined directly in Content Model View by creating a child element or attribute for an element There is no separate symbol for local complex types Please note The base type of a content model is displayed as a rectangle with a dashed gray border and a yellow background color You can go to the content model of the base type by double clicking its name Model group Details The irregular octagon with a plus sign indicates a model group A model group allows you to define and reuse element declarations Note When the model group is declared in Schema Overview it is given a name You subsequently define its content mode in Content Model View by assigning it a child compositor that contains the element declarations When the model group is used it is inserted as a child or inserted or appended within the content model of some other component in Content Model View Wildcards Details The irregular octagon with any at left in
147. Editing Views Text View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 If you are working with an XML document based on a schema XMLSpy provides you with various intelligent editing capabilities in Text View These allow you to quickly insert the correct element attribute or attribute value according to the content model defined for the element you are currently editing For example when you start typing the start tag of an element the names of all the elements allowed by the schema at this point are shown in a pop up screenshot below Selecting the required element name and pressing Enter inserts that element name in the start tag Popup windows also appears in the following cases When the cursor is inside the start tag of an element that has an attribute defined for it and the space bar is pressed The popup will contain all available attributes When the cursor is within the double quotes delimiting an attribute value that has enumerated values The popup will contain the enumerated values When you type lt which signifies the start of a closing tag the name of the element to be closed appears in the popup When you wish to write an empty element as a single tag or convert an empty element of two tags to an empty element of one tag type in the closing slash after the element name lt element An empty element with a single tag is created if a close tag exists it is removed lt element gt Auto completion Edit
148. GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 9 View Menu The View menu controls the display of the active Main window and allows you to change the way XMLSpy displays your XML documents This section provides a complete description of commands in the View menu 12 9 1 Text View This command switches the current view of the document to Text View which enables you to edit the document in its text form It supports a number of advanced text editing features described in detail in Text View section of this document Please note You can configure aspects of the Text View using options available in the various tabs of the Options dialog Tools Options 12 9 2 Enhanced Grid View This command switches the current document into Grid View If the previous view was the Text View the document is automatically checked for well formedness Embedded Database Table view XMLSpy allows you to display recurring elements in a Database Table View from within the Grid View This function is available wherever the Grid View can be activated and can be used when editing any type of XML file XML XSD XSL etc For further information on this view please see the Grid View section of this documentation 12 9 3 Schema Design View This command switches the current document to Schema Design View The switch will be successful only if the document is an XML Schema document This view is described in detail in the Schema View section of this documentation
149. Helper now shows that the State element is mandatory it is prefixed with an exclamation mark 2011 Altova GmbH XML Documents 31 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual 3 Place the cursor after the Zip element and in the Elements Entry Helper double click the State element Then enter the name of the state Texas Confirm with Enter The Elements Entry Helper now contains only grayed out elements This shows that there are no more required child elements of Address Switch to Grid View to view your changes screenshot below Completing the document and revalidating Let us now complete the document enter data for the Person element before revalidating Do the following 1 In the element First enter a first name say Fred Then press Enter 2 In the same way enter data for all the child elements of Person that is for Last PhoneExt and Email Note that the value of PhoneExt must be an integer with a maximum value of 99 since this is the range of allowed PhoneExt values you defined in your schema Your XML document should then look something like this in Text View 32 XMLSpy Tutorial XML Documents 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 Click again to check if the document is valid A message appears in the Messages window stating that the file is valid The XML document is now valid against its schema 4 Select the menu option File Save and give your XML document a suitable name for example CompanyFirst xml
150. In Content Model View the various parts of the content model are represented graphically These parts are organized into two broad groups compositors and components Typically a compositor is added and then the desired child components Compositors A compositor defines the order in which child elements occur There are three compositors sequence choice and all To insert a compositor 1 Right click the element to which you wish to add child elements 2 Select Add Child Sequence or Choice or All The compositor is added and will look as below Sequence Choice All To change the compositor right click the compositor and select Change Model Sequence or Choice or All After you have added the compositor you will need to add child element s or a model group 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 61 Editing Views User Manual Components in the Content Model Given below is a list of components that are used in content models The graphical representation of each provides detailed information about the component s type and structural properties Mandatory single element Details The rectangle indicates an element and the solid border indicates that the element is required The absence of a number range indicates a single element i e minOcc 1 and maxOcc 1 The name of the element is Country The blue color indicates that the element is currently selected a component is selected by clicking it
151. In XMLSpy Schema View enables you to easily build valid XML Schemas by using graphical drag and drop techniques The XML Schema document you construct is also editable in Text View and Grid View but is much easier to create and modify in Schema View In the Standard Edition XML Schema documents can be viewed in Text View Schema View and Grid View but can be edited only in Text View Editing in Schema View and Grid View is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions Creating a new XML Schema document To create a new XML Schema file in XMLSpy you must first start XMLSpy and then create a new XML Schema xsd document Create the document as follows 1 Select the menu option File New The Create new document dialog opens 2 In the dialog select the xsd entry the document description and the list in the window might vary from that in the screenshot and confirm with OK An empty schema file appears in the Main Window in Schema View screenshot below In Standard Edition you cannot edit XML Schema documents in Schema View so you must switch to Text View to edit the document 2011 Altova GmbH XML Schemas 21 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual 3 The schema you will use for the rest of this tutorial is AddressLast xsd which is located in the C Documents and Settings lt username gt My Documents Altova XMLSpy2011 Examples Tutorial folder Open this file and explore it in Text View and Schema View Note that in Standard
152. L document do the following 1 In the View tab of the Options dialog Tools Options check the Use Indentation check box 2 In the Text View Settings dialog View Text View Settings set the tab size you want for the indentation of the pretty printed text 3 In the File tab of the Options dialog Tools Options enter the elements for which no output formatting indentation is wanted 4 Click the Pretty Print XML Text command this command To reformat the document so that all lines are left aligned uncheck the Use Indentation check box Note the following points 1 The XML document must be well formed for this command to work 2 Pretty printing adds spaces or tabs to the document when the document is saved 12 2 7 Select All Ctrl A The Select All command selects the contents of the entire document 12 2 8 Find Find Next The Find command Ctrl F pops up the Find dialog in which you can specify the string you want to find and other options for the search To find text enter the text in the Find What text box or use the combo box to select from one of the last 10 search criteria and then specify the options for the search The Find Next command F3 repeats the last Find command to search for the next occurrence of the requested text 236 User Reference Edit Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 2 9 Replace Ctrl H The Replace command enables you to find and replace one text st
153. ML Documents For XML documents there are three entry helpers Elements entry helper Attributes entry helper and Entities entry helper When an element is added via the Elements entry helper it can be added together with mandatory child elements mandatory attributes all child elements or no child element or attribute according to the respective settings in the Editing tab of the Options dialog When empty attributes are added they are added with quotes Note that in the different views the entry helpers are designed differently in accordance with the functionality of the respective view Elements entry helper The following points should be noted Text View Elements are inserted at the cursor insertion point Unused elements are displayed in red used elements in gray Mandatory elements are indicated with an exclamation mark before the name of the element Grid View Elements can be appended after inserted before or added as a child of the selected element There are therefore three tabs each displaying the elements that may be added Unused elements are displayed in black used elements in gray Authentic View Elements can be inserted before after or within the selected element Additionally there is a document tree that shows the location of the currently selected element in the document s tree structure For more details of how to edit in Authentic View see the Authentic View section Attributes entry help
154. ML is a free application which contains Altova s XML Validator XSLT 1 0 XSLT 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 engines It can be used from the command line via a COM interface in Java programs and in NET applications to validate XML documents transform XML documents using XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 stylesheets and execute XQuery documents XSLT transformation tasks can therefore be automated with the use of AltovaXML For example you can create a batch file that calls AltovaXML to transform a set of documents See the Altova XML documentation for details 112 XML Additional Features 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 4 8 Additional Features Additional features for working with XML files are listed below Encoding Find and Replace Encoding The encoding of XML files and other types of documents can be set via the menu command File Encoding The default encoding of XML and non XML files can be specified in the Options Encoding tab Find and Replace The Find and Replace features accessed via the Edit menu has powerful search capabilities The search term can be defined additionally in terms of casing and whether whole words should be matched and it can also be expressed as a regular expression The search range can be restricted to a selection in the document and to particular node types see screenshot below The screenshot above shows the Find amp Replace dialog in Text View The dialog and functionality varies according
155. MLSpy 2011 1 1 XSLT 1 0 Engine Implementation Information The Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine is built into Altova s XMLSpy StyleVision Authentic and MapForce XML products It is also available in the free AltovaXML package The Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine implements and conforms to the World Wide Web Consortium s XSLT 1 0 Recommendation of 16 November 1999 and XPath 1 0 Recommendation of 16 November 1999 Limitations and implementation specific behavior are listed below Limitations The xsl preserve space and xsl strip space elements are not supported When the method attribute of xsl output is set to HTML or if HTML output is selected by default then special characters in the XML or XSLT file are inserted in the HTML document directly as special characters they are not inserted as HTML character references in the output For instance the character amp 160 the decimal character reference for a non breaking space is not inserted as amp nbsp in the HTML code but directly as a non breaking space Implementation s handling of whitespace only nodes in source XML document The XML data and consequently the XML Infoset that is passed to the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine is stripped of boundary whitespace only text nodes A boundary whitespace only text node is a whitespace only text node that occurs between two elements within an element of mixed content This stripping may have an effect on the value returned by the fn position fn last
156. MSSCCI Provider 1 In the manager Visual Studio 2008 Team Explorer or Visual Studio 2008 options configure Altova DiffDog as new user tool 2 Choose Visual Studio Team Foundation Server source as the plug in 3 Configure a new user tool specifying i the extensions of the files you wish to compare with DiffDog and ii the DiffDog full file path Perforce P4V 2008 1 http www perforce com The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Perforce 2008 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Choose the tab Diff in the Preferences panel 3 Check as default differencing application the field Other application and enter the DiffDog full file path 2011 Altova GmbH SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing 211 Source Control User Manual PushOK CVS SCC NT 2 1 2 5 PushOK SVN SCC 1 5 1 1 PushOK CVS SCC x64 version 2 2 0 4 PushOK SVN SCC x64 version 1 6 3 1 http www pushok com soft_cvs php The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into PushOK CVS NT and PushOK SVN SCC 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Choose the CVS Executables tab 3 Select the value External merge compare tool into the Diff Merge field 4 Insert the DiffDog full file path 5 Edit the value first second into the 2 way diff cmd field Warning When using the default differencing editor CvsConflictEditor you might have problems comparing files with excessively long lines We re
157. Name Prefix Namespace URI XML Schema types xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema Schema instance xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance Built in functions fn http www w3 org 2005 xpath functions Local functions local http www w3 org 2005 xquery local functions The following points should be noted The Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine recognizes the prefixes listed above as being bound to the corresponding namespaces Since the built in functions namespace listed above is the default functions namespace in XQuery the fn prefix does not need to be used when built in functions are invoked for example string Hello will call the fn string function However the prefix fn can be used to call a built in function without having to declare the namespace in the query prolog for example fn string Hello You can change the default functions namespace by declaring the default function namespace expression in the query prolog When using types from the XML Schema namespace the prefix xs may be used without having to explicitly declare the namespaces and bind these prefixes to them in the query prolog Example xs date and xs yearMonthDuration If you wish to use some other prefix for the XML Schema namespace this must be explicitly declared in the query prolog Example declare namespace alt http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema alt date 2004 10 04 Note that the untypedAtomic dayTimeDuration an
158. New Project The New Project command creates a new project in XMLSpy If you are currently working with another project a prompt appears asking if you want to close all documents belonging to the current project 240 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 3 2 Open Project The Open Project command opens an existing project in XMLSpy If you are currently working with another project the previous project is closed first 12 3 3 Reload Project The Reload Project command reloads the current project from disk If you are working in a multi user environment it can sometimes become necessary to reload the project from disk because other users might have made changes to the project Please note Project files spp files are actually XML documents that you can edit like any regular XML File 12 3 4 Close Project The Close Project command closes the active project If the project has been modified you will be asked whether you want to save the project first When a project is modified in any way an asterisk is added to the project name in the Project Window 12 3 5 Save Project Save Project As The Save Project command saves the current project You can also save a project by making the project window active and clicking the icon The Save Project As command saves the current project with a new name that you can enter when prompted for one 12 3 6 Source Control XMLSpy supports Mi
159. Picker Dates are entered or modified by typing in the value The method the Authentic View user will use is defined in the SPS Both methods are described in the two sub sections of this section Note on date formats In the XML document dates can be stored in one of several date datatypes Each of these datatypes requires that the date be stored in a particular lexical format in order for the XML document to be valid For example the xs date datatype requires a lexical format of YYYY MM DD If the date in an xs date node is entered in anything other than this format then the XML document will be invalid In order to ensure that the date is entered in the correct format the SPS designer can include the graphical Date Picker in the design This would ensure that the date selected in the Date Picker is entered in the correct lexical format If there is no Date Picker the Authentic View should take care to enter the date in the correct lexical format Validating the XML document could provide useful tips about the required lexical format Date Picker The Date Picker is a graphical calendar used to enter dates in a standard format into the XML document Having a standard format is important for the processing of data in the document The Date Picker icon appears near the date field it modifies see screenshot 164 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 To display the Date Picker see screenshot
160. Right clicking a file pops up a context menu containing commands available for that file screenshot above The various file icons are shown below Checked in Available for check out Checked out by another user Not available for check out Checked out locally Can be edited and checked in After you check out a file you can edit it in your Altova application and save it using File Save Ctrl S You can check in the edited file via the context menu in the Open URL dialog see screenshot above or via the context menu that pops up when you click the file tab in the Main Window of your application screenshot below When a file is checked out by another user it is not available for check out When a file is checked out locally by you you can undo the check out with the Undo Check Out command in the context menu This has the effect of returning the file unchanged to the server If you check out a file in one Altova application you cannot check it out in another Altova application The file is considered to be already checked out to you The available commands at this point in any Altova application supporting Microsoft SharePoint Server will be Check In and Undo Check Out 228 User Reference File Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Opening and saving files via Global Resources To open or save a file via a global resources click Switch to Global Resource This pops up a dialog in wh
161. SS 5 3 2 Client http www dynamsoft com Products SAW_Overview aspx The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere for VSS 1 Go to the Dynamic SourceAnywhere For VSS client Options 2 Specify the DiffDog full path as External application for diff merge with the arguments FIRST_FILE SECOND_FILE Warning Do not perform these settings from the Altova product options as there is no possibility of inserting the external application parameters Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Hosted Client 22252 http www dynamsoft com Products SourceAnywhere Hosting Version Control Sourc e Control aspx Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Standalone 2 2 Client http www dynamsoft com Products SourceAnywhere SourceSafe VSS aspx The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Hosted and Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Standalone 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Specify the DiffDog full path as External program application for diff merge with arguments FIRST_FILE SECOND_FILE Jalindi Igloo 1 0 3 http www jalindi com igloo The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Jalindi Igloo 1 Start the Show differences command in XMLSpy 210 Source Control SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 Open the Show Differences or Merge Files panel 3 Set the External Diff Command by entering the DiffDog full file
162. Software is governed by such agreement You may not sublicense lease loan rent distribute or otherwise transfer the Pre release Software Upon receipt of a later unreleased version of the Pre release Software or release by Altova of a publicly released commercial version of the Software whether as a stand alone product or as part of a larger product you agree to return or destroy all earlier Pre release Software received from Altova and to abide by the terms of the license agreement for any such later versions of the Pre release Software 5 LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY a Limited Warranty and Customer Remedies Altova warrants to the person or entity that first purchases a license for use of the Software pursuant to the terms of this Software License Agreement that i the Software will perform substantially in accordance with any accompanying Documentation for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of receipt and ii any support services provided by Altova shall be substantially as described in Section 6 of this agreement Some states and jurisdictions do not allow limitations on duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation may not apply to you To the extent allowed by applicable law implied warranties on the Software if any are limited to ninety 90 days Altova s and its suppliers entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be at Altova s option either i return of the price paid if any o
163. TICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY 2011 Altova GmbH Altova End User License Agreement 365 License Information Appendices INFORMATIONAL CONTENT OR ACCURACY QUIET ENJOYMENT TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE OTHERS WHICH VARY FROM STATE JURISDICTION TO STATE JURISDICTION c Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF A REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL ALTOVA OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES EVEN IF ALTOVA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ANY CASE ALTOVA S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT Because some states and jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability the above limitation may not apply to you In such states and jurisdictions Altova s liability shall be limited to the greatest extent permitted by law and the
164. This section describes how XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 functions are handled by the Altova XPath 2 0 Engine and Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine Only those functions are listed for which the behavior is implementation specific or where the behavior of an individual function is different in any of the three environments in which these functions are used that is in XSLT 2 0 in XQuery 1 0 and in the XPath Evaluator of XMLSpy Note that this section does not describe how to use these functions For more information about the usage of functions see the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XQuery 1 0 and XPath 2 0 Functions and Operators Recommendation of 23 January 2007 1 4 1 General Information Standards conformance The Altova XPath 2 0 Engine implements the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XPath 2 0 Recommendation of 23 January 2007 The Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine implements the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XQuery 1 0 Recommendation of 23 January 2007 The XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 functions support in these two engines is compliant with the XQuery 1 0 and XPath 2 0 Functions and Operators Recommendation of 23 January 2007 The Altova XPath 2 0 Engine conforms to the rules of XML 1 0 Fourth Edition and XML Namespaces 1 0 Default functions namespace The default functions namespace has been set to comply with that specified in the standard Functions can therefore be called without a prefix Boundary whitespace only nodes in source
165. User Manual and Programmers Reference All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Published 2011 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 User amp Reference Manual Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 Table of Contents Welcome to XMLSpy 3 User Manual 6 8 1 Introduction 9 The Graphical User Interface GUI 1 1
166. Vista does not let applications write to the C Program Files area Edit the setEnv cmd file that resides in the installation directory so that the JAVA_HOME environment variable points to the location of your JVM If you work with Vista you might have problem when saving the file 1 If this is the case start Windows Explorer and go to C Windows System32 2 Right click and run cmd exe As Administrator 3 A command window pops up 4 Type cd lt installation folder of the QVCS Enterprise client gt 5 Type Notepad setEnv cmd and then edit the file and save it 6 From the installation directory of the Qumasoft QVCS Enterprise client run the batch file gui bat 7 Add a server from the Server menu specifying the requested name IP address and ports log in and define a local workspace Qumasoft QVCS Pro 3 10 18 http www qumasoft com To install Qumasoft QVCS Pro run the installer 206 Source Control Installing Source Control Systems 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 If your operating system is Vista you must modify the installation directory from the default value C Program Files QVCSBin to C QVCSBin This must be done as Vista does not let applications write to the C Program Files area After installation is finished launch the QVCS 3 10 client create a new user and enable Ide integration by selecting the submenu Ide Integration in the Admin m
167. XHTML documents a DTD or XML Schema can be assigned via the DTD Schema menu which enables you to browse for the required DTD or XML Schema file An XHTML document can be edited exactly like an XML document Browser View commands Browser View commands are available in the Browser menu 2011 Altova GmbH CSS 173 HTML CSS JSON User Manual 8 2 CSS CSS documents can be edited using Text View s intelligent editing features These features as they apply to the editing of CSS documents are listed below Syntax coloring A CSS rule consists of a selector one or more properties and the values of those properties These three components may be further sub divided into more specific categories for example a selector may be a class pseudo class ID element or attribute Additionally a CSS document can contain other items than rules for example comments In Text View each such category of items can be displayed in a different color screenshot below according to settings you make in the Options dialog see below You can set the colors of the various CSS components in the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog In the combo box at top left select CSS and then select the required color in the Styles pane for each CSS item Folding margins Each rule can be collapsed and expanded by clicking respectively the minus and plus icons to the left of the rule see screenshot above Note also that the pair of curly braces that deli
168. XML and Copy as Text commands work see the description of the Paste As command immediately below Paste As The Paste As command offers the option of pasting as XML or as text an Authentic View XML fragment which was copied to the clipboard If the copied fragment is pasted as XML it is pasted together with its XML markup If it is pasted as text then only the text content of the copied fragment is pasted not the XML markup if any The following situations are possible An entire node together with its markup tags is highlighted in Authentic View and copied to the clipboard i The node can be pasted as XML to any location where this node may validly be placed It will not be pasted to an invalid location ii If the node is pasted as text then only the node s text content will be pasted not the markup the text content can be pasted to any location in the XML document where text may be pasted A text fragment is highlighted in Authentic View and copied to the clipboard i If this fragment is pasted as XML then the XML markup tags of the text even though these were not explicitly copied with the text fragment will be pasted along with the text but only if the XML node is valid at the location where the fragment is pasted ii If the fragment is pasted as text then it can be pasted to any location in the XML document where text may be pasted Note Text will be copied to nodes where text is allowed so it is up to you to
169. XMLSpy as well as links to information and support pages on our web server The Help menu also contains the Registration dialog which lets you enter your license key code once you have purchased the product 12 13 1 Table of Contents The Help Table of contents command displays a hierarchical representation of all chapters and topics contained in the online help system Use this command to jump to the table of contents directly from within XMLSpy Once the help window is open use the three tabs to toggle between the table of contents index and search panes The Favorites tab lets you bookmark certain pages within the help system 12 13 2 Index The Help Index command accesses the keyword index of the Online Help You can also use the Index tab in the left pane of the online help system The index lists all relevant keywords and lets you navigate to a topic by double clicking the respective keyword If more than one topic matches the selected keyword you are presented a list of available topics to choose from 12 13 3 Search The Help Search command performs a full text search on the entire online help system 1 Enter your search term in the query field and press Enter The online help system displays a list of available topics that contain the search term 2011 Altova GmbH Help Menu 325 User Reference User Manual you ve entered 2 Double click on any item in the list to display the corresponding topic 1
170. XQuery keywords are instructions used in query expressions and they are displayed in blue You select a keyword by placing the cursor inside a keyword or immediately before or after it With a keyword selected pressing Ctrl Space causes a complete list of keywords to be displayed in a pop up menu You can scroll through the list and double click a keyword you wish to have replace the selected keyword In the screenshot above the cursor was placed in the let keyword Double clicking a keyword from the list causes it to replace the let keyword Variables Names of variables are prefixed with the sign and they are displayed in purple This mechanism of the intelligent editing feature is similar to that for keywords There are two ways to access the pop up list of all variables in a document After typing a character press Ctrl Space Select a variable and press Ctrl Space A variable is selected when you place the cursor immediately after the character or within the name of a variable or 130 XSLT and XQuery XQuery 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 immediately after the name of a variable To insert a variable after the character when typing or to replace a selected variable double click the variable you want in the pop up menu Functions Just as with keywords and variables a pop up menu of built in functions is displayed when you select a function displayed in olive and press Ctrl Space A function is s
171. XSLT and XQuery XSLT 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The following points should be noted 1 If a new XSLT document is created via the Create a New Document dialog File New then the appropriate XSLT elements and attributes XSLT 1 0 or XSLT 2 0 depending upon which document type was created are loaded into the entry helpers Additionally HTML elements and attributes are loaded as well as the HTML 4 0 entity sets Latin 1 special characters and symbols 2 If an XML document is created via the Create a New Document dialog File New and given XSLT content no entry helper items are available except for XML character entities 3 If an XSLT document is opened that was created as an XSLT document via the Create a New Document dialog File New then the entity helpers will be as in Point 1 above 4 If an XSLT document is opened that was not created as an XSLT document via the Create a New Document dialog File New then the entity helpers will be as in Point 1 above Additionally XSL FO elements and attributes will be listed in the Text View entry helpers 5 The prefixes of elements in the Elements entry helper are as follows and are invariable xsl prefix for XSLT elements no prefix for HTML elements fo prefix for XSL FO elements Consequently in order to use the entry helpers the namespace declarations in the XSLT document must define prefixes that match the built in prefixes shown in the entry helpers Au
172. Y ALTOVA IN THIS RESPECT NOTWITHSTANDING ANY SUPPORT FOR ANY TECHNICAL STANDARD THE SOFTWARE IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN OR IN CONNECTION WITH WITHOUT LIMITATION THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT MEDICAL DEVICES OR LIFE SUPPORT SYSTEMS MEDICAL OR HEALTH CARE APPLICATIONS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE OF THE SOFTWARE OR ERRORS IN DATA PROCESSING COULD LEAD TO DEATH PERSONAL INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE YOU AGREE THAT YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ACCURACY AND ADEQUACY OF THE SOFTWARE AND ANY DATA GENERATED OR PROCESSED BY THE SOFTWARE FOR YOUR INTENDED USE AND YOU WILL DEFEND INDEMNIFY AND HOLD ALTOVA ITS OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES HARMLESS FROM ANY 3RD PARTY CLAIMS DEMANDS OR SUITS THAT ARE BASED UPON THE ACCURACY AND ADEQUACY OF THE SOFTWARE IN YOUR USE OR ANY DATA GENERATED BY THE SOFTWARE IN YOUR USE 2 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS Acknowledgement of Altova s Rights You acknowledge that the Software and any copies 2011 Altova GmbH Altova End User License Agreement 363 License Information Appendices that you are authorized by Altova to make are the intellectual property of and are owned by Altova and its suppliers The structure organization and code of the Software are the valuable trade secrets and confidential information of Altova and its suppliers The Software is protected by copyright including withou
173. a Software e g MapForce 2011 and include libraries owned by Altova GmbH Copyright 2007 2011 Altova GmbH www altova com b Server Use You may install one 1 copy of the Software on a computer file server within your internal network solely for the purpose of downloading and installing the Software onto other computers within your internal network up to the Permitted Number of computers in a commercial environment only If you have licensed SchemaAgent then you may install SchemaAgent Server on any server computer or workstation and use it in connection with your Software No other network use is permitted including without limitation using the Software either directly or through commands data or instructions from or to a computer not part of your internal network for Internet or Web hosting services or by any user not licensed to use this copy of the Software through a valid license from Altova If you have purchased Concurrent User Licenses as defined in Section 1 d and subject to limits set forth therein you may install a copy of the Software on a terminal server Microsoft Terminal Server Citrix Metaframe etc application virtualization server Microsoft App V Citrix XenApp VMWare ThinApp etc or virtual machine environment within your internal network for the sole and exclusive purpose of permitting individual users within your organization to access and use the Software through a terminal server application virtualiza
174. a View will be enabled only for XML Schema documents In this section we describe the various editing views available in XMLSpy Text View Grid View Schema View Authentic View Browser View 42 Editing Views Text View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 1 Text View In Text View screenshot below you can type in the text of your document both markup and content directly Any text file including non XML documents such as XQuery and HTML documents can be edited in Text View A number of features help you to quickly and accurately type in your document In this section we describe general Text View features that are available for all kinds of documents Specific document types such as XML XQuery and CSS have certain type specific features which are described in the respective sections for those document types For example additional XML specific features of Text View are described in the section XML Editing XML in Text View The general Text View features have been organized as follows Formatting in Text View describes how the font properties indentation and word wrapping of the document can be specified Document display contains information about the line numbering bookmarking expanding collapsing of nodes and other display related features Editing in Text View describes the features that are available while you edit particularly the intelligent editing features
175. a XMLSpy 2011 12 5 4 Go to Schema The DTD Schema Go to Schema command opens the XML Schema on which the active XML document is based If no XML Schema is assigned then an error message is displayed 12 5 5 Go to Definition The DTD Schema Go to Definition command displays the exact definition of an element or attribute in the corresponding Document Type Definition or Schema document To see the item definition in Schema View Use CTRL Double click on the item you want to see the definition of or Click the item and select menu option DTD Schema Go to Definition or click on the icon In both cases the corresponding DTD or Schema file is opened and the item definition is highlighted 12 5 6 Generate XML from DB Excel EDI with MapForce The DTD Schema Generate XML from DB Excel EDI with MapForce command launches Altova s MapForce if the application is installed MapForce enables you to map a schema to another DTD XML Schema or database and to generate XML 12 5 7 Design HTML PDF Word Output with StyleVision The DTD Schema Design HTML PDF Output in StyleVision command launches Altova s StyleVision if the application is installed StyleVision enables you to design stylesheets for HTML PDF and RTF output 12 5 8 Generate Sample XML File The DTD Schema Generate Sample XML File command generates an XML file based on the currently active schema DTD or XML Schema in the main window 2011
176. against this internal information In an XML Schema document therefore no references should be made to any schema for XML Schema The catalog xml file in the AltovaCommonFolder Schemas schema folder contains references to DTDs that implement older XML Schema specifications You should not validate your XML Schema documents against either of these schemas The referenced files are included solely to provide XMLSpy with entry helper info for editing purposes should you wish to create documents according to these older recommendations More information For more information on catalogs see the XML Catalogs specification 120 XSLT and XQuery 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 6 XSLT and XQuery XMLSpy provides editing support for XSLT and XQuery documents has built in engines for transforming with XSLT and executing XQuery documents This section provides an overview of the XSLT and XQuery functionality available in XMLSpy It is organized into the following sections XSLT XQuery Additional and more detailed information about commands is in the descriptions of the relevant menu commands in the User Reference section For more information on editing support also see the Editing Views section and the XML section 2011 Altova GmbH XSLT 121 XSLT and XQuery User Manual 6 1 XSLT Altova website XSLT Editor This section on XSLT is organized into the following sections Editing XSLT documents de
177. ager attribute select true Press Enter to insert the value true at the cursor position 6 Move the cursor to the end of the line using the End key if you like and press the space bar This opens a dropdown list this time containing a list of attributes allowed at that point Also in the Attributes Entry Helper the available attributes are listed in red The Manager attribute is grayed out because it has already been used 28 XMLSpy Tutorial XML Documents 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 7 Select Degree with the Down arrow key and press Enter This opens another list box from which you can select one of the predefined enumerations BA MA or PhD 8 Select BA with the Down arrow key and confirm with Enter Then move the cursor to the end of the line with the End key and press the space bar Manager and Degree are now grayed out in the Attributes Entry Helper 9 Select Programmer with the Down arrow key and press Enter 10 Enter the letter f and press Enter 11 Move the cursor to the end of the line with the End key and enter the greater than angular bracket gt XMLSpy automatically inserts all the required child elements of Person Note that the optional Title element is not inserted Each element has start and end tags but no content 2011 Altova GmbH XML Documents 29 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual You could now enter the Person data in Text View but let s move to Grid View to see the fl
178. ains a link to the relevant paragraph in the relevant specification the XML specification for DTD validation and XML Schema specification for XML Schema validation Please note When the validation is done in Text View clicking a link in the Validation window highlights the corresponding declaration or definition in Text View When the validation is done in Schema View the corresponding declaration or definition is highlighted either in the design window of Schema View or in the relevant entry helper window Catalogs XMLSpy supports a subset of the OASIS XML catalogs mechanism The catalog mechanism enables XMLSpy to retrieve commonly used schemas as well as stylesheets and other files from local user folders This increases the overall processing speed enables users to work offline that is not connected to a network and improves the portability of documents because URIs need to be changed in the catalog files only The catalog mechanism in XMLSpy works as follows XMLSpy loads a file called RootCatalog xml which contains a list of catalog files that will be looked up You can enter as many catalog files to look up each in a nextCatalog element in RootCatalog xml The catalog files included in RootCatalog xml are looked up and the URIs are resolved according to the mappings specified in the catalog files You should take care 2011 Altova GmbH XML Menu 269 User Reference User Manual not to duplicate mappings as
179. aints list 5 In the newly created entry enter the Identity Constraint s properties Give the identity constraint a name see screenshot below and then define XPath expressions for the selector and field elements For each location step in these XPath expression a pop up containing the available nodes appears see screenshot below For the refer element of the keyref kind of identity constraint a dropdown list shows the available key elements see screenshot below If you wish to define multiple field elements on an identity constraint select the identity constraint click the Append or Insert icon see Step 3 above and select Field An empty Field entry box is added to the selected identity constraint Enter the required XPath expression in the Field entry box Note An ID can be assigned to any of these elements that is to the identity constraint its selector and or field s To assign an ID select the element and in the Details entry helper enter the ID in the id row Identity constraints in Content Model View To view identity constraints in Content Model View do the following 1 In Schema Overview select the global component for which you wish to create the identity constraint and switch to the Content Model View of that component 2 Ensure that the display of identity constraints is toggled on in the Schema Display Configuration dialog Schema Design Configure View This toggle switches on and off the display of the
180. alidation message screenshot below is displayed in the Messages Window Otherwise a message that describes the error screenshot below is displayed Notice that there are links black link text to nodes and node content in the XML document as well as links blue link text to the sections in the relevant specification on the Internet that describe the rule in question Clicking the purple Def buttons opens the relevant schema definition in Schema View The Messages Window is enabled in all views but clicking a link to content in an XML document highlights that node in the XML document in Text View Note The Validate command in the XML menu is normally applied to the active document But you can also apply the command to a file folder or group of files in the active project Select the required file or folder in the Project Window by clicking on it and click XML Validate or F8 Invalid files in a project will be opened and made active in the Main Window and the File Is Invalid error message will be displayed 2011 Altova GmbH The Graphical User Interface GUI 15 Introduction User Manual 1 1 6 Menu Bar Toolbars Status Bar Menu Bar The menu bar see illustration contains the various application menus The following conventions apply If commands in a menu are not applicable in a view or at a particular location in the document they are unavailable Some menu commands pop up a submenu with a list of a
181. alidation result Please note This check does not check the structure of the XML file for conformance with the schema Schema conformance is evaluated in the validity check Checking validity An XML document is valid according to a schema if it conforms to the structure and content specified in that schema To check the validity of your XML document first select Text View then select the menu option XML Validate or press the F8 key or click An error message appears in the Messages window saying the file is not valid Mandatory elements are expected after the City element in Address If you check your schema you will see that the US Address complex type which you have set this Address element to be with its xsi type attribute has a content model in which the City element must be followed by a Zip element and a State element Fixing the invalid document The point at which the document becomes invalid is highlighted in this case the City element Now look at the Elements Entry Helper at top right Notice that the Zip element is prefixed with an exclamation mark which indicates that the element is mandatory in the current context To fix the validation error 1 Place the cursor after the City element and in the Elements Entry Helper double click the Zip element 2 Ensure the cursor is between the start and end tags of the Zip element and enter the Zip Code of the State 04812 then confirm with Enter The Elements Entry
182. ally on the server and then refresh the contents of the external folder Folders on a Microsoft SharePoint Server When a folder on a Microsoft SharePoint Server has been added to a project files in the folder can be checked out and checked in via commands in the context menu of the file listing in the Project window see screenshot below To access these commands right click the file you wish to work with and select the command you want Check Out Check In Undo Check Out The User ID and password can be saved in the properties of individual folders in the project thereby enabling you to skip the verification process each time the server is accessed 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 261 User Reference User Manual In the Project window screenshot below file icons have symbols that indicate the check in check out status of files The various file icons are shown below Checked in Available for check out Checked out by another user Not available for check out Checked out locally Can be edited and checked in The following points should be noted After you check out a file you can edit it in your Altova application and save it using File Save Ctrl S You can check in the edited file via the context menu in the Project window see screenshot above or via the context menu that pops up when you right click the file tab in the Main Window of your application screenshot below When a file
183. alogs work Catalogs are commonly used to redirect a call to a DTD to a local URI This is achieved by mapping in the catalog file public or system identifiers to the required local URI So when the DOCTYPE declaration in an XML file is read the public or system identifier locates the required local resource via the catalog file mapping For popular schemas the PUBLIC identifier is usually pre defined thus requiring only that the URI in the catalog file point to the correct local copy When the XML document is parsed the PUBLIC identifier in it is read If this identifier is found in a catalog file the corresponding URL in the catalog file will be looked up and the schema will be read from this location So for example if the following SVG file is opened in XMLSpy lt xml version 1 0 standalone no gt lt DOCTYPE svg PUBLIC W3C DTD SVG 1 1 EN http www w3 org Graphics SVG 1 1 DTD svg11 dtd gt lt svg width 20 height 20 xml space preserve gt lt g style fill red stroke 000000 gt lt rect x 0 y 0 width 15 height 15 gt lt rect x 5 y 5 width 15 height 15 gt lt g gt lt svg gt This document is read and the catalog is searched for the PUBLIC identifier Let s say the catalog file contains the following entry lt catalog gt lt public publicId W3C DTD SVG 1 1 EN uri schemas svg svg11 dtd gt lt catalog gt In this case there is a match for the PUBLIC identifi
184. ameters are used as follows in XMLSpy When the XSL Transformation command in the XSL XQuery menu is used to transform an XML document the parameter values currently saved in the dialog are passed to the selected XSLT document and used for the transformation When the XQuery Execution command in the XSL XQuery menu is used to process an XQuery document the XQuery external variable values currently saved in the dialog are passed to the XQuery document for the execution Please note Parameters or variables that you enter in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog are only passed on to the built in Altova XSLT engine Therefore if you are using MSXML or another external engine that you have configured these parameters are not passed to this engine Using XSLT Parameters The value you enter for the parameter can be an XPath expression without quotes or a text 284 User Reference XSL XQuery Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 string delimited by quotes If the active document is an XSLT document the Get from XSL button will be enabled Clicking this button inserts parameters declared in the XSLT into the dialog together with their default values This enables you to quickly include declared parameters and then change their default values as required Please note Once a set of parameter values is entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog it is used for all subsequent transfo
185. and create bold and italic elements using both the context menu and Elements entry helper Before or after the selected element or any of its ancestors if allowed by the schema Select the required element from the submenu s that roll out In the Elements entry helper elements that can be inserted before or after the selected element are indicated with the and icons respectively Note that in the Elements entry helper you can insert elements before after the selected element only you cannot insert before after an ancestor element Try out this command by first placing the cursor inside the para element and then inside the table listing the employees Add Node link If an element or attribute is included in the document design and is not present in the XML document an Add Node link is displayed at the location in the document where that node is specified To see this link in the line with the text Location of logo select the href node within the CompanyLogo element and delete it by pressing the Delete key The add href link appears within the CompanyLogo element that was edited screenshot below Clicking the link adds the href node to the XML document The text box within the href tags appears because the design specifies that the href node be added like this You still have to enter the value or content of the href node Enter the text nanonull gif If the content model of an element is ambiguous for example if it specifi
186. any of these schemas The referenced DTD files are included solely to provide XMLSpy with entry helper info for editing purposes should you wish to create documents according to these older recommendations Also see next point If you create a custom file extension for a particular schema for example the myhtml extension for HTML files that are to be valid according to the HTML DTD then you can enable intelligent editing for files with these extensions by adding a line of text to CustomCatalog xml For the example extension mentioned you should add the element lt spy fileExtHelper ext myhtml uri schemas xhtml xhtml1 transitional dtd gt as a child of the lt catalog gt element This would enable intelligent editing auto completion entry helpers etc of myhtml files in XMLSpy according to the XHTML 1 0 Transitional DTD For more information on catalogs see the XML Catalogs specification Automating validation with Altova XML 2011 AltovaXML is a free application which contains Altova s XML Validator XSLT 1 0 XSLT 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 engines It can be used from the command line via a COM interface in Java programs and in NET applications to validate XML documents transform XML documents using XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 stylesheets and execute XQuery documents Validation tasks can therefore be automated with the use of Altova XML For example you can create a batch file that calls AltovaXML to perform validation on a set of d
187. ar overview of the various folders and files in your project and enabling you to quickly access any and all files in a project Simply double click a file in the Project window to open it You can quickly add files and folders to a project as required and delete unwanted files and folders When you wish to work with another project close the project currently open in the Project Window and open the required project Batch processing The commands for batch processing of files in a folder whether the top level project folder or a folder at any other level are available in the context menu of that folder obtained by right clicking the folder The steps for batch processing are as follows 1 Define the files to be used for validation or transformation in the Properties dialog of that folder 2 Specify the folder in which the output of transformations should be saved If no output folder is specified for a folder the output folder of the next ancestor folder in the project tree is used 3 Use the commands in the context menu for batch execution If you use the corresponding commands in the XML DTD Schema or XSL XQuery menus the command will be executed only on the document active in the Main Window not on any project folder in the Project Window The following commands in the context menu of a project folder top level or other are available for batch processing Well formed check If any error is detected during the batch execu
188. arge or small markup on Try using each type of text content described above Adding content via a data entry device In the content editing you have learned above content is added by directly typing in text as content There is one other way that element content or attribute values can be entered in Authentic View via data entry devices Given below is a list of data entry devices in Authentic View together with an explanation of how data is entered in the XML file for each device Data Entry Device Data in XML File Input Field Text Box Text entered by user Multiline Input Field Text entered by user Combo box User selection mapped to value Check box User selection mapped to value Radio button User selection mapped to value Button User selection mapped to value In the static table containing the address fields shown below there are two data entry devices an input field for the Zip field and a combo box for the State field The values that you enter in the text fields are entered directly as the XML content of the respective elements For other data entry devices your selection is mapped to a value For the Authentic View shown above here is the corresponding XML text lt Address gt lt ipo street gt 119 Oakstreet Suite 4876 lt ipo street gt lt ipo city gt Vereno lt ipo city gt lt ipo state gt DC lt ipo state gt lt ipo zip gt 29213 lt ipo zip gt lt Address gt 2011 Altova GmbH Authent
189. arkup Mixed Markup and Hide All Markup These modes enable you to view the document with varying levels of markup information To switch between modes use the commands in the Authentic menu or the icons in the toolbar see the previous section Authentic View toolbar icons Large markup This shows the start and end tags of elements and attributes with the element attribute names in the tags The element Name in the figure above is expanded i e the start and end tags as well as the content of the element are shown An element attribute can be contracted by double clicking either its start or end tag To expand the contracted element attribute double click the contracted tag In large markup attributes are recognized by the equals to symbol in the start and end tags of the attribute 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View 89 Editing Views User Manual Small markup This shows the start and end tags of elements attributes without names Notice that start tags have a symbol inside it while end tags are empty Also element tags have an angular brackets symbol while attribute tags have and equals sign as its symbol see screenshot below To collapse or expand an element attribute double click the appropriate tag The example below shows a collapsed element highlighted in blue Notice the shape of the tag of the collapsed element and that of the start tag of the expanded element to its left Mixed markup Mixed markup shows a c
190. as a string by enclosing it in single quotes The altova evaluate function returns the contents of the first Name element in the document The altova evaluate function can take additional optional arguments These arguments are respectively the values of variables with the names p1 p2 p3 pN that can be used in the XPath expression altova evaluate XPathExp as xs string p1value pNvalue where the variable names must be of the form pX X being an integer the sequence of the function s arguments from the second argument onwards corresponds to the sequence of variables named p1 to pN So the second argument will be the value of the variable p1 the third argument that of the variable p2 and so on The variable values must be of type item For example lt xsl variable name xpath select p3 p2 p1 gt lt xsl value of select altova evaluate xpath 10 20 hi gt Outputs hi 20 10 In the above listing notice the following The second argument of the altova evaluate expression is the value assigned to the variable p1 the third argument that assigned to the variable p2 and so on Notice that the fourth argument of the function is a string value indicated by its being enclosed in quotes The select attribute of the xs variable element supplies the XPath expression Since this expression must be of type xs string it is enclosed in single quotes The following examples f
191. as that file s extension associated with it Consequently when multiple files are added to a folder they will be distributed by file extension among the child folders that have the corresponding file extension associations External folders yellow are folders in a file system When an external folder is added to a folder the external folder and all its files sub folders and sub folder files are included in the project Defining file extensions on an external folder serves to filter the files available in the project External web folders are like external folders except that they are located on a web server and require user authentication to access Defining file extensions on an external web folder serves to filter the files available in the project Files can be added to a folder by selecting the folder and then using one of the three Add File commands i Add Files to select the file s via an Open dialog ii Add Active File to add the file that is active in the Main Window iii Add Active and Related Files additionally adds files related to an active XML file for example an XML Schema or DTD Note that files associated by means of a processing instruction for example XSLT files are not considered to be related files Global Resources are aliases for file folder and database resources How they are defined and used is described in the section on Global Resources URLs identify a resource object via a URL
192. assigned to design elements toolbar buttons and context menus When an XML document based on the SPS is opened in an Altova product that supports Authentic Scripting see table above the document will have the additional flexibility and interactivity that has been created for it 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic Scripting 169 Authentic User Manual Documentation for Authentic Scripting The documentation for Authentic Scripting is available in the documentation of StyleVision It can be viewed online via the Product Documentation page of the Altova website 170 HTML CSS JSON 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 8 HTML CSS JSON XMLSpy provides intelligent editing features for HTML and CSS documents JSON intelligent editing features are available in the Enterprise and Professional editions of XMLSpy they are not available in the Standard Edition Both types of documents can be edited in Text View Additionally the active HTML document can be previewed in Browser View The intelligent editing features of each type of document is described separately in the sub sections of this section HTML CSS Note JSON support is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions only It is not available in Standard Edition 2011 Altova GmbH HTML 171 HTML CSS JSON User Manual 8 1 HTML HTML documents can be edited in Text View and the edited page can then be viewed immediately in Browser View Text View pro
193. ation of the files in that folder XSLT files can be assigned to specific folders allowing transformations of the XML files in that folder using the assigned XSLT The destination folders of XSL transformation files can be specified for the folder as a whole All the above project settings can be defined using the menu option Project Project Properties In the next section you will create a project using the Project menu Additionally the following advanced project features are available XML files can be placed under source control using the menu option Project Source control Add to source control Please see the Source Control section in the online help for more information Personal network and web folders can be added to projects allowing batch validation 2 5 2 Building a Project Having come to this point in the tutorial you will have a number of tutorial related files open in the Main Window You can group these files into a tutorial project First you create a new project and then you add the tutorial files into the appropriate sub folders of the project Creating a basic project To create a new project 1 Select the menu option Project New Project A new project folder called New Project is created in the Project Window The new project contains empty folders for typical categories of XML files in a project screenshot below 2 Click the CompanyLast xml tab to make the CompanyLast xml fi
194. avaScript LDAP CORBA 3 0 WML etc and is the official way to implement ISO IEC 10646 It is supported in many operating systems all modern browsers and many other products The emergence of the Unicode Standard and the availability of tools supporting it are among the most significant recent global software technology trends Incorporating Unicode into client server or multi tiered applications and web sites offers significant cost savings over the use of legacy character sets Unicode enables a single software product or a single web site to be targeted across multiple platforms languages and countries without re engineering It allows data to be transported through many different systems without corruption 2 4 1 Windows XP Altova s XML products provide full Unicode support To edit an XML document you will also need a font that supports the Unicode characters being used by that document Please note that most fonts only contain a very specific subset of the entire Unicode range and are therefore typically targeted at the corresponding writing system Consequently you may encounter XML documents that contain unprintable characters because the font you have selected does not contain the required glyphs Therefore it can sometimes be very useful to have a font that covers the entire Unicode range especially when editing XML documents from all over the world The most universal font we have encountered is a typeface called Arial U
195. ayed using new lines and indentations see screenshot below To display the document in this way you need to do the following 1 In the View Tab of the Options dialog check the Use Indentation option for pretty printing This will cause the document to be pretty printed with indents to indicate the hierarchical structure Each deeper level will be displayed with a deeper indent than its parent element If the Use Indentation option is not checked every line in the document will start with a zero indent 2 In the Text View Settings dialog screenshot below select either Insert Tabs or Insert Spaces This determines whether tabs or spaces will be used for indentation when the document is pretty printed If spaces are specified each deeper level of the hierarchy is indented with an additional number of spaces as specified in the Tab Size setting of the Text View Settings dialog 44 Editing Views Text View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 Click the Edit Pretty Print XML Text command or the Pretty Print icon in the Text toolbar This will cause the document text to be displayed i with or without indentation as specified in the View Tab of the Options dialog and ii if indentation is specified in the View Tab of the Options dialog then the the indentation is determined by the settings in the Tabs pane of the Text View Settings dialog Clicking the Pretty Print command removes unnecessary leading or trailing whitespace
196. base drop down list and restriction from the derivedBy drop down list 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 79 Editing Views User Manual With Smart Restrictions switched on the new derived type looks like this Notice the following controls that can be used to restrict the derived type in this example Use this icon to remove elements that are in the base type from the derived type Here elem1 has been deleted To add it again click this icon Click the down arrow on the Choice compositor to get the following list which allows 80 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 you to change the Choice model group to a Sequence model group It is also possible to change wildcards in the same way as seen in this example For a complete list of which particles can be replaced by which other particles see the XML schema specification Change the number of occurrences of the model group using the following control to increase the minimum number of occurrences by clicking the plus sign over the 1 or to decrease the maximum number of occurrences by clicking the minus sign under 4 These controls are shown if the occurrence range in the base describes a real range e g 2 5 and not a certain amount e g 4 4 They are also displayed if the occurrence range is wrong 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 81 Editing Views User Manual Here you can see that the minimum occurrenc
197. based on an SPS You can do this in two ways via the File New menu command and via the Authentic New Document menu command In both cases an SPS is selected Via File New 1 Select File New and in the Create a New Document dialog select XML as the new file type to create 2 Click Select a STYLEVISION Stylesheet and browse for the desired SPS Via Authentic New Document 1 Select Authentic New Document 2 In the Create a New Document dialog browse for the desired SPS If a Template XML File has been assigned to the SPS then the data in the Template XML File is used as the starting data of the XML document template created in Authentic View 7 1 2 The Authentic View Interface The Authentic View editing interface consists of a main window in which you enter and edit the document data and three entry helpers Editing a document is simple If you wish to see the markup of the document switch on the markup tags Then start typing in the content of your document To modify the document structure you can use either the context menu or the Elements entry helper Displaying XML node tags document markup An XML document is essentially a hierarchy of nodes For example lt DocumentRoot gt lt Person id ABC001 gt lt Name gt Alpha Beta lt Name gt lt Address gt Some Address lt Address gt lt Tel gt 1234567 lt Tel gt lt Person gt lt DocumentRoot gt 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View Tutorial
198. be docked as a tab within another window A window can be made to float or dock using one of the following methods Right click the title bar of a window and choose the required command Floating or Docking 10 Introduction The Graphical User Interface GUI 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Double click the title bar of the window If docked the window will now float If floating the window will now dock in the last position in which it was docked Drag the window using its title bar as a handle out of its docked position so that it floats Drag a floating window by its title bar to the location where it is to be docked Two sets of blue arrows appear The outer set of four arrows enables docking relative to the application window along the top right bottom or left edge of the GUI The inner set of arrows enables docking relative to the window over which the cursor is currently placed Dropping a dragged window on the button in the center of the inner set of arrows or on the title bar of a window docks the dragged window as a tabbed window within the window in which it is dropped To float a tabbed window double click its tab To drag a tabbed window out of a group of tabbed windows drag its tab Auto hiding sidebars The Auto hide feature enables you to minimize docked sidebars to buttons along the edges of the application window This gives you more screen space for the Main Window and other sidebars
199. be sorted according to the values of their Date children So the sort criterion for Order is selected from the sortkey attribute at runtime This could not have been achieved with an expression like lt xsl sort select UserReq sortkey order ascending gt In the case shown above the sort criterion would be the sortkey attribute itself not Price or Date or any other current content of sortkey Variables can be used in the altova evaluate extension function as shown in the examples below Static variables lt xsl value of select i3 i2 i1 gt Outputs the values of three variables Dynamic XPath expression with dynamic variables lt xsl variable name xpath select p3 p2 p1 gt lt xsl value of select altova evaluate xpath 10 20 30 gt Outputs 30 20 10 Dynamic XPath expression with no dynamic variable lt xsl variable name xpath select p3 p2 p1 gt lt xsl value of select altova evaluate xpath gt Outputs error No variable defined for p3 Note The static context includes namespaces types and functions but not variables from the calling environment The base URI and default namespace are inherited altova distinct nodes The altova distinct nodes function takes a set of one or more nodes as its input and returns the same set minus nodes with duplicate values The comparison is done using the XPath XQuery function fn deep equal altova distin
200. binary file such as a GIF file If the entity type is PUBLIC you must additionally enter a system identifier in this field 6 The NDATA entry tells the processor that this entity is not to be parsed but to be sent to the appropriate processor The NDATA field should therefore be used with unparsed entities only Dialog features You can append insert and delete entities by clicking the appropriate buttons You can also sort entities on the alphabetical value of any column by clicking the column header clicking once sorts in ascending order twice in descending order You can also resize the dialog box and the width of columns Once an entity is used in the XML document it is locked and cannot be edited in the Define Entities dialog Locked entities are indicated by a lock symbol in the first column Locking an entity ensures that the XML document valid with respect to entities The document would be invalid if an entity is referenced but not defined 294 User Reference Authentic Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Duplicate entities are flagged Limitations An entity contained within another entity is not resolved either in the dialog Authentic View or XSLT output and the ampersand character of such an entity is displayed in its escaped form i e amp amp External entities are not resolved in Authentic View except in the case where an entity is an image file and it is entered as the value of an attrib
201. binding information from the project see screenshot below To provisionally disable source control for the project select No To permanently disable source control for the project select Yes Get Latest Version The Get Latest Version command retrieves and places the latest source control version of the selected file s in the working directory The files are retrieved as read only and are not checked out No further options are available when using this command To get the latest version of a file do the following 1 Select the file s you want to get the latest version of in the Model Tree 2 Select Project Source Control Get Latest Version Get The Get command retrieves read only copies of the selected files and places them in the working folder By default the files are not checked out for editing To get a file select it in the Project window multiple files can be selected and then select the Get command This pops up the Get dialog screenshot below Check the files you want to get 244 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Overwrite changed files check box Overwrites those files that have been changed locally with those from the source control database Select All Selects all the files in the list box Advanced Allows you to define the Replace writable and Set timestamp options in the respective combo boxes The Make writable check box removes the read only attribute of t
202. bstantially similar to the expression of the Software Requests for information from users in the European Union with respect to the above should be directed to the Altova Customer Support Department j Other Restrictions You may not loan rent lease sublicense distribute or otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software to third parties except to the limited extent set forth in Section 3 or as otherwise expressly provided You may not copy the Software except as expressly set forth above and any copies that you are permitted to make pursuant to this Software License Agreement must contain the same copyright patent and other intellectual property markings that appear on or in the Software You may not modify adapt or translate the Software You may not directly or indirectly encumber or suffer to exist any lien or security interest on the Software knowingly take any action that would cause the Software to be placed in the public domain or use the Software in any computer environment not specified in this Software License Agreement You will comply with applicable law and Altova s instructions regarding the use of the Software You agree to notify your employees and agents who may have access to the Software of the restrictions contained in this Software License Agreement and to ensure their compliance with these restrictions k THE SOFTWARE IS NEITHER GUARANTEED NOR WARRANTED TO BE ERROR FREE NOR SHALL ANY LIABILITY BE ASSUMED B
203. can be generated that is based on the active XML Schema 116 DTDs and XML Schemas Catalogs in XMLSpy 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 5 3 Catalogs in XMLSpy XMLSpy supports a subset of the OASIS XML catalogs mechanism The catalog mechanism enables XMLSpy to retrieve commonly used schemas as well as stylesheets and other files from local user folders This increases the overall processing speed enables users to work offline that is not connected to a network and improves the portability of documents because URIs would then need to be changed only in the catalog files The catalog mechanism in XMLSpy works as outlined below RootCatalog xml When XMLSpy starts it loads a file called RootCatalog xml structure shown in listing below which contains a list of catalog files that will be looked up You can modify this file and enter as many catalog files to look up as you like each in a nextCatalog element Each of these catalog files is looked up and the URIs in them are resolved according to the mappings specified in them lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt catalog xmlns urn oasis names tc entity xmlns xml catalog xmlns spy http www altova com catalog_ext xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi schemaLocation urn oasis names tc entity xmlns xml catalog Catalog xsd gt lt nextCatalog catalog PersonalFolder Altova AppAndVersionName CustomCatalog xml gt lt nextCatalog
204. can select one or more global components An option for sorting all the components will be available 2 Clicking the Sort icon at the top of the Schema Overview pane This pops up the Sort Components dialog screenshot below 3 In the Components pane select whether all the components or only the selection is to be sorted The Selected Components option is enabled only if a the number of selected global components is greater than one 4 In the Comparison pane you can select whether the sort is performed first on the criterion of local name or component kind If there is more than one component of the same local name or same component kind whichever is the first sort criterion then these are sorted on the secondary criterion 5 For case sensitive name comparison select the check box with this label If this option is selected lowercase will be listed before uppercase Sorting attributes and identity constraints works in the same way as sorting global components The Sort icon is located in the toolbar of the Attributes Identity Constraints pane and it is enabled if the pane contains at least two named sibling components such as attributes or keys 3 3 2 Content Model View A content model is a description of the structure and contents of an element Global components which can have a content model for example elements complex types and model groups but not for example simple types are indicated in the Schema Overview
205. catalog CoreCatalog xml gt lt Include all catalogs under common schemas folder on the first directory level gt lt nextCatalog spy recurseFrom AltovaCommonFolder Schemas catalog catalog xml spy depth 1 gt lt Include all catalogs under common XBRL folder on the first directory level gt lt nextCatalog spy recurseFrom AltovaCommonFolder XBRL catalog catalog xml spy depth 1 gt lt catalog gt In the listing above notice that in the Schemas and XBRL folders of the folder identified by the variable AltovaCommonFolder are catalog files named catalog xml The value of the AltovaCommonFolder variable is given in the table below The catalog files in the Altova Common Folder map the pre defined public and system identifiers of commonly used schemas such as SVG and XBRL taxonomies to URIs that point to locally saved copies of the respective schemas These schemas are installed in the Altova Common Folder when XMLSpy is installed You should take care not to duplicate mappings in these files as this could lead to errors CoreCatalog xml CustomCatalog xml and Catalog xml In the RootCatalog xml listing above notice that CoreCatalog xml and CustomCatalog xml are listed for lookup CoreCatalog xml contains certain Altova specific mappings for locating schemas in the Altova Common Folder CustomCatalog xml is a skeleton file in which you can create your own mappings You can add mappings to Cus
206. ccurrence value has to be changed 2 Select the context menu option Optional to set minOccurs to 0 deselect Optional to set minOccurs to 1 Select the context menu option Unbounded to set maxOccurs to unbounded deselect Unbounded to set maxOccurs to 1 A check mark appears to the left of the respective menu item when that menu item is selected Toggling between local definition and global definition If a global element exists that has the same name as a local element then you can toggle between referencing the global definition and using the local definition Do this as follows 1 Right click the element 2 Select the context menu option Reference If the global element is referenced then the menu item is checked If the local definition is used the Reference item in the menu is not checked Jumping to another definition When you are within a content model you can jump to the definition of any global component that is contained in that content model Do this as follows 1 Right click the global component The global component could be the yellow rectangle of a base type an element that references a global element or a model group 2 Select the context menu option Go to Definition This opens the Content Model View of that global component Alternatively double click the name of the base type or press Ctrl and double click the referencing element or the model group Editing element names and types 1 Right click the eleme
207. ce releases and updates for that edition that are released during your Support Period For the duration of your SMP s Support Period you will also be eligible to receive upgrades to the comparable edition of the next version of the Software that succeeds the Software edition that you have licensed for applicable upgrades released during your Support Period The specific upgrade edition that you are eligible to receive based on your Support Period is further detailed in the SMP that you have purchased Software that is introduced as separate product is not included in SMP Maintenance releases updates and upgrades may or may not include additional features In addition Altova will provide Priority Technical Support to you for the duration of the Support Period Priority Technical Support is provided via a Web based support form only and Altova will make commercially reasonable efforts to respond via e mail to all requests within forty eight 48 hours during Altova s business hours MO FR 8am UTC 10pm UTC Austrian and US holidays excluded and to make reasonable efforts to provide work arounds to errors reported in the Software During the Support Period you may also report any Software problem or error to Altova If Altova determines that a reported reproducible material error in the Software exists and significantly impairs the usability and utility of the Software Altova agrees to use reasonable commercial efforts to correct or provide a usab
208. ceOffsite Client 4 2 0 Windows SourceGear Vault Version 4 1 4 Server Clients SourceGear Vault 4 1 4 Client VisualSVN Server 1 6 Version 1 6 2 Clients Aigenta Unified SCC 1 0 6 PushOK SVN SCC 1 5 1 1 PushOK SVN SCC x64 version 1 6 3 1 TamTam SVN SCC 1 2 24 200 Source Control Supported Source Control Systems 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Note the following Altova has implemented the Microsoft Source Code Control Interface MSSCCI v1 1 v1 3 in XMLSpy and has tested support for the drivers and revision control systems listed above It is expected that XMLSpy will continue to support these products if and when they are updated Source Control plugins not listed in the table above but that adhere to the MSCCI 1 1 1 3 specification should also work together with XMLSpy 2011 Altova GmbH Installing Source Control Systems 201 Source Control User Manual 11 2 Installing Source Control Systems This section gives information on how to install and set up the various supported Source Control Systems AccuBridge for Microsoft SCC 2008 2 http www accurev com 1 Install AccuRev client software run the installer and specify the server you want to connect to hostname and port then create a workspace 2 Install the AccuBridge SCC provider Extract the ZIP archive into the lt AccuRev installation dir gt bin directory Register the AccuRev dll and SccAcc
209. chema Overview and Content Model View They are described below Note In Standard Edition Schema View is available as a read only view Editing in Schema View is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions Component Navigator The Component Navigator is an Entry Helper in Schema View It serves three purposes To organize global components in a tree view by component type and namespace see screenshots below This provides organized overviews of all global components To enable you to navigate to and display the Content Model View of a global component if the component has a content model If a component does not have a content model the component is highlighted in the Schema Overview Global components that are included or imported from other schemas are also displayed in the Component Navigator To provide an overview of the identity constraints defined in the schema document For a description of the Identity Constraints tab see Identity Constraints Overview In the Globals tab above global components are grouped in a tree according to their component type In the Namespace tab below components are organized first according to namespace and then according to component type Note that a component type is listed in a tree only if at least one component of that type exists in the schema 72 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 In the tree display global components are orga
210. cific locations are as follows XMLSpy tutorial Tutorial folder Authentic View tutorial Examples folder Project file The Examples project with which XMLSpy opens is defined in the file Examples spp which is located in the Examples folder Examples files are in the Examples folder and in sub folder of the Examples folder 1 2 3 XMLSpy Features and Help and Altova Products The Altova website www altova com has a wealth of XMLSpy related information and resources Among these are the following XMLSpy feature listing The Altova website carries an up to date list of XMLSpy features which also compares the support of various features across XMLSpy editions Enterprise Professional and Standard On the website you can also obtain a listing of features that are new since any previous release XMLSpy Help This documentation is the Altova supplied Help for XMLSpy It is available as the built in Help system of XMLSpy which is accessible via the Help menu or by pressing F1 Additionally the user manuals for all Altova products are available in the following formats Online HTML manuals accessed via the Support page at the Altova website Printable PDFs which you can download from the Altova website and print locally Printed books that you can buy via a link at the Altova website Support options If you require additional information to what is available in the user manual this documentation or ha
211. ck Internet Options and then click the Advanced tab ii In the Settings box under Printing select the Print background colors and images check box and iii Then click OK 230 User Reference File Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 1 10 Recent Files Exit The File menu displays a list of the nine most recently used files with the most recently opened file shown at the top of the list You can open any of these files by clicking its name To open a file in the list using the keyboard press ALT F to open the File menu and then press the number of the file you want to open The Exit command is used to quit XMLSpy If you have any open files with unsaved changes you are prompted to save these changes XMLSpy also saves modifications to program settings and information about the most recently used files 2011 Altova GmbH Edit Menu 231 User Reference User Manual 12 2 Edit Menu The Edit menu contains commands for editing documents in XMLSpy 12 2 1 Undo Redo The Undo Ctrl Z command contains support for unlimited levels of Undo Every action can be undone and it is possible to undo one command after another The Undo history is retained after using the Save command enabling you go back to the state the document was in before you saved your changes The Redo Ctrl Y command allows you to redo previously undone commands thereby giving you a complete history of work completed You can step back and
212. command To comment out a block of text select the text to be commented out and then select the command Comment In Out either from the Edit menu or the context menu that you get on right clicking the selected text The commented text will be grayed out see screenshot below To uncomment a commented block of text select the commented block excluding the comment delimiters and select the command Comment In Out either from the Edit menu or the context menu that you get on right clicking the selected text The comment delimiters will be removed and the text will no longer be grayed out Note about empty lines In XML documents empty lines are discarded when you change views or save the document If you wish to retain empty lines enclose them in comment delimiters Inserting file paths The Edit Insert File Path command enables you to browse for the file in question and insert its file path at the selected location in the XML document being edited This command enables you to quickly and accurately enter a file path See the command description for more details Inserting XML fragments via XInclude The Edit Insert XInclude enables you via XInclude to insert the contents of an entire XML document or a fragment of one in the XML document being edited This command enables you to quickly and accurately enter a file path See the command description for more details 104 XML Editing XML in Text View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy
213. command is enabled in Database Table View when a column or cell is selected It sorts the column in either alphabetic or numeric ascending order XMLSpy tries to automatically determine what kind of data is used in the column and sorts on alphabetic or numeric order as required In case of uncertainty you will be prompted for the sort method to use see screenshot Descending Sort The XML Table Descending Sort command is enabled in Database Table View when a column or cell is selected It sorts the column in either alphabetic or numeric descending order XMLSpy tries to automatically determine what kind of data is used in the column and sorts on alphabetic or numeric order as required In case of uncertainty you will be prompted for the sort method to use see screenshot 266 User Reference XML Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 4 2 Check Well Formedness F7 The XML Check well formedness F7 command checks the active document for well formedness by the definitions of the XML 1 0 specification Every XML document must be well formed XMLSpy checks for well formedness whenever a document is opened or saved or when the view is changed from Text to any other view You can also check for well formedness at any time while editing by using this command If the well formedness check succeeds when you explicitly invoke the check a message is displayed in the Validation window If an error is encountered during the
214. commended that you pretty print all files particularly ump files before storing them in the repository This limits the line length thus avoiding problems with the CVSConflictEditor QSC Team Coherence Client 7 2 1 35 http www teamcoherence com The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Team Coherence Version Manager 1 Go to Team Coherence client Options Difference Viewer 2 Specify as the Default Difference Viewer application the DiffDog full file path 3 Specify as parameters LF RF Warning It is possible that the new settings will only be applied after a Windows log off Qumasoft QVCS Enterprise 2 1 18 http www qumasoft com The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Qumasoft QVCS Enterprise 1 Add the Qumasoft QVCS Enterprise installation directory to the Path environment variable 2 Use the QVCS Enterprise User Preferences 3 In Utilities enable the checkbox Use External Visual Compare Tool 4 Specify as Visual Compare Command Line lt DiffDog full path gt file1Name file2Name Qumasoft QVCS Pro 3 10 18 http www qumasoft com The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Qumasoft QVCS Pro 1 Use the QVCS 3 10 client preferences 2 In Utilities specify the DiffDog full path as the visual compare utility with parameters s s 212 Source Control SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Seapine Surr
215. contents has been copied For the markup to be pasted it must be allowed according to the schema at the location where it is pasted If text is pasted as text XML markup is not pasted To paste as XML or text first copy the text Ctrl C right click at the location where the text is to be pasted and select the context menu command Paste As XML or Paste As Text If the shortcut Ctrl V is used the text will be pasted in the default Paste Mode of the SPS The default Paste Mode will have been specified by the designer of the SPS For more details see 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 149 Authentic User Manual the section Context Menus Alternatively highlighted text can be dragged to the location where it is to be pasted When the text is dropped a pop up appears asking whether the text is to be pasted as text or XML Select the desired option Text formatting A fundamental principle of XML document systems is that content be kept separate from presentation The XML document contains the content while the stylesheet contains the presentation formatting In Authentic View the XML document is presented via the stylesheet This means that all the formatting you see in Authentic View is produced by the stylesheet If you see bold text that bold formatting has been provided by the stylesheet If you see a list or a table that list format or table format has been provided by the stylesheet The XML document wh
216. could select it otherwise you should let the application select the version automatically The Choose version automatically option is active by default In this case the application tries to select the most recent available version An external XSLT processor of your choice You must specify the command line string for the external XSLT processor The following variables are available for building the command line string 1 XML document to process 2 Output file to generate 3 XSLT stylesheet to use if the XML document does not contain a reference to a stylesheet For example the command to run a simple transformation with the Saxon XSLT 1 0 processor is saxon exe o output xml input xml stylesheet xslt parameter name parameter value To run this command from the application select the External XSL Transformation Program radio button and enter the following line in the text box c saxon saxon exe o 2 1 3 parameter name parameter value Check the respective check boxes to show the output and error messags of the external program in the Messages Window in XMLSpy 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 321 User Reference User Manual Note The parameters set in XMLSpy s XSLT Input Parameters dialog are passed to the internal Altova XSLT Engines only They are not passed to any other XSLT Engine that is set up as the default XSLT processor XSL FO transformations FO documents are processed using an FO processor an
217. crosoft SourceSafe and other compatible repositories The Source Control Systems supported by XMLSpy are listed in the section Supported Source Control Systems How to install theses systems is described in the section Installing Source Control Systems This section describes the commands in the Project Source Control submenu which are used to work with the Source Control System from within XMLSpy Overview of the Source Control feature The mechanism for placing files in a XMLSpy project under source control is as follows 1 In XMLSpy an application project folder containing the files to be placed under source control is created Typically the application project folder will correspond to a local 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 241 User Reference User Manual folder in which the project files are located The path to the local folder is referred to as the local path 2 In the source control system s database also referred to as source control or repository a folder is created that will contain the files to be placed under source control 3 Application project files are added to source control using the command Project Source Control Add to Source Control 4 Source control actions such as checking in to checking out from and removing files from source control can be carried out by using the commands in the Project Source Control submenu The commands in this submenu are listed in the sub sections of this section
218. ct nodes arg as node as node altova encode for rtf The altova encode for rtf function converts the input string into code for RTF altova encode for rtf inputstr as xs string preserveallwhitespace as xs boolean preservenewlines as xs boolean as xs string Whitespace and new lines will be preserved according to the boolean value specified for their respective parameters altova xbrl labels The altova xbrl labels function takes two input arguments a node name and the taxonomy file location containing the node The function returns the XBRL labels associated 2011 Altova GmbH Extensions 347 Engine Information Appendices with the input node altova xbrl labels name as xs QName file as xs string as node altova xbrl footnotes The altova footnotes function takes a node as its input argument and returns the set of XBRL footnote nodes referenced by the input node altova footnotes arg as node as node altova generate auto number id as xs string start with as xs integer increment as xs integer reset on change as xs string Generates a series of numbers having the specified ID The start integer and the increment is specified altova reset auto number id as xs string This function resets the auto numbering of the auto numbering series specified with the ID argument The series is reset to the start integer of the series see altova generate auto number above altova get
219. ction describes how to work with XML documents in XMLSpy It covers the following aspects How to create open and save XML documents In this section some important XMLSpy settings relating to file creation are also explained XML documents can be edited in Text View Grid View and Authentic View You can select the view that is most useful for you and switch among the views while editing Each of the views offers different advantages Entry helpers for XML documents have certain specific features and these are described How to process XML documents with XSLT and XQuery Various XMLSpy features related to processing are explained Miscellaneous other features for working with XML documents are described Altova website XML Editor 2011 Altova GmbH Creating Opening and Saving XML Documents 99 XML User Manual 4 1 Creating Opening and Saving XML Documents When creating opening or saving XML documents the following issues are involved In what view will the XML document open Text View Grid View or Authentic View When a new XML document is created whether a schema XML Schema or DTD will be automatically assigned manually assigned or not assigned If a schema is assigned to the XML document whether the document will be validated automatically on opening and or saving Default view There are application wide settings for specifying in what view XML documents new and existin
220. ctions XML markup and parsing is ignored XML markup characters the ampersand apostrophe greater than less than and quote characters are not treated as markup but as literals So CDATA sections are useful for text such as program code listings which have XML markup characters Remove node Positioning the mouse cursor over the Remove command pops up a menu list consisting of the selected node and all its removable ancestors those that would not invalidate the document up to the document element Click the element to be removed This is a quick way to delete an element or any removable ancestor Note that clicking an ancestor element will remove all its descendants including the selected element Clear The Clear command clears the element markup from around the selection If the entire node is selected then the element markup is cleared for the entire node If a text segment is selected then the element markup is cleared from around that text segment only Apply The Apply command applies a selected element to your selection in the main Window For more details see Authentic View entry helpers Copy Cut Paste These are the standard Windows commands Note however that the Paste command pastes copied text either as XML or as Text depending on what the designer of the stylesheet has 96 Editing Views Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 specified for the SPS as a whole For information about how the Copy as
221. currently selected compositor or component double click the field to be edited and edit or enter text directly If a combo box is available in the field to be edited select the desired value this value is entered in the field Changes you make via the Details Entry Helper are immediately reflected in the content model diagram Facets Entry Helper The Facets Entry Helper is available in the Schema View and enables you to enter the values of facets patterns and enumerations To change facets patterns or enumerations in the Facets Entry Helper 74 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 Select the required tab Facets Patterns or Enumerations 2 If a combo box is present select a value from the drop down menu Alternatively double click a row and edit or enter text directly Note You can use the cut copy and paste shortcuts CTRL X CTRL C CTRL V respectively to copy the patterns and enumerations of one component to another component In the Facets Entry Helper select the pattern s or enumeration s to copy cut or copy the selection then click in the Facets Entry Helper window of the target component and paste Sample values can be used when generating an XML file from the schema with the menu command DTD Schema Generate Sample XML File 3 3 5 Identity Constraints Identity constraints can be defined for a global component via two entry points In Schema Overvi
222. d received a free evaluation key code or are a registered user The evaluation version of XMLSpy is fully functional but limited to a 30 day period You can request a regular license from our secure web server or through any one of our resellers Tutorial example files The tutorial files are available in the application folder C Documents and Settings lt username gt My Documents Altova XMLSpy2011 Examples Tutorial The Examples folder contains various XML files for you to experiment with while the Tutorial folder contains all the files used in this tutorial The Template folder in the application folder typically in c Program Files Altova contains all the XML template files that are used whenever you select the menu option File New These files supply the necessary data namespaces and XML declarations for you to start working with the respective XML document immediately 2011 Altova GmbH XMLSpy Interface 19 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual 2 1 XMLSpy Interface The XMLSpy interface is structured into three vertical areas The central area provides you with multiple views of your XML document The areas on either side of this central area contain windows that provide information editing help and file management features The left area consists of the Project and Info windows The central area called the Main window is where you edit and view all types of XML documents You can switch between different views T
223. d data in the Define Entities dialog After defining an entity you can use it at multiple locations in your document This helps you save time and greatly enhances maintenance There are two broad types of entities you can use in your document a parsed entity which is XML data either a text string or a fragment of an XML document or an unparsed entity which is non XML data such as a binary file usually a graphic sound or multimedia object Each entity has a name and a value In the case of parsed entities the entity is a placeholder for the XML data The value of the entity is either the XML data itself or a URI that points to a xml file that contains the XML data In the case of unparsed entities the value of the entity is a URI that points to the non XML data file To define an entity 1 Click Authentic Define XML Entities This opens the Define Entities dialog screenshot below 2 Enter the name of your entity in the Name field This is the name that will appear in the Entities Entry Helper 3 Enter the type of entity from the drop down list in the Type field The following types are possible An Internal entity is one for which the text to be used is stored in the XML document itself Selecting PUBLIC or SYSTEM specifies that the resource is located outside the XML file and will be located with the use of a public identifier or a system identifier respectively A system identifier is a URI that gives the location of the
224. d the path to the executable of the FO processor must be specified in the text box for the XSL FO transformation engine The transformation is carried out using the XSL XQuery XSL FO Transformation menu command If the source file the active document when the command is executed in the IDE is an XSL FO document the FO processor is invoked for the transformation If the source document is an XML document an XSLT transformation is required to first convert the XML document to an XSL FO document This XSLT transformation can be carried out either by the XSLT engine you have specified as the default engine for the application see above or by the XSLT engine that might be built into the FO processor you have specified as the default FO processor for the application To select between these two options click the appropriate radio button After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog Source Control The Source Control tab screenshot below enables you to specify the source control provider and the settings and default logon ID for each source control provider Source Control Plugin The current source control plugin can be selected from among the currently installed source control systems These systems are listed in the dropdown list of the combo box After selecting the required source control specify the login ID for it in the next text box The Advanced button pops up a dialog specific to the selected source con
225. d yearMonthDuration datatypes have been moved with the CRs of 23 January 2007 from the XPath Datatypes namespace to the XML Schema namespace so xs yearMonthDuration If namespaces for functions type constructors node tests etc are wrongly assigned an error is 338 Engine Information XQuery 1 0 Engine Implementation Information 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 reported Note however that some functions have the same name as schema datatypes e g fn string and fn boolean Both xs string and xs boolean are defined The namespace prefix determines whether the function or type constructor is used XML source document and validation XML documents used in executing an XQuery document with the Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine must be well formed However they do not need to be valid according to an XML Schema If the file is not valid the invalid file is loaded without schema information If the XML file is associated with an external schema and is valid according to it then post schema validation information is generated for the XML data and will be used for query evaluation Static and dynamic type checking The static analysis phase checks aspects of the query such as syntax whether external references e g for modules exist whether invoked functions and variables are defined and so on No type checking is done in the static analysis phase If an error is detected in the static analysis phase it is reported and the execution is
226. dding external Web folders to 258 adding files to 254 adding folders to 255 adding global resources to 254 adding related files to 255 adding to source control 248 adding URL to 254 batch processing with 192 benefits of using 192 closing 240 creating new 239 how to create and edit 189 location of installed files 16 most recently used 263 naming 189 opening 240 overview 238 overview of 188 properties of 189 reloading 240 saving 189 240 using 192 Projects in XMLSpy benefits of 38 how to create 38 Provider source control 194 PUBLIC identifier catalog 267 PVCS Version Manager 194 Q QName serialization when returned by XPath 2 0 functions 341 Queries for DB display in Authentic View 158 R Redo command 231 Registering your Altova software 325 Registry settings 313 Regular expressions in search string 235 Reload 313 Reloading changed files 222 Repeated elements 315 Replace text 235 text in document 236 2011 Altova GmbH Index 379 Repositories 194 Reset menu commands 310 shortcut 306 toolbar amp menu commands 305 Resources increase background status updates 194 Return key see Enter key 167 RichEdit 3 0 317 Right to left writing systems 353 Row append in Authentic View 294 delete in Authentic View 294 duplicate in Authentic View 294 insert in Authentic View 294 move
227. dditional options Menu commands with submenus are indicated with a right pointing arrowhead to the right of the command name Some menu commands pop up a dialog that prompts you for further information required to carry out the selected command Such commands are indicated with an ellipsis after the name of the command To access a menu command click the menu name and then the command If a submenu is indicated for a menu item the submenu opens when you mouseover the menu item Click the required sub menu item A menu can be opened from the keyboard by pressing the appropriate key combination The key combination for each menu is Alt KEY where KEY is the underlined letter in the menu name For example the key combination for the File menu is Alt F A menu command that is a command in a menu can be selected by sequentially selecting i the menu with its key combination see previous point and then ii the key combination for the specific command Alt KEY where KEY is the underlined letter in the command name For example to create a new file File New press Alt F and then Alt N Some menu commands can be selected directly by pressing a special shortcut key or key combination Ctrl KEY Commands which have shortcuts associated with them are indicated with the shortcut key or key combination listed to the right of the command For example you can use the shortcut key combination Ctrl N to create a new file
228. dentifier can be directly mapped to a URL via the system element Also a URI can be mapped to another URI using the uri element The rewriteURI and rewriteSystem elements enable the rewriting of the starting part of a URI or system identifier respectively This allows the start of a filepath to be replaced and consequently enables the targeting of another directory For more information on these elements see the XML Catalogs specification File extensions and intelligent editing according to a schema Via catalog files you can also specify that documents with a particular file extension should have XMLSpy s intelligent editing features applied in conformance with the rules in a schema you specify For example if you create a custom file extension myhtml for HTML files that are to be valid according to the HTML DTD then you can enable intelligent editing for files with these extensions by adding the following element of text to CustomCatalog xml as a child of the lt catalog gt element lt spy fileExtHelper ext myhtml uri schemas xhtml xhtml1 transitional dtd gt This would enable intelligent editing auto completion entry helpers etc of myhtml files in XMLSpy according to the XHTML 1 0 Transitional DTD Refer to the catalog xml file in the AltovaCommonFolder Schemas xhtml folder which contains similar entries XML Schema and catalogs XML Schema information is built into XMLSpy and the validity of XML Schema documents is checked
229. dialog box If a folder type global resource is selected that folder will be opened in a file open dialog and you will be prompted to select a file the selected file is added to the appropriate folder based on the File Type Extensions defined in the Project Properties dialog box For a description of global resources see the Global Resources section in this documentation 12 3 9 Add URL to Project The Project Add URL to Project command adds a URL to the current project URLs in a project cause the target object of the URL to be included in the project Whenever a batch operation is performed on a URL or on a folder that contains a URL object XMLSpy retrieves 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 255 User Reference User Manual the document from the URL and performs the requested operation 12 3 10 Add Active File to Project The Project Add Active File to Project command adds the active file to the current project If you have just opened a file from your hard disk or through an URL you can add the file to the current project using this command 12 3 11 Add Active And Related Files to Project The Project Add Active and Related Files to Project command adds the currently active XML document and all related files to the project When working on an XML document that is based on a DTD or Schema this command adds not only the XML document but also all related files for example the DTD and all external parsed entities to which the
230. dicates a wildcard Note Wildcards are used as placeholders to allow elements not specified in the schema or from other namespaces other elements can belong to any namespace other than the target namespace defined in the schema any elements can belong to any namespace targetNamespace elements must belong to the target namespace defined in the schema local elements cannot belong to any namespace anyURI elements belong to the namespace you specify Attributes 64 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Details Indicated with the word attributes in italics in a rectangle that can be expanded Each attribute is shown in a rectangle with a i dashed border if the attribute is options or ii a solid border if the attribute is required mandatory Note Attributes can be edited in the Details Entry Helper Attributes can be displayed in the Content Model View diagram or in a pane below the Content Model View You can toggle between these two views by clicking the Display Attributes icon When attributes are displayed in the Content Model View diagram all attributes of a single element are displayed in a rectangle with a dashed border To change the order of attributes of an element drag the attribute outside the containing box and drop when the arrow appears at the required location Identity constraints Details Indicated with the word constraints in italics in a rectangle that
231. ding is applied to the document when the file is saved The Save As command pops up the familiar Windows Save As dialog box in which you enter the name and location of the file you wish to save the active file as The same checks and validations occur as for the Save command The Save All command saves all modifications that have been made to any open documents The command is useful if you edit multiple documents simultaneously If a document has not been saved before for example after being newly created the Save As dialog box is presented for that document Selecting files via URLs and Global Resources In several File Open and File Save dialogs you can choose to select the required file or save a file via a URL or a global resource see screenshot below Select the Switch to URL or Switch to Global Resource to go to one of these selection processes 224 User Reference File Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Selecting files via URLs To select a file via a URL do the following 1 Click the Switch to URL command This switches to the URL mode of the Open dialog screenshot below 2011 Altova GmbH File Menu 225 User Reference User Manual 2 Enter the URL you want to access in the Server URL field screenshot above If the server is a Microsoft SharePoint Server check the Microsoft SharePoint Server check box See the Microsoft SharePoint Server Notes below for further information about work
232. diting 315 Internet 326 327 Internet usage in Altova products 354 J JSON 170 K Key map 325 Keyboard shortcut 306 Key codes for your Altova software 325 L Large markup in Authentic View 294 last function in XPath 1 0 332 last function in XPath 2 0 see fn last 340 Legal information 355 library modules in XQuery document 337 License 359 information about 355 License metering in Altova products 357 Licenses for your Altova software 325 Line go to 298 2011 Altova GmbH Index 377 Line length word wrap in text view 298 Line margin 299 Line numbering in Text View 44 Line breaks 313 Links following in Authentic View 146 Little endian 319 M Main window 10 19 MainCatalog 267 MapForce 272 Markup in Authentic View 86 88 Markup in Authentic View hide 294 show small large mixed 294 Maximum cell width 316 Memory storage of schema information 274 Memory requirements 349 Menu add delete command 304 Authentic 289 customize 310 Default XMLSPY 310 delete commands from 310 DTD Schema 271 Edit 231 Help 324 Project 238 Schema Design 275 Tools 303 View 296 Window 322 XML 264 XSL XQuery 281 Menu Bar 15 Menu Browser 301 Messages Window 14 Microsoft SharePoint Server 258 MIME 314 Mixed markup in Authentic View 294 Mostly recently used files list of 230 Mov
233. diting XML in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 4 5 Editing XML in Authentic View Authentic View enables a user to edit an XML document as if it were a text document screenshot below The XML markup and all other non content text can be hidden from the person editing the document This can be useful for people who are unfamiliar with XML enabling them to a valid XML document even while concentrating entirely on the content of the document The Authentic View of a document is enabled when a StyleVision Power Stylesheet SPS is assigned to an XML document An SPS is based on the same schema source as that on which the XML document is based and it defines the structure of the XML document The SPS also defines the layout and formatting of the document in Authentic View For example in the document shown in the screenshot above the following Authentic formatting and editing features are used Paragraph and other block formatting Table structures Text formatting such as color and font face Combo boxes see the State and Zip fields enable the user to select from a group of valid choices which can be taken from schema enumerations as has been done in the case above Additional information can be calculated from the data in the document and be presented in the example above the office summary details have not been entered by the user but calculated from other data in the document SPSs are
234. document The element scheme of XPointer returns results in the form element 1 3 which selects the third child of the document element or root element You should note the following points Attributes cannot be represented using the element scheme If an attribute is selected the following happens In Grid View the Copy XPointer command is disabled in Text View the XPointer of the element parent of that attribute is generated Multiple elements cannot be selected If selected in Grid View the Copy XPointer command is disabled In Text View the XPointer of the parent element of the selection is generated Note In Grid View the Copy XPointer command can also be accessed via the context menu 2011 Altova GmbH Edit Menu 235 User Reference User Manual 12 2 6 Pretty Print XML Text The Pretty Print XML Text command reformats your XML document in Text View Two formatting options are available depending upon whether the Use Indentation check box in the View tab of the Options dialog Tools Options is checked or not Use Indentation checked The document is reformatted to give a structured display indenting each deeper level in the hierarchy by an additional amount of the specified indentation space This enables a clearer view of the document structure Use Indentation unchecked The document is reformatted so that each new line is left aligned To set up a structured indented view of the XM
235. documentation of future releases for information about support for Altova extension functions in that release General functions altova evaluate altova distinct nodes altova encode for rtf altova xbrl labels altova xbrl footnotes altova generate auto number altova reset auto number altova get temp folder General Functions The following extension functions are supported in the current version of your Altova product in the manner described below However note that in future versions of your product support for one or more of these functions might be discontinued or the behavior of individual functions might change Consult the documentation of future releases for information about support for Altova extension functions in that release altova evaluate altova distinct nodes altova encode for rtf altova xbrl labels altova xbrl footnotes altova generate auto number altova reset auto number altova get temp folder altova evaluate The altova evaluate function takes an XPath expression passed as a string as its mandatory argument It returns the output of the evaluated expression altova evaluate XPathExp as xs string 2011 Altova GmbH Extensions 345 Engine Information Appendices For example altova evaluate Name 1 In the example above note that the expression Name 1 is passed
236. e ii If you have licensed SchemaAgent then the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement apply to your use of the SchemaAgent server software SchemaAgent Server included therein as applicable and you are licensed to use SchemaAgent Server solely in connection with your use of Altova Software and solely for the purposes described in the accompanying documentation iii If you have licensed Software that enables users to generate source code your license to install and use a copy of the Software as provided herein permits you to generate source code based on i Altova Library modules that are included in the Software such 360 License Information Altova End User License Agreement 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 generated code hereinafter referred to as the Restricted Source Code and ii schemas or mappings that you create or provide such code as may be generated from your schema or mapping source materials hereinafter referred to as the Unrestricted Source Code In addition to the rights granted herein Altova grants you a non exclusive non transferable limited license to compile the complete generated code comprised of the combination of the Restricted Source Code and the Unrestricted Source Code into executable object code form and to use copy distribute or license that executable You may not distribute or redistribute sublicense sell or transfer the Restricted Source Code to a t
237. e protocol Additionally supported encodings are x binarytobase16 and x binarytobase64 unparsed text available The href attribute accepts i relative paths for files in the base uri folder and ii absolute paths with or without the file protocol Additionally supported encodings are x binarytobase16 and x binarytobase64 Note The following encoding values which were implemented in earlier versions of AltovaXML are now deprecated base16tobinary base64tobinary binarytobase16 and binarytobase64 2011 Altova GmbH XQuery 1 0 Engine Implementation Information 337 Engine Information Appendices 1 3 XQuery 1 0 Engine Implementation Information The Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine is built into Altova s XMLSpy and MapForce XML products It is also available in the free AltovaXML package This section provides information about implementation defined aspects of behavior Standards conformance The Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine conforms to the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XQuery 1 0 Recommendation of 23 January 2007 The XQuery standard gives implementations discretion about how to implement many features Given below is a list explaining how the Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine implements these features Schema awareness The Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine is schema aware Encoding The UTF 8 and UTF 16 character encodings are supported Namespaces The following namespace URIs and their associated bindings are pre defined Namespace
238. e Text Editing Application User Name When the installation is finished do not forget to create a new workspace or to select an existing one PureCM Client 2008 3a http www purecm com A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products After the installation start the PureCM client to register a server PushOK CVS SCC NT 2 1 2 5 http www pushok com soft_cvs php A standard installation is sufficient for using PushOK CVS SCC NT After installation is complete make sure your copy of the CVS proxy plug in is correctly registered After defining a workspace you can start to work PushOK CVS SCC x64 version 2 2 0 4 http www pushok com soft_cvs php A standard installation is sufficient for using PushOK CVS SCC After installation is complete make sure your copy of the CVS proxy plug in is correctly registered After defining a workspace you can start to work PushOK SVN SCC 1 5 1 1 http www pushok com soft_svn php A standard installation of PushOK SVN SCC is sufficient for use with Altova products When installing under Vista it is possible that the COM library svncom dll cannot be registered In this case finish the installation and then register the library manually by following these steps 1 Start a command window using the option Run as administrator 2 Enter cd C Program Files PushOK Software SVNSCC svn 2011 Altova GmbH Installing Source Control Systems
239. e As and save the file as CompanyLast xml Remember to rename the original CompanyLast xml file that is delivered with XMLSpy to something else like CompanyLast_orig xml Please note The CompanyLast xml file delivered with XMLSpy is in the in the Tutorial folder 34 XMLSpy Tutorial XSLT Transformations 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 4 XSLT Transformations Objective To generate an HTML file from the XML file using an XSL stylesheet to transform the XML file You should note that a transformation does not change the XML file into anything else instead a new output file is generated The word transformation is a convention Method The method used to carry out the transformation is as follows Assign a predefined XSL file Company xsl to the XML document Execute the transformation within the XMLSpy interface using one of the two built in Altova XSLT engines See note below Commands used in this section The following XMLSpy commands are used in this section XSL XQuery Assign XSL which assigns an XSL file to the active XML document XSL XQuery Go to XSL opens the XSL file referenced by the active XML document XSL XQuery XSL Transformation F10 or the toolbar icon transforms the active XML document using the XSL stylesheet assigned to the XML file If an XSL file has not been assigned then you will be prompted for one when you select this command Please note XMLSpy has two built in
240. e Information 356 Electronic Software Distribution 3 1 Altova XMLSpy 2011 9 357 Software Activation and License Metering 3 2 358 Intellectual Property Rights 3 3 359 Altova End User License Agreement 3 4 Index 371 Welcome to XMLSpy Altova XMLSpy 2011 2011 Altova GmbH 3 Welcome to XMLSpy Welcome to XMLSpy Altova XMLSpy 2011 Standard Edition is an entry level XML editor for viewing validating and editing XML documents It is the perfect tool for users who need to view XML DTD XML Schema XSLT and XQuery files and perform light weight editing tasks This documentation is organized into the following sections User Manual Appendices It is available in the following formats As the built in Help system of XMLSpy Help menu or F1 In HTML and PDF formats and for purchase as a book these formats being available via the Altova website Last updated 07 0
241. e Keep checked out check box Then click OK The lock symbol now appears next to each of the files placed under source control If the files are checked out they will be shown with a red check symbol Source control symbols Folders and files display certain symbols the meanings of which are given below Checked in Available for check out Checked out by another user Not available for check out Checked out locally Can be edited and checked in 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 249 User Reference User Manual Remove from Source Control The Remove from Source Control command removes previously added files from the source control database These files will be visible in the Project window but cannot be checked in or out Use the Add to Source Control command to place them back under source control To remove files from the source control provider do the following 1 In the Project window select the files you wish to remove 2 Select Project Source Control Remove from Source Control 3 In the Remove from Source Control dialog that pops up select the files to remove then click OK The following items can be removed from source control i single files in the Project window click the required file to select it use Ctrl Click to select multiple files use Ctrl Click ii folders in the Project window click the required folder to select it use Ctrl Click to select multiple folders Share from Source Contro
242. e License Agreement Altova s obligations under this Section 6 are contingent upon your proper use of the Software and your compliance with the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement at all times Altova shall be under no obligation to provide the above technical support if in Altova s opinion the Software has failed due to the following conditions i damage caused by the relocation of the software to another location or CPU ii alterations modifications or attempts to change the Software without Altova s written approval iii causes external to the Software such as natural disasters the failure or 2011 Altova GmbH Altova End User License Agreement 367 License Information Appendices fluctuation of electrical power or computer equipment failure iv your failure to maintain the Software at Altova s specified release level or v use of the Software with other software without Altova s prior written approval It will be your sole responsibility to i comply with all Altova specified operating and troubleshooting procedures and then notify Altova immediately of Software malfunction and provide Altova with complete information thereof ii provide for the security of your confidential information iii establish and maintain backup systems and procedures necessary to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs 7 SOFTWARE ACTIVATION UPDATES AND LICENSE METERING a License Metering Altova
243. e Unicode Consortium It provides a unique number for every character no matter what the platform no matter what the program no matter what the language Fundamentally computers just deal with numbers They store letters and other characters by assigning a number for each one Before Unicode was invented there were hundreds of different encoding systems for assigning these numbers No single encoding could contain enough characters for example the European Union alone requires several different encodings to cover all its languages Even for a single language like English no single encoding was adequate for all the letters punctuation and technical symbols in common use These encoding systems used to conflict with one another That is two encodings used the same number for two different characters or different numbers for the same character Any given computer especially servers needs to support many different encodings yet whenever data is passed between different encodings or platforms that data always runs the risk of corruption Unicode is changing all that Unicode provides a unique number for every character no matter what the platform no matter what the program and no matter what the language The Unicode Standard has been adopted by such industry leaders as Apple HP IBM JustSystems Microsoft Oracle SAP Sun Base and many others Unicode is required by modern standards such as XML Java ECMAScript J
244. e control provider that you are using Click the Unbind button first then click the Select button to select the new source control provider 254 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 After you have selected the source control provider you will need to create a binding between the local folder and the folder on the source control server The local folder is that entered in the Local Path text box To select a folder on the source control server click the Bind button This enables you to log on to the server and then navigate to the required folder on the source control server Click OK when done 12 3 7 Add Files to Project The Project Add Files to Project command adds files to the current project Use this command to add files to any folder in your project You can either select a single file or any group of files using Ctrl click in the Open dialog box If you are adding files to the project they will be distributed among the respective folders based on the File Type Extensions defined in the Project Properties dialog box 12 3 8 Add Global Resource to Project The Project Add Global Resource to Project command pops up the Choose Global Resource dialog in which you can select a global resource of file or folder type to add to the project If a file type global resource is selected then the file is added to the appropriate folder based on the File Type Extensions defined in the Project Properties
245. e designed by the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet to which your XML document is linked You yourself cannot insert an SPS table into the XML document but you can enter data into SPS table fields and add and delete the rows of dynamic SPS tables The section on SPS tables below explains the features of these tables CALS HTML tables are inserted by you the user of Authentic View Their purpose is to enable you to insert tables at any allowed location in the document hierarchy should you wish to do so The editing features of CALS HTML Tables and the CALS HTML Table editing icons are described below SPS Tables Two types of SPS tables are used in Authentic View static tables and dynamic tables Static tables are fixed in their structure and in the content type of cells You as the user of Authentic View can enter data into the table cells but you cannot change the structure of these tables i e add rows or columns etc or change the content type of a cell You enter data either by typing in text or by selecting from options presented in the form of check box or radio button alternatives or as a list in a combo box After you enter data you can edit it 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 151 Authentic User Manual Please note The icons or commands for editing dynamic tables must not be used to edit static tables Dynamic tables have rows that represent a repeating data structure i e each row has an iden
246. e for this element has been changed to 2 Notice that the model group now has a blue background which means that it is no longer the same as the model group in the base complex type Also the permitted occurrence range of the model group in the base particle is now displayed in parentheses It is possible to change the data types of attributes or elements if the new data type is a valid restriction of the base data type as defined in the XML schema specification For example you can change the data type of elem3 in the derived data type from decimal to integer After you do this the element has a blue background to show that is different from the element in the base type and the type that the element has in the base type is displayed in parentheses This example shows attributes whose data types have been restricted in the derived complex type 82 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Smart Restrictions alert you to pointless occurrences in the content model A pointless occurrence happens for example when a sequence that is present in the content model is unnecessary This example shows a pointless occurrence Please note Pointless occurrences are only shown if the content model contains an error It is possible for a content model to contain a pointless occurrence and be valid in which case the pointless occurrence is not explicitly shown in order to avoid confusion See the XML schema spec
247. e global component in the global components list 2 In the Attributes Identity Constraints pane select the Attributes tab 3 Click the Append or Insert icon at the top left of the Attribute tab 4 From the popup that appears select the attribute type you want to append or insert An entry is created in the Attribute list 5 In the newly created entry enter the attribute s properties Please note You can also define attributes for global components in Content Model View Select the global component and then define attributes as described above Defining identity constraints for a component To define identity constraints for a component you use the Attributes Identity Constraints pane which is at the bottom of the Schema Overview window See Identity Constraints for a description of how to work with identity constraints 58 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Sorting global components attributes and identity constraints Global components can be sorted alphabetically in ascending order by local name and kind Do this as follows 1 If you wish to sort a selection of global components then select the global components you wish to sort by clicking them with the Ctrl key pressed You can also select a range by pressing the Shift key and clicking the first and last components of the range The global components you select will be highlighted If you wish to sort all the global components you
248. e in the submenu Project Source Control and are described in the User Reference section Resource Speed issues Very large source control databases might be introducing a speed resource penalty when automatically performing background status updates You might be able to speed up your system by disabling or increasing the interval of the Perform background status updates every xxx seconds field in the Source Control tab accessed through Tools Options 196 Source Control Supported Source Control Systems 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 11 1 Supported Source Control Systems The list below shows the Source Control Servers SCSs supported by XMLSpy together with their respective Source Control Client s SCCs The list is organized alphabetically by SCS Please read the notes following the list for information about support levels AccuRev Version AccuRev 4 7 0 Windows Clients AccuBridge for Microsoft SCC 2008 2 Bazaar Version Bazaar 1 9 Windows Clients Aigenta Unified SCC 1 0 6 Borland StarTeam 2008 Version StarTeam 2008 Release 2 Clients Borland StarTeam Cross Platform Client 2008 R2 Codice Software Plastic SCM Version Codice Software Plastic SCM Professional 2 7 127 10 Server Clients Codice Software Plastic SCM Professional 2 7 127 10 SCC Plugin Collabnet Subversion 1 5 Version 1 5 4 Clients Aigenta Unified SCC 1 0 6 PushOK SVN SCC 1 5 1 1
249. e previously viewed component as previously displayed Clicking the Undo command once undoes the last editing change regardless of when that editing change was made Additional notes Note the following points The Back button enables you to re view the previous 500 positions The Back Forward feature is enabled across schemas If a schema has since been closed or is currently open in another view it will be opened in Schema View or switched to Schema View respectively If a component that was viewed in a previous position is deleted then that component will not be able to be viewed If such a component was part of a previous position this position will be displayed without the deleted component If the component comprised the entire position the entire position will be unavailable and clicking the Back button at this point in the Back series will take you to the position previous to the unavailable position 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View 85 Editing Views User Manual 3 4 Authentic View Authentic View is enabled by clicking the Authentic tab of the active document If no SPS has been assigned to the XML document you are prompted to assign one You can assign an SPS at any time via the Authentic Assign a Stylevision Stylesheet command This section provides An overview of the interface A description of the toolbar icons specific to Authentic View A description of viewing modes available in t
250. e the Edit Next Bookmark and Edit Previous Bookmark commands These bookmark commands are also available as icons in the Text toolbar screenshot above 46 Editing Views Text View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Source folding Source folding refers to the ability to expand and collapse nodes screenshot below and is displayed in the source folding margin The margin can be toggled on and off in the Text View Settings dialog see screenshot above In the screenshot below notice how the line numbering at Lines 14 and 24 has been collapsed together with the collapsed nodes The Toggle All Folds command in the Text toolbar toggles all nodes to their expanded forms or collapses all nodes to the top level document element After a node has been expanded the following options are available when clicking on the node s toggle icon icon Plain click Collapses the node Clicking on it again expands the node so that descendant nodes are shown expanded or collapsed according to how they were before the node was collapsed Shift Click Collapses all descendant nodes up to the level of the children nodes The clicked node itself is open and shows the collapsed children nodes This will work for all collapsible nodes in a branch of the hierarchy except the last collapsible node in that branch Ctrl Click If a node or any of its descendants is collapsed Ctrl Click expands all collapsed descendant nodes In short this m
251. e up down row Authentic View 295 MS Visual Source Safe 194 MSXML 319 Multi user 313 N namespaces in XQuery document 337 in XSLT 2 0 stylesheet 334 settings in Schema Design View 275 Navigation history 84 New file creating 215 New XML document creating 22 Non XML files 314 O OASIS XML catalog 267 Open file 218 Opening options file 313 Optimal Widths 298 316 Ordering Altova software 325 OS for Altova products 349 Output formatting 313 Output windows toggling display on and off 322 Overview 19 P Parameters in DB queries 158 passing to stylesheet via interface 283 Parser Index 2011 Altova GmbH 378 Parser built into Altova products 350 XSLT 319 Paste as Text 146 as XML 146 Paste As Text 94 XML 94 Paste command 231 PDF transforming to in XMLSpy 123 Platforms for Altova products 349 Position Character 298 Line 298 position function in XPath 1 0 332 position function in XPath 2 0 see fn position 340 Presentation 316 Pretty print in Text View 235 Print setup 229 Printing from Authentic View 144 Printing options 229 Program settings 313 Project properties 261 window 19 Project management in XMLSpy 38 Project menu 238 Project Window 11 322 323 toggling display on and off 323 Projects adding active files to 255 adding external folders to 255 a
252. eSafe 2005 with CTP Microsoft Visual Studio Team System 2008 Team Foundation Server Version 2008 Clients Microsoft Team Foundation Server 2008 MSSCCI Provider Perforce 2008 Version P4S 2008 1 Clients Perforce P4V 2008 1 PureCM Version PureCM Server 2008 3a Clients PureCM Client 2008 3a QSC Team Coherence Version Manager Version QSC Team Coherence Server 7 2 1 35 Clients QSC Team Coherence Client 7 2 1 35 Qumasoft QVCS Enterprise Version QVCS Enterprise 2 1 18 Clients Qumasoft QVCS Enterprise 2 1 18 Qumasoft QVCS Pro Version 3 10 18 Clients Qumasoft QVCS Pro 3 10 18 Reliable Software Code Co Op Version Code Co Op 5 1a Clients Reliable Software Code Co Op 5 1a 2011 Altova GmbH Supported Source Control Systems 199 Source Control User Manual Seapine Surround SCM Version Surround SCM Client Server for Windows 2009 0 0 Clients Seapine Surround SCM Client 2009 0 0 Serena Dimensions Version Dimensions Express CM 10 1 3 for Win32 Server Clients Serena Dimensions 10 1 3 for Win32 Client Softimage Alienbrain Version Alienbrain Server 8 1 0 7300 Clients Softimage Alienbrain Essentials Advanced Client 8 1 0 7300 SourceGear Fortress Version 1 1 4 Server Clients SourceGear Fortress 1 1 4 Client SourceGear SourceOffsite Version SourceOffsite Server 4 2 0 Clients SourceGear Sour
253. eans that all descendant nodes of the control clicked node are expanded Indentation guides Indentation guides are vertical dotted lines that indicate the extent of a line s indentation see screenshot above They can be toggled on and off in the Text View Settings dialog End of line markers whitespace markers End of line EOL markers and whitespace markers can be toggled on in the Text View Settings dialog The screenshot below shows these markers in the document display each dot represents a whitespace 2011 Altova GmbH Text View 47 Editing Views User Manual Zooming in and out You can zoom in and out of Text View by scrolling with the scroll wheel of the mouse while keeping the Ctrl key pressed This enables you to magnify and reduce the size of text in Text View If you wish to increase the size of fonts do this in the Options dialog Go to line character This command in the View menu and Text toolbar enables you to go to a specific line and character in the document text 3 1 3 Editing in Text View The following text editing features are available in Text View generally for all document types These features are in addition to common features of editing applications such as Cut Copy Paste Delete and Select All which are available as commands in the Edit menu Syntax coloring Start tag and end tag matching Intelligent editing Auto completion Moving siblings relative to each other
254. eck out by activating the individual check boxes in the Files list box The Checkout local version option checks out only the local versions of files not those from the source control database The following items can be checked out i single files in the Project window click the required file to select it use Ctrl Click to select multiple files use Ctrl Click ii folders in the Project window click the required folder to select it use Ctrl Click to select multiple folders Checked out files and folders are indicated with a red check mark Advanced Allows you to define the Replace writable and Set timestamp options in the respective combo boxes The Make writable check box removes the read only attribute of the retrieved files 246 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Source control symbols Folders and files display certain symbols the meanings of which are given below Checked in Available for check out Checked out by another user Not available for check out Checked out locally Can be edited and checked in Check In The Check In command checks in previously checked out files that is your locally updated files and places them in the source control database To check in files do the following 1 Select the files in the Model Tree 2 Select Project Source Control Check In 3 In the Check In dialog that pops up select the files to check in then click
255. ed The plus sign indicates complex content i e at least one element or attribute child Element name is xs field Note A global element can be referenced from within simple and complex type definitions thus enabling you to re use a global declaration at multiple locations in your schema You can create a reference to a global element in two ways i by entering a name for the local element that is the same as that of the global element and ii by right clicking the local element and selecting the option Reference from the context menu You can view the definition of a global element by holding down Ctrl and double clicking the element Alternatively right click and select Go to Definition If you create a reference to an element that does not exist the element name appears in red as a warning that there is no definition to refer to Complex type Details The irregular hexagon with a plus sign indicates a complex type The complex type shown here has the name keybase This symbol indicates a global complex type A global complex type is declared in the Schema Overview and its content model is typically defined in Content Model View A global complex type can be used either as i the data type of an element or ii the base type of another complex type by assigning it to the element or complex type respectively in the Details entry helper in either Content Model View or in Schema Overview 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 63
256. ed only in Text View No other views of XQuery files are available Altova XQuery Engine For details about how the Altova XQuery Engine is implemented and will process XQuery files see XQuery Engine Implementation AltovaXML for command line and batch processing The XMLSpy GUI enables batch processing via the projects functionality However if you are 126 XSLT and XQuery XQuery 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 looking for more flexibility you should try Altova s free AltovaXML product which contains the Altova XQuery Engine that is built into XMLSpy AltovaXML is ideal if you wish to perform XQuery executions from the command line or batch processing 6 2 1 XQuery Documents An XQuery document is opened automatically in XQuery Mode of Text View if it is XQuery conformant Files that have the file extension xq xql and xquery are pre defined in XMLSpy as being XQuery conformant Setting additional file extensions to be XQuery conformant To set additional file extensions to be XQuery conformant 1 Select Tools Options The Options dialog appears see screenshot 2 Select the File types tab 3 Click Add new file extension to add the new file extension to the list of file types 4 Under Conformance select XQuery conformant You should also make the following Windows Explorer settings in this dialog Description XML Query Language Content type text xml If you wish to use XMLSpy as the defau
257. ed when working with XML documents Among the most frequently used XML tasks are checks for the well formedness of documents and validity of XML documents Commands for these tasks are in this menu 12 4 1 Table The XML Table command though enabled in all views can be used only in Grid View It displays a submenu with all the commands relevant to the Database Table View of Grid View Display as Table F12 The XML Table Display as Table command allows you to switch between the standard Grid View and Database Table View or Table View of a document element The Table View enables you to view repeated elements as a table in which the rows represent the occurrences while the columns represent child nodes including comments CDATA sections and PIs To switch to Table View 1 Select any one occurrence of the repeating element you wish to view as a table 2 Click XML Table Display as Table or F12 or the toolbar icon 2011 Altova GmbH XML Menu 265 User Reference User Manual The element is displayed as a table and the toolbar icon is activated To switch from the Table View of a document element to the normal Grid View of that element select the table or any of its rows or columns and click the toolbar icon That table element switches to Grid View Note Table View colors can be set in the Colors tab of the Options dialog Tools Options Colors Ascending Sort The XML Table Ascending Sort
258. egotiations Altova shall pay actual damages costs and attorney fees awarded against you or payable by you pursuant to a settlement agreement in connection with a Claim to the extent such direct damages and costs are not reimbursed to you by insurance or a third party to an aggregate maximum equal to the purchase price of the Software If the Software or its use becomes the subject of a Claim or its use is enjoined or if in the opinion of Altova s legal counsel the Software is likely to become the subject of a Claim Altova shall attempt to resolve the Claim by using commercially reasonable efforts to modify the Software or obtain a license to continue using the Software If in the opinion of Altova s legal counsel the Claim the injunction or potential Claim cannot be resolved through reasonable modification or licensing Altova at its own election may terminate this Software License Agreement without penalty and will refund to you on a pro rata basis any fees paid in advance by you to Altova THE FOREGOING CONSTITUTES ALTOVA S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY FOR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT This indemnity does not apply to infringements that would not be such except for customer supplied elements 6 SUPPORT AND MAINTENANCE Altova offers multiple optional Support amp Maintenance Package s SMP for the version of Software product edition that you have licensed which you may elect to purchase in addition to your Softwa
259. elected when you place the cursor within a function name or immediately before or after a function name The cursor must not be placed between the parentheses that follow the function s name Double clicking a function name in the pop up menu replaces the selected function name with the function from the pop up menu To display a tip containing the signature of a function screenshot below place the cursor immediately after the opening parenthesis and press Ctrl Space Please note The signature can be displayed only for standard XQuery functions The downward pointing arrowhead indicates that there is more than one function with the same name but with different arguments or return types Click on the signature to display the signature of the next function if available click repeatedly to cycle through all the functions with that name Alternatively you can use the Ctrl Shift Up or Ctrl Shift Down key combinations to move through a sequence 6 2 5 XQuery Validation and Execution Validating XQuery documents To validate an XQuery document 1 Make the XQuery document the active document 2 Select XML Validate or press the F8 key or click the toolbar icon The document will be validated for correct XQuery syntax Executing XQuery documents XQuery documents are executed within XMLSpy using the built in XQuery 1 0 engine The output is displayed in a window in XMLSpy Typically an XQuery document is not associated with any
260. element content and are delimited by lt CDATA and gt at the start and end respectively Consequently the text string gt should not occur within a CDATA section as it would prematurely signify the end of the section In this case the greater than character should be escaped by its entity reference amp gt To insert a CDATA section within an element place the cursor at the desired location right click and select Insert CDATA Section from the context menu To see the CDATA section tags in Authentic View switch on the markup display Alternatively you could highlight the text that is to be enclosed in a CDATA section and then select the Insert CDATA section command Editing and following links A hyperlink consists of two parts the link text and the target of the link You can edit the link text by clicking in the text and editing But you cannot edit the target of the link The target of the link is set by the designer of the stylesheet either by typing in a static target address or by deriving the target address from data contained in the XML document From Authentic View you can go to the target of the link by pressing Ctrl and clicking the link text Remember merely clicking the link will set you up for editing the link text 7 2 2 Tables in Authentic View The three table types fall into two categories SPS tables static and dynamic and CALS HTML Tables SPS tables are of two types static and dynamic SPS tables ar
261. elow 2011 Altova GmbH Using Global Resources 185 Altova Global Resources User Manual Selecting a file type global resource assigns the file Selecting a folder type global resource causes an Open dialog to open in which you can brows for the required file The path to the selected file is entered relative to the folder resource So if a folder type global resource were to have two configurations each pointing to different folders files having the same name but in different folders could be targeted via the two configurations This could be useful for testing purposes In the Open Global Resource dialog you can switch to the file dialog or the URL dialog by clicking the respective button at the bottom of the dialog The Manage Global Resources icon in the top right hand corner pops up the Manage Global Resources dialog Usage scenarios File type and folder type global resources can be used in the following scenarios Opening global resources Saving as global resource Assigning files for XSLT transformations XSLT transformation and XQuery executions Assigning an SPS Opening global resources A global resource can be opened in XMLSpy with the File Open Switch to Global Resource command and can be edited In the case of a file type global resource the file is opened directly In the case of a folder type global resource an Open dialog pops up with the associated folder selected You can then browse
262. ema Design Display All Globals command switches from Content Model View to Schema Overview to display all global components in the schema It is a toggle with the Display Diagram command The currently selected toggle is indicated with a check mark to its left see screenshot Alternatively you could use the Display All Globals icon at the top of the Content Model View to switch to the Schema Overview 12 6 5 Display Diagram The Schema Design Display Diagram command switches to the Content Model View of the selected global component if the selected component has a content model Global components that have a content model complex types elements and element groups are indicated with the icon to its left The Display Diagram command is a toggle with the Display All Globals command The currently selected toggle is indicated with a check mark to its left screenshot below Alternatively you could use the following methods to switch to Content Model View Click the icon next to the component the content model of which you want to display Double click a component name in the Component Navigator Entry Helper at top right 2011 Altova GmbH XSL XQuery Menu 281 User Reference User Manual 12 7 XSL XQuery Menu The XSL Transformation language lets you specify how an XML document should be converted into other XML documents or text files One kind of XML document that is generated with an XSLT document is an
263. ended to get you started and has intentionally been kept simple You will find additional reference material and feature descriptions in the Authentic View interface section 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View Tutorial 135 Authentic User Manual Tutorial requirements All the files you need for the tutorial are in the C Documents and Settings lt username gt My Documents Altova lt ProductName gt Examples folder of your Altova application folder These files are NanonullOrg xml the XML document you will open NanonullOrg sps the StyleVision Power Stylesheet to which the XML document is linked NanonullOrg xsd the XML Schema on which the XML document and StyleVision Power Stylesheet are based and to which they are linked nanonull gif and Altova_right_300 gif two image files used in the tutorial Please note At some points in the tutorial we ask you to look at the XML text of the XML document as opposed to the Authentic View of the document If the Altova product edition you are using does not include a Text View as with Authentic Desktop and Authentic Browser then use a plain text editor like Wordpad or Notepad to view the text of the XML document Caution We recommend that you use a copy of NanonullOrg xml for the tutorial so that you can always retrieve the original should the need arise 7 1 1 Opening an XML Document in Authentic View In Authentic View you can edit an existing XML document or c
264. ent via XMLSpy For more information see the description of the XSLT Parameters XQuery Variable command Altova XQuery Engine For details about how the Altova XQuery Engine is implemented and will process XQuery files see XQuery Engine Implementation 132 Authentic 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 7 Authentic Authentic View screenshot below is a graphical representation of your XML document It enables XML documents to be displayed without markup and with appropriate formatting and data entry features such as input fields combo boxes and radio buttons Data that the user enters in Authentic View is entered into the XML file To be able to view and edit an XML document in Authentic View the XML document must be associated with a StyleVision Power Stylesheet SPS which is created in Altova s StyleVision product An SPS sps file is in essence an XSLT stylesheet It specifies an output presentation for an XML file that can include data entry mechanisms Authentic View users can therefore write data back to the XML file or DB An SPS is based on a schema and is specific to it If you wish to use an SPS to edit an XML file in Authentic View you must use one that is based on the same schema as that on which the XML file is based Using Authentic View If an XML file is open you can switch to Authentic View by clicking the Authentic button at the bottom of the Main Window If an SPS is not already assigned to the XML
265. enu and adding QVCS as a Version Control Tool Create a project and set a workspace Reliable Software Code Co Op 5 1a http www relisoft com co_op index htm A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products Seapine Surround SCM Client 2009 0 0 http www seapine com surroundscm html A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products After installation a server connection must be established Serena Dimensions 10 1 3 for Win32 Client http www serena com Products dimensions Supported Versions Dimensions Express CM 10 1 3 for Win32 Client Perform a Typical installation of the Serena Dimension client Specify the WEB client hostname and port number as requested Sergey Antonov HgSCC 1 0 1 for Mercurial SCS http www newsupaplex pp ru hgscc_news_eng html A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products Softimage Alienbrain Essentials Advanced Client 8 1 0 7300 http www alienbrain com Perform a typical installation of the Alienbrain Client Software then install the Alienbrain Microsoft Visual Studio Integration To work with Altova products you do not need to install Microsoft Visual Studio The first time you try to open a project from VCS or to add a project to VCS you will be asked to enter some user settings e g to specify your server and choose the project database you want to connect to SourceGear Fortress 1 1 4 Client http ww
266. er To reset either of the menu bars 1 Select either the Default or XMLSpy entry in the Show Menus for combo box 2 Click the Reset button just below the menu name A prompt appears asking if you are sure you want to reset the menu bar To customize any of the Context menus right click menus 1 Select the context menu from the Select context menu combo box The context menu you selected appears 2 Click the Commands tab and drag the commands to the context menu To delete commands from a context menu 1 Click right on the command or icon representing the command 2 Select the Delete option from the popup menu or 1 Select Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog box 2 Drag the command away from the context menu and drop it as soon as the check mark icon appears below the mouse pointer To reset any of the context menus 1 Select the context menu from the combo box and 2 Click the Reset button just below the context menu name A prompt appears asking if you are sure you want to reset the context menu To close a context menu window Click on the Close icon at the top right of the title bar 312 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 or Click the Close button of the Customize dialog box Menu shadows Click the Menu shadows check box if you want all your menus to have shadows Options The Options tab allows you to set general environment settings
267. er The following points should be noted Text View When the cursor is placed inside the start tag of an element and after a space the attributes declared for that element become visible Unused attributes are displayed in red used attributes in gray Mandatory attributes are indicated with an exclamation mark before the name of the attribute To insert an attribute double click the required attribute The attribute is inserted at the cursor point together with an equals to sign and quotes to delimit the attribute value The cursor is placed between the quotes so you can start typing in the attribute value directly Grid View When an element is selected the attributes that can be added as a child are listed in the Add Child tab of then entry helper When an attribute is selected the available attributes are listed in the Append after and Insert before tabs Unused attributes are displayed in black used attributes in gray Authentic View When an element is selected the attributes declared for that element become visible Enter he value of the attribute in the entry helper Entities entry helper Any parsed or unparsed entity that is declared inline within the XML document or in an external DTD is displayed in the Entities entry helper In all three views Text Grid and Authentic an entity is inserted at the cursor insertion point by double clicking it In Grid View entities are displayed in the Append Insert a
268. er so the lookup for the SVG DTD is redirected to the URI schemas svg svg11 dtd this path is relative to the catalog file and this local file will be used as the DTD If there is no mapping for the Public ID in the catalog then the URL in the XML document will be used in the example above http www w3 org Graphics SVG 1 1 DTD svg11 dtd The catalog subset supported by XMLSpy When creating entries in CustomCatalog xml or any other catalog file that is to be read by XMLSpy use only the following elements of the OASIS catalog specification Each of the elements below is listed with an explanation of their attribute values For a more detailed explanation see the XML Catalogs specification Note that each element can take the xml base attribute which is used to specify the base URI of that element lt public publicId PublicID of Resource uri URL of local file gt lt system systemId SystemID of Resource uri URL of local file gt lt uri name filename uri URL of file identified by filename gt lt rewriteURI uriStartString StartString of URI to rewrite rewritePrefix String to replace StartString gt lt rewriteSystem systemIdStartString StartString of SystemID 2011 Altova GmbH Catalogs in XMLSpy 119 DTDs and XML Schemas User Manual rewritePrefix Replacement string to locate resource locally gt In cases where there is no public identifier as with most stylesheets the system i
269. er Reference User Manual To help you in getting the best support possible we are providing a list of Frequently Asked Questions FAQ on the Internet that is constantly updated as our support staff encounters new issues that are raised by our customers Please make sure to check the FAQ before contacting our technical support team This will allow you to get help more quickly We regret that we are not able to offer technical support by phone at this time but our support staff will typically answer your e mail requests within one business day If you would like to make a feature suggestion for a future version of XMLSpy or if you wish to send us any other general feedback please use the questionnaire form Download components and free tools This command is a link to the Components Download page at the Altova website from where you can download components free tools and third party add ins that you can use in your XML development environment Included among these are the Altova Validator and XSLT and XQuery engines 12 13 7 On the Internet On the Internet This command takes you directly to the Altova web server http www altova com where you can find out about news product updates and additional offers from the Altova team Training The Training command takes you to the Online Training page on the Altova website Here you can enroll for online courses to help you develop expertise in using Altova products 12 13 8 About T
270. er a value in the id row of the Details entry helper Note Identity constraint information can be toggled on and off with the Enable ID Constraints Information icon in the Schema Design toolbar The display of the entire Constraint box can be toggled on and off in the Schema Display Configuration dialog Schema Design Configure View or with the Display Constraints icon in the Schema Design toolbar Identity constraints overview The Identity Constraints tab of the Components entry helper screenshot below provides an overview of a document s identity constraints In this tab identity constraints are listed by the kind of identity constraint unique key keyref and displayed as an expandable collapsible tree Entries in bold are present in the current schema while those in normal face are present in sub schemas Double clicking an entry in the Identity Constraints tab selects that schema component in Content Model View The following context menu commands are available when an item in the Identity Constraints tab is selected Show in Diagram selects the schema component in Content Model View Show Selector Field Target in Diagram selects in Content Model View the schema component targeted by the selector or field of the identity constraint In the case of multiple fields a dialog prompts the user for the required field Go to Identity Constraint selects the identity constraint in Schema Overview 78 Editing Vie
271. eral Information section 2011 Altova GmbH XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 343 Engine Information Appendices doc An error is raised only if no XML file is available at the specified location or if the file is not well formed The file is validated if a schema is available If the file is not valid the invalid file is loaded without schema information id In a well formed but invalid document that contains two or more elements having the same ID value the first element in document order is returned in scope prefi xes Only default namespaces may be undeclared in the XML document However even when a default namespace is undeclared on an element node the prefix for the default namespace which is the zero length string is returned for that node last See note on whitespace in the General Information section lower case The Unicode character set is supported normalize unic ode The normalization forms NFC NFD NFKC and NFKD are supported Function Name Notes position See note on whitespace in the General Information section resolve uri If the second optional argument is omitted the URI to be resolved the first argument is resolved against the base URI from the static context which is the URI of the XSLT stylesheet or the base URI given in the prolog of the XQuery document The relative URI the first argument is appended after the last in the pa
272. ers 240 undo check out 247 Source control manager 253 Source folding in Text View 44 Speed up increase background status updates 194 Splash screen 316 SPP file locations 238 SPS Index 2011 Altova GmbH 380 SPS assigning to new XML file 215 SPS file assigning to XML file 291 SPS tables editing dynamic tables 86 SPS tables in Authentic View usage of 150 StarTeam 194 Static SPS tables in Authentic View usage of 150 Status background updates 208 Status Bar 15 Structured text 315 Style 316 317 Stylesheet PI 287 StyleVision 272 for editing StyleVision Power Stylesheet 291 StyleVision Power Stylesheet assigning to XML file 291 editing in StyleVision 291 Support Center 326 Support options 17 Syntax coloring for XQuery 127 Syntax coloring 314 316 T Tab characters 313 Tab size and pretty printing 299 setting 299 Table build automatically 314 colors 318 Table command in Grid View 264 Table of contents 324 Table View 315 and switching to Grid View 264 sorting columns 265 Tables editing dynamic SPS tables 86 in Authentic View 138 Tables in Authentic View icons for editing XML tables 155 usage of 150 using SPS static and dynamic tables 150 using XML tables 151 Technical Information 348 Technical Support 326 Template files for new documents 215 Template folder 18 Template XML Fi
273. erver Notes below for further information about working with files on this type of server 3 If the server is password protected enter your User ID and password in the User and Password fields 4 Click Browse to view and navigate the directory structure of the server 5 In the folder tree browse for the file you want to load and click it 220 User Reference File Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The file URL appears in the File URL field screenshot above The Open button only becomes active at this point 6 Click the Open button to load the file The file you open appears in the main window Note The Browse function is only available on servers which support WebDAV and on Microsoft SharePoint Servers The supported protocols are FTP HTTP and HTTPS Note To give you more control over the loading process you can choose to load the file through the local cache or a proxy server which considerably speeds up the process if the file has been loaded before Alternatively you may want to reload the file if you are working say with an electronic publishing or database system select the Reload option in this case Microsoft SharePoint Server Notes Note the following points about files on Microsoft SharePoint Servers In the directory structure that appears in the Available Files pane screenshot below file icons have symbols that indicate the check in check out status of files 2011 Altova GmbH
274. es The logical structure of the DB Query and the relationship between any two criteria or sets of criteria is indicated graphically Each level of the logical structure is indicated by a square bracket Two adjacent criteria or sets of criteria indicate the AND operator whereas if two criteria are separated by the word OR then the OR operator is indicated The criteria are also appropriately indented to provide a clear overview of the logical structure of the DB Query The DB Query shown in the screenshot above may be represented in text as State CA AND City Los Angeles OR City San Diego OR City San Francisco AND CustomerNr 25 You can re order the DB Query by moving a criterion or set of criteria up or down relative to the other criteria in the DB Query To move a criterion or set of criteria do the following 1 Select the criterion by clicking on it or select an entire level by clicking on the bracket that represents that level 2 Click the Up or Down arrow button in the dialog The following points should be noted If the adjacent criterion in the direction of movement is at the same level the two criteria exchange places A set of criteria i e criterion within a bracket changes position within the same level it does not change levels An individual criterion changes position within the same level If the adjacent criterion is further outward inward i e not on the same level then the selected criterion will move
275. es This file must have the form lt collection gt lt doc href uri 1 gt lt doc href uri 2 gt lt doc href uri 3 gt lt collection gt The files referenced by the href attributes are loaded and their document nodes are returned as a sequence If the resolved URI does not identify an XML file with the catalog structure described above then the argument string in which wildcards such as and are allowed is used as a search string XML files with names that match the search expression are loaded and their document nodes are returned as a sequence See examples below XSLT example The expression collection c MyDocs xml Title returns a sequence of all DocTitle elements in the xml files in the MyDocs folder XQuery example The expression for i in collection c MyDocs xml return element doc base uri i returns the base URIs of all the xml files in the MyDocs folder each URI being within a doc element The default collection is empty Function Name Notes count See note on whitespace in the General Information section current date current dateTi me current time The current date and time is taken from the system clock The timezone is taken from the implicit timezone provided by the evaluation context the implicit timezone is taken from the system clock The timezone is always specified in the result deep equal See note on whitespace in the Gen
276. es that a sequence of child elements may appear in any order then the add link appears Note that no node name 140 Authentic Authentic View Tutorial 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 is specified Clicking the link will pop up a list of elements that may validly be inserted Note The Add Node link appears directly in the document template there is no corresponding entry in the context menu or Elements entry helper Creating new elements with the Enter key In cases where an element has been formatted as a paragraph or list item by the stylesheet designer pressing the Enter key when inside such a node causes a new node of that kind to be inserted after the current node You can try this mechanism in the NanonullOrg xml document by going to the end of a para node just before its end tag and pressing Enter Applying elements In elements of mixed content those which contain both text and child elements some text content can be selected and an allowed child element be applied to it The selected text becomes the content of the applied element To apply elements in the context menu select Apply and then select from among the applicable elements If no elements can be applied to the selected text then the Apply command does not appear in the context menu In the Elements entry helper elements that can be applied for a selection are indicated with the icon In the NanonullOrg xml document select text inside the mixed conte
277. etical sorting on and off When off the selectors are listed in the order in which they appear in the document When sorted alphabetically ID selectors appear first because they are prefaced by a hash e g intro Properties entry helper The Properties entry helper screenshot below provides a list of all CSS properties arranged alphabetically A property can be inserted at the cursor insertion point by double clicking the property Auto completion of properties and tooltips for properties As you start to type the name of a property XMLSpy prompts you with a list of properties that begin with the letters you have typed screenshot below Alternatively you can place the cursor anywhere inside a property name and then press Ctrl Space to pop up the list of CSS properties 2011 Altova GmbH CSS 175 HTML CSS JSON User Manual You can view a tooltip containing the definition of a property and its possible values by scrolling down the list or navigating the list with the Up and Down keys of your keyboard The tooltip for the highlighted property is displayed To insert a property either press Enter when it is selected or click it CSS Info window When a CSS file is active the CSS Info window screenshot below is enabled The CSS Info window provides the following functionality It enables the CSS file to be linked to an HTML file This functionality enables you to modify the CSS document and view the effect of changes im
278. even if you select the function of that name in the Functions Entry Helper When a function appears in blue it can be distinguished by the parentheses that follow the function name 6 2 3 XQuery Syntax Coloring An XQuery document can consist of XQuery code as well as XML code The default syntax coloring for the XQuery code is described in this section The syntax coloring for XML code in an XQuery document is the same as that used for regular XML documents All syntax coloring for both XQuery code and XML code is set in the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog Tools Options Note that XQuery code can be contained in XML elements by enclosing the XQuery code in curly braces see screenshot for example 128 XSLT and XQuery XQuery 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 In XQuery code in the XQuery Mode of Text View the following default syntax coloring is used Comments including smiley delimiters are in green XQuery Keywords are in blue keyword XQuery Variables including the dollar sign are in purple start XQuery Functions but not their parentheses are in olive function Strings are in orange Procedure All other text such as path expressions is black shown underlined below So for s in doc report1 xml section section title Procedure return s incision 2 instrument You can change these default colors and other font properties in the Text Fonts tab of
279. ew F7 Checks for well formedness F8 Validates the XML document against the associated DTD or Schema Opens the associated DTD or XML Schema file 2 3 1 Creating a New XML File When you create a new XML file in XMLSpy you are given the option of basing it on a schema DTD or XML Schema or not In this section you will create a new file that is based on the AddressLast xsd schema you created earlier in the tutorial To create the new XML file 1 Select the menu option File New The Create new document dialog opens 2011 Altova GmbH XML Documents 23 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual 2 Select the Extensible Markup Language entry or generic XML document entry from the dialog and confirm with OK A prompt appears asking if you want to base the XML document on a DTD or Schema 3 Click the Schema radio button and confirm with OK A further dialog appears asking you to select the schema file your XML document is to be based on 4 Use the Browse or Window buttons to find the schema file The Window button lists all files open in XMLSpy and projects Select AddressLast xsd see Tutorial introduction for location and confirm with OK An XML document containing the main elements defined by the schema opens in the main window Notice the structure of the document in Text View 5 Click the Grid tab to select Grid View 6 In Grid View notice the structure of the document Click on any element to reduce selection to t
280. ew select a global component and define identity constraints in the Identity Constraints tab at the bottom of the view and below the main pane In the Content Model View of a global component Content Model View provides a graphical representation of the identity constraints and drag and drop editing functionality neither of which is available when editing identity constraints in Schema Overview In this section we describe these two mechanisms for creating and editing identity constraints An overview of all identity constraints in the schema is available in the Identity Constraints tab of the Components entry helper this is described further below Note In Standard Edition Schema View is available as a read only view Editing in Schema View is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions Identity constraints in Schema Overview To define identity constraints for a global component in Schema Overview do the following 1 Select the global component in the global components list of Schema Overview 2 In the Attributes Identity Constraints pane select the Identity Constraints tab 3 Click the Append or Insert icon at the top left of the Identity Constraints tab 4 From the popup that appears screenshot below select the type of identity constraint you want to append or insert Unique Key or Keyref 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 75 Editing Views User Manual An entry is created in the Identity Constr
281. ews To activate or deactivate a toolbar Click the check box to activate or deactivate the specific toolbar Apply changes for all views Check this check box at the bottom of the dialog to apply changes to all views and not only to the current view On clicking Close all changes that were made after checking the check box will be applied to all views To create a new toolbar 1 Click the New button and give the toolbar a name in the Toolbar name dialog box 2 Drag commands to the toolbar in the Commands tab of the Customize dialog box To reset the Menu Bar 1 Click the Menu Bar entry 2 Click the Reset button to reset the menu commands to the state they were in when XMLSpy was installed To reset all toolbar and menu commands 1 Click the Reset All button to reset all the toolbar commands to the state they were when the program was installed A prompt appears stating that all toolbars and menus will be reset 2 Click Yes to confirm the reset To change a toolbar name Click the Rename button to edit the name of the toolbar To delete a toolbar 1 Select the toolbar you want to delete in the Toolbars list box 2 Click the Delete button 3 A prompt appears asking if you really want to delete the toolbar Click Yes to confirm the deletion Show text labels 306 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 This option displays explanatory text below t
282. exibility of moving between views when editing a document Switching to Grid View To switch to Grid View select the menu item View Grid View or click the Grid tab The newly added child elements of Person are highlighted Now let us validate the document and correct any errors that the validation finds 2 3 4 Validating the Document XMLSpy provides two evaluations of the XML document A well formedness check A validation check If either of these checks fails we will have to modify the document appropriately Checking well formedness An XML document is well formed if starting tags match closing tags elements are nested 30 XMLSpy Tutorial XML Documents 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 correctly there are no misplaced or missing characters such as an entity without its semi colon delimiter etc You can do a well formedness check in any editing view Let us select Text View To do a well formedness check select the menu option XML Check well formedness or press the F7 key or click A message appears in the Messages window at the bottom of the Main Window saying the document is well formed Notice that the output of the Messages window has 9 tabs The validation output is always displayed in the active tab Therefore you can check well formedness in Tab1 for one schema file and keep the result by switching to Tab2 before validating the next schema document otherwise Tab1 is overwritten with the v
283. ext View Schema View Authentic View and Browser View In Standard Edition Grid View and Schema View are read only views they are fully functional editing views in the Enterprise and Professional Editions These views are described in detail in the individual sections about them in the User Manual The right hand area contains the three Entry Helper windows which enable you to insert or append elements attributes and entities What entries are displayed in the Entry Helper windows depends on the current selection or cursor location in the XML file The details of the interface are explained as we go along Note that the interface changes dynamically according to the document that is active in the Main Window and according to the view selected 20 XMLSpy Tutorial XML Schemas 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 2 XML Schemas An XML Schema describes the structure of an XML document An XML document can be validated against an XML Schema to check whether it conforms to the requirements specified in the schema If it does it is said to be valid otherwise it is invalid XML Schemas enable document designers to specify the allowed structure and content of an XML document and to check whether an XML document is valid Schema editing views in XMLSpy The structure and syntax of an XML Schema document is complex and being an XML document itself an XML Schema must be valid according to the rules of the XML Schema specification
284. f descriptions of application wide XMLSpy features such as Altova Global Resources and projects The sections in the Working With part are Editing Views Describes the various editing views in XMLSpy XML Explains the various features available for working with XML documents in XMLSpy DTDs and XML Schemas Shows how schemas DTDs and XML Schemas can be edited and leveraged in XMLSpy XSLT and XQuery Presents the range of features available for XSLT and XQuery development Authentic Explains the utility of Altova s graphical XML editor and shows how it is used HTML CSS and JSON Explores XMLSpy s support for HTML and CSS Global Resources Describes a unique Altova mechanism that can be used to boost development efficiency when using Altova products especially as a suite of products Projects Explains XMLSpy s project mechanism which enables increased efficiency and additional development options User Reference The User Reference part is organized according to the menus in XMLSpy and describes each menu command in detail File paths in Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 File paths given in this documentation will not be the same for all operating systems You should note the following correspondences 2011 Altova GmbH 7 User Manual My Documents folder The My Documents folder of Windows XP is the Documents folder of Windows Vista and Windows 7 It is located by default at the
285. f its cells A maximum optimal width can be specified in the View tab of the Options dialog Tools Menu Note that optimal widths are calculated on the basis of the visible cells of columns This enables the optimization of the view when individual elements are collapsed or expanded 12 9 11 Word Wrap This command enables or disables word wrapping in the Text view 12 9 12 Go to Line Character Hotkey CTRL g This command goes to a specific line number and or character position in an XML document in the Text view If you are working with an external XSLT processor see the XSL tab on the Tools Options dialog for details you may often get error messages by line number and character position XMLSpy lets you quickly navigate to that spot using this command 2011 Altova GmbH View Menu 299 User Reference User Manual 12 9 13 Go to File This command opens a document that is being referred to from within the file you are currently editing Select the file name path name or URL you are interested in and choose this command from the View menu You can select Some characters from within any item in the Text View An enclosed string If your text cursor is between quotes XMLSpy will automatically use the entire string that is enclosed in the quotes 12 9 14 Text View Settings The Text View Settings command opens the Text View Settings dialog screenshot below in which you can configure Text View
286. files etc Batch processing of files in a folder is done by right clicking the folder and selecting the relevant command from the context menu For a more detailed description of projects see the section Projects Note The display of the Project Window can be turned on and off in the Window menu 1 1 3 Info Window The Info Window screenshot below shows information about the element or attribute in which the cursor is currently positioned Note The display of the Info Window can be turned on and off in the Window menu 1 1 4 Entry Helpers Entry helpers are an intelligent editing feature that helps you to create valid XML documents quickly When you are editing a document the entry helpers display structural editing options according to the current location of the cursor The entry helpers get the required information from the underlying DTD XML Schema and or StyleVision Power Stylesheet If for example you are editing an XML data document then elements attributes and entities that can be inserted at the current cursor position are displayed in the relevant entry helpers windows The entry helpers that are available depend upon 1 The kind of document being edited For example XML documents will have different entry helpers than XQuery documents elements attributes and entities entry helpers in the former case but XQuery keywords variables and functions entry helpers in the latter case The available entry he
287. fo window screenshot below lists applications that can be used to quickly access the active HTML file For example if an HTML file is active in XMLSpy double clicking the Mozilla Firefox item in the HTML Info Window starts an instance of Mozilla Firefox and loads the active HTML document in it 172 HTML CSS JSON HTML 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Note the following usage points The icon to the right of the Open HTML With item enables applications to be added to the Open HTML With list All the browsers installed on the system or any other application such as a text editor can be added via the menu commands accessed via the Open HTML With icon The associated applications would typically be browser or editor applications After an application has been added to the Open HTML With list except when added with the Add Installed Browsers command its name in the Open HTML With list can be changed by selecting it pressing F2 and editing the name The icons to the right of each application listed in the Open HTML With list each opens a menu containing commands to i open the application ii open the application and load the linked HTML file iii remove the application from the list Double clicking an application name opens the linked HTML file in that application Applications added to or removed from the Open HTML With list are also added to or removed from the CSS Info window Assigning a DTD For
288. forward through this history using the Undo and Redo commands 12 2 2 Cut Copy Paste Delete The Cut Shift Del or Ctrl X command copies the selected text or items to the clipboard and deletes them from their present location The Copy Ctrl C command copies the selected text or items to the clipboard This can be used to duplicate data within XMLSpy or to move data to another application The Paste Ctrl V command inserts the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor position The Delete Del command deletes the currently selected text or items without placing them in the clipboard 12 2 3 Insert Mousing over or selecting the Insert command rolls out a submenu with three commands which are described below Insert File Path Insert XInclude Insert File Path The File Path command is enabled in the Text View and Grid View of documents of any file type Using it you can insert the path to a file at the cursor selection point Clicking the command pops up a dialog screenshot below in which you select the required file 232 User Reference Edit Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The required file can be selected in one of the following ways i by browsing for the file URL or global resource use the Browse button ii by selecting the window in which the file is open the Window button When done click OK The path to the selected file will be inserted in the active document at the c
289. ftware from either Altova GmbH or an authorized reseller The purchase key code will enable you to activate the Software beyond the initial evaluation period You may not re license reproduce or distribute any key code except with the express written permission of Altova If the Software that you have licensed is an upgrade or an update then the latest update or upgrade that you download and install replaces all or part of the Software previously licensed The update or upgrade and the associated license keys does not constitute the granting of a second license to the Software in that you may not use the upgrade or updated copy in addition to the copy of the Software that it is replacing and whose license has terminated h Title Title to the Software is not transferred to you Ownership of all copies of the Software and of copies made by you is vested in Altova subject to the rights of use granted to you in this Software License Agreement As between you and Altova documents files stylesheets generated program code including the Unrestricted Source Code and schemas that are authored or created by you via your utilization of the Software in accordance with its Documentation and the terms of this Software License Agreement are your property unless they are created using Evaluation Software as defined in Section 4 of this Agreement in which 362 License Information Altova End User License Agreement 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011
290. ftware in the European Union and not in the United States then this Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Austria excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any way to your use of the Software resides in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in 2011 Altova GmbH Altova End User License Agreement 369 License Information Appendices the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna in connection with any such dispute or claim If you are located in the United States or are using the Software in the United States then this Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts USA excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any way to your use of the Software resides in the federal or state courts of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in the federal or state courts of the Commo
291. ful commands Here are some other commonly used project commands To add a new folder to a project select Project Add Project folder to Project and insert the name of the project folder To delete a folder from a project right click the folder and select Delete from the context menu To delete a file from a project select the file and press the Delete key 40 XMLSpy Tutorial That s It 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 6 That s It If you have come this far congratulations and thank you We hope that this tutorial has been helpful in introducing you to the basics of XMLSpy If you need more information please use the context sensitive online help system or print out the PDF version of the tutorial which is available as tutorial pdf in your XMLSpy application folder 2011 Altova GmbH 41 Editing Views User Manual 3 Editing Views XMLSpy contains powerful editing views In addition to a Text View with intelligent editing features there are graphical views that greatly simplify the editing of documents Depending on what type of document is currently active in XMLSpy the Main Window will have one or more of XMLSpy s Editing Views For example when an HTML document is active the Main Window will contain two editing views Text View and Browser View When an XML document is active there will be five editing views Text View Grid View Schema View Authentic View and Browser View Of these views Schem
292. g should open These settings are in the Options dialog Tools Options In the File Types tab of the Options dialog select a file type of xml and in the Default View pane check the required editing view Text or Grid Note that i Schema View can be used only for XML Schema and ii Browser View is a display view not an editing view In the File Types tab you can also set XMLSpy as the default editor for the selected file type An XML document can be edited in Authentic View if a StyleVision Power Stylesheet SPS has been assigned to it When an XML file with an associated SPS is opened you can specify that it opens directly in Authentic View Do this by checking the Always open in Authentic View option in the View tab of the Options dialog If this option is not checked the file will open in the default view specified for xml files in the File Types tab see above Assigning schemas When a new XML file is to be created select the menu command File New This pops up the Create New Document dialog screenshot below Notice that there are several options for the XML document type The option marked Extensible Markup Language creates a generic XML document Each of the other options is associated with a schema for example the DocBook DTD If you select one of these options an XML document is created that has i the corresponding schema automatically assigned to it and ii 100 XML Creating Opening and Saving XML Documen
293. given below for the most common document types The general use of entry helpers is described below Additional features for specific document types if any are described in the sections describing the respective document types XML Elements screenshot below Attributes Entities 50 Editing Views Text View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 HTML Elements Attributes Entities CSS CSS Outline CSS Properties HTML Elements DTD None XQuery XQuery Keywords XQuery Variables XQuery Functions Text Entities Note that several document types such as XSD XSLT XHTML and RDF are essentially XML documents and will therefore have the Elements Attributes and Entities entry helpers Display and use of entry helper items Different items in the various entry helpers are variously color coded These color codes are explained in the Entry Helpers documentation of the respective document types In general the following points should be noted about entry helpers The entry helpers are context sensitive and display items that may be inserted at that point If the item has already been inserted at the selected or at another equivalent and valid location and may not be inserted again at that location for example an XML attribute it is displayed in gray If the item is mandatory an exclamation mark icon is displayed next to it To insert an entry helper item at the cursor selection p
294. hat element Your document should look something like this 24 XMLSpy Tutorial XML Documents 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 7 Click on the icon next to Address to view the child elements of Address Your document should look like this 2 3 2 Specifying the Type of an Element The child elements of Address are those defined for the global complex type AddressType the content model of which is defined in the XML Schema AddressLast xsd shown in the Grid View screenshot below We would however like to use a specific US or UK address type rather than the generic address type You will recall that in the AddressLast xsd schema we created global complex types for US Address and UK Address by extending the AddressType complex type The content model of US Address is shown below 2011 Altova GmbH XML Documents 25 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual In the XML document in order to specify that the Address element must conform to one of the extended Address types US Address or UK Address rather than the generic AddressType we must specify the required extended complex type as an attribute of the Address element Do this as follows In the XML document on the Address element enter an xsi type attribute with a value of US Address screenshot below You can now enter data for the Address element Enter the values shown in the screenshot above Then delete the Person element it will be added in the next section of the
295. he Content Model View is configured so that components are displayed with property descriptor lines additional information about components in the component box then you can edit this information and so change the properties of components The property descriptor lines you have defined can be turned on and off by clicking the Add Predefined Details toolbar icon You can toggle between a view containing the defined properties and a view not containing them To edit component properties 1 Double click the component s information field that you want to edit and start entering or editing data If a predefined option is available then a drop down list can be opened and the appropriate entry selected Otherwise simply enter the required value 2 Press Enter to confirm The Details entry helpers will be updated to reflect your changes Alternatively you can edit a component s properties in the Details entry helper and changes will be reflected in the placeholder fields if these are configured to be displayed Attributes and Identity Constraints Attributes and Identity constraints can appear in a pane below the Content Model View or as boxes in the Content Model View itself You can toggle between these views by clicking the icon For a description of how to insert and edit attributes and identity constraints see Defining attributes for components and Defining identity constraints for components respectively 70 Editing Views Schema
296. he external folder and select the popup menu option Refresh external folder Deleting external folders and files in them Select an external folder and press the Delete key to delete the folder from the Project window Alternatively right click the external folder and select the Delete command Each of these actions only deletes the external folder from the Project window The external folder is not deleted from the hard disk or network To delete a file in an external folder you have to delete it physically from the hard disk or network To see the change in the project refresh the external folder contents right click the external folder and select Refresh Note An external folder can be dragged and dropped into a project folder or to any other location in the project but not into another external folder Also an external folder can be dragged from Windows File Explorer and dropped into any location in the project window except into another external folder 258 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 3 14 Add External Web Folder to Project This command adds a new external web folder to the current project You can also access this command from the context menu when you right click a folder in the project window Note that files contained in external folders cannot be placed under source control Adding an external web folder to the project To add an external web folder to the project do the fol
297. he main Authentic View window A description of the Entry Helpers and how they are to be used A description of the context menus available at various points in the Authentic View of the XML document Additional sources of Authentic View information are An Authentic View Tutorial which shows you how to use the Authentic View interface This tutorial is available in the documentation of the Altova XMLSpy and Altova Authentic Desktop products see the Tutorials section as well as online For a detailed description of Authentic View menu commands see the User Reference section of your product documentation 3 4 1 Overview of the GUI Authentic View has a menu bar and toolbar running across the top of the window and three areas that cover the rest of the interface the Project Window Main Window and Entry Helpers Window These areas are shown below Menu bar The menus available in the menu bar are described in detail in the User Reference section of your product documentation Toolbar The symbols and icons displayed in the toolbar are described in the section Authentic View 86 Editing Views Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 toolbar icons Project window You can group XML XSL XML schema and Entity files together in a project To create and modify the list of project files use the commands in the Project menu described in the User Reference section of your product documentation The li
298. he retrieved files Get Folders The Get Folders command retrieves read only copies of files in the selected folders and places them in the working folder By default the files are not checked out for editing To get a folder s elect it in the Project window and then select the Get Folders command This pops up the Get Folders dialog screenshot below Check the foldersyou want to get Overwrite changed files check box Overwrites those files that have been changed locally with those from the source control database Recursive get tree check box Retrieves all files of the folder tree below the selected folder 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 245 User Reference User Manual Select All Selects all the files in the list box Advanced Allows you to define the Replace writable and Set timestamp options in the respective combo boxes The Make writable check box removes the read only attribute of the retrieved files Check Out The Check Out command checks out the latest version of the selected files and places writable copies in the working directory The files are flagged as checked out for all other users To check out files do the following 1 Select the file or folder you want to check out in the Model Tree 2 Select Project Source Control Check Out 3 In the Check Out dialog that pops up select the files to check out then click OK Note the following points You can change the number of files to ch
299. heir respective fields The target namespace for the XML instance document can be set by selecting the Target Namespace radio button and entering the target namespace in the field If you declare a target namespace you must define that namespace for use in the schema 276 User Reference Schema Design Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 document Do this by entering a namespace line in the Namespace list in the bottom pane You can define a prefix for this namespace or let this namespace be the default namespace by leaving the prefix field blank as shown in the screenshot above The Text View of the schema settings shown in the screenshot above will look something like this Please note These settings apply to the active schema document only 12 6 2 Configure View The Schema Design Configure view command is active in Content Model View and allows you to configure the Content Model View Clicking the command opens the Schema Display Configuration dialog at the bottom right of the XMLSpy window enabling you to see the effect of your settings as you enter them in the dialog The settings take effect when you click the OK button of the dialog and apply to the Content Model View of all XML Schema files that are opened subsequently These settings also apply to the schema documentation output and printer output Defining property descriptor lines for the content model You can define what properties of elements and attrib
300. hen the global resource is invoked 4 Specify a resource for each configuration that is repeat Step 3 above for the various configurations you have created 5 Click OK in the Global Resource dialog to save the alias and all its configurations as a global resource The global resource will be listed under Files in the Manage Global Resources dialog Selecting Result of MapForce transformations as a global resource Altova MapForce maps one or more already existing schemas to one or more new schemas designed by the MapForce user XML files corresponding to the input schemas are used as data sources and an output XML file based on the user designed schema can be generated by MapForce This generated output file Result of MapForce Transformation is the file that will be used as a global resource In a MapForce transformation that has multiple output schemas you can select which one of the output schemas should be used for the global resource by clicking its radio button screenshot below The XML file that is generated for this schema can be saved as a global resource or as a file path click the icon and select respectively Global Resource or Browse If neither of these options is selected a temporary XML file is created when the global resource is used 182 Altova Global Resources Defining Global Resources 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Note that each Input can also be saved as a global resource or as a file path cl
301. hentic View The StyleVision Power Stylesheet that is to be assigned to the XML file must be based on the same schema as that on which the XML file is based To assign a StyleVision Power Stylesheet to an XML file 1 Make the XML file the active file and select the Authentic Assign a StyleVision Stylesheet command 2 The command opens a dialog box in which you specify the StyleVision Power Stylesheet file you wish to assign to the XML 3 Click OK to insert the required SPS statement into your XML document Note that you can make the path to the assigned file relative by clicking the Make path relative to check box You can also select a file via a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt altova_sps HTML Orgchart sps gt In the example above the StyleVision Power Stylesheet is called HTML_Orgchart sps and it is located in the same directory as the XML file Please note Previous versions of Altova products used a processing instruction with a target or name of xmlspysps so a processing instruction would look something like lt xmlspysps HTML Orgchart sps gt These older processing instructions are still valid with Authentic View in current versions of Altova products Edit StyleVision Stylesheet The Authentic Edit StyleVision Stylesheet command starts StyleVision and allows you to edit the St
302. hird party unless said third party already has a license to the Restricted Source Code through their separate agreement with Altova Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein you may not distribute incorporate or combine with other software or otherwise use the Altova Library modules or Restricted Source Code or any Altova intellectual property embodied in or associated with the Altova Library modules or Restricted Source Code in any manner that would subject the Restricted Source Code to the terms of a copyleft free software or open source license that would require the Restricted Source Code or Altova Library modules source code to be disclosed in source code form Altova reserves all other rights in and to the Software With respect to the feature s of UModel that permit reverse engineering of your own source code or other source code that you have lawfully obtained such use by you does not constitute a violation of this Agreement Except as otherwise expressly permitted in Section 1 i reverse engineering of the Software is strictly prohibited as further detailed therein iv In the event Restricted Source Code is incorporated into executable object code form you will include the following statement in 1 introductory splash screens or if none within one or more screens readily accessible by the end user and 2 in the electronic and or hard copy documentation Portions of this program were developed using Altova name of Altov
303. his command shows the XMLSpy splash screen and copyright information dialog box which includes the XMLSpy logo Please note This dialog box shows the version number to find the number of the actual build you are using please look at the status bar which always includes the full version and build number 328 User Reference Command Line 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 14 Command Line Certain XMLSpy actions can be carried out from the command line These commands are listed below Open a file Command xmlspy exe file xml Action Opens the file file xml in XMLSpy Note If an XML file has an SPS file already assigned to it then the XML file is opened in Authentic View Otherwise the XML file is opened in Text View If an SPS file is not assigned one can be assigned with the sps flag see below Open multiple files Command xmlspy exe file1 xml file2 xml Action Opens the files file1 xml and file2 xml in XMLSpy Assign an SPS file to an XML file for Authentic View editing Command xmlspy exe myxml xml sps mysps sps Action Opens the file myxml xml in Authentic View with mysps sps as its SPS file The sps flag specifies that the SPS file that follows is to be used with the XML file that precedes the sps flag for Authentic View editing Open a new XML template file via an SPS file Command xmlspy exe mysps sps Action Opens a new XML file in Authentic View The display will be based on the SPS and the
304. his section will help you familiarize yourself with XMLSpy and get you off to a confident start It contains important information about settings and customization which you should read for a general idea of the range of settings and customization options available to you and how these can be changed This section is organized as follows Settings and Customization Describes how and where important settings and customization options can be defined Tutorials Projects Examples notes the location of the various non program files included in the application package Product features and documentation and Altova products provides links to the Altova website where you can find information about product features additional Help formats and other Altova products 1 2 1 Settings and Customization In XMLSpy there are several settings and customization options that you can select In this section we point you to these options This section is organized into the following parts Settings Customization Settings Several important XMLSpy settings are defined in different tabs in the Options dialog You should look through the various options to familiarize yourself with what s available Customization You can also customize various aspects of XMLSpy including the appearance of the GUI These customization options are available in the Customize dialog accessed via the menu command Tools Customize The various
305. host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio Except as expressly stated above this Software License Agreement does not grant you any intellectual property rights in the Software Notifications of claimed copyright infringement should be sent to Altova s copyright agent as further provided on the Altova Web Site 3 LIMITED TRANSFER RIGHTS Notwithstanding the foregoing you may transfer all your rights to use the Software to another person or legal entity provided that a you also transfer each of this Software License Agreement the Software and all other software or hardware bundled or pre installed with the Software including all copies updates and prior versions and all copies of font software converted into other formats to such person or entity b you retain no copies including backups and copies stored on a computer c the receiving party secures a personalized key code from Altova and d the receiving party accepts the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement and any other terms and conditions upon which you legally purchased a license to the Software Notwithstanding the foregoing you may not transfer education pre release or not for resale copies of the Software 4 PRE RELEASE AND EVALUATION PRODUCT ADDITIONAL TERMS If the product you have received with this license is pre commercial release or beta Software Pre release Software then this Section applies In addition this section applies to all evaluat
306. hout quotes or any other delimiter Values must also have the same formatting as that of the corresponding DB field otherwise the expression will evaluate to FALSE For example if a criterion for a field of the date datatype in an MS Access DB has an expression StartDate 25 05 2004 the expression will evaluate to FALSE because the date datatype in an MS Access DB has a format of YYYY MM DD Using parameters with DB Queries You can enter the name of a parameter as the value of an expression when creating queries Parameters are variables that can be used instead of literal values in queries When you enter it in an expression its value is used in the expression Parameters that are available have been defined by the SPS designer in the SPS and can be viewed in the View Parameters dialog see screenshot below Parameters have been assigned a default value in the SPS which can be overridden by passing a value to the parameter via the command line if and when the output document is compiled via the command line To view the parameters defined for the SPS click the Parameters button in the Edit Database Query dialog This opens the View Parameters dialog see screenshot The View Parameters dialog contains all the parameters that have been defined for the stylesheet in the SPS and parameters must be edited in th stylesheet design 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 161 Authentic User Manual Re ordering criteria in DB Queri
307. ic View Tutorial 143 Authentic User Manual Notice that the combo box selection DC is mapped to a value of DC The value of the Zip field is entered directly as content of the ipo zip element 7 1 5 Entering Attribute Values An attribute is a property of an element and an element can have any number of attributes Attributes have values You may sometimes be required to enter XML data as an attribute value In Authentic View you enter attribute values in two ways As content in the main window if the attribute has been created to accept its value in this way In the Attributes entry helper Attribute values in the main window Attribute values can be entered as normal text or as text in an input field or as a user selection that will be mapped to an XML value They are entered in the same way that element content is entered see Entering Data in Authentic View In such cases the distinction between element content and attribute value is made by the StyleVision Power Stylesheet and the data is handled appropriately Attribute values in the Attributes Entry Helper If you wish to enter or change an attribute value you can also do this in the Attributes Entry Helper First the attribute node is selected in Authentic View then the value of the attribute is entered or edited in the Attributes entry helper In the NanonullOrg xml document the location of the logo is stored as the value of the href attribute of the CompanyLogo element
308. ich you can select the global resource These dialogs are described in the section Using Global Resources For a general description of Global Resources see the Global Resources section in this documentation 12 1 7 Send by Mail The Send by Mail command lets you send XML document s or selections from an XML document by e mail You can do any of the following Send an XML document as an attachment or as the content of an e mail Send a selection in an XML document as an attachment or as the content of an e mail Send a group of files selected in the Project Window as an attachment to an e mail Send a URL selected in the Project Window as an attachment or as a link Please note To use this function you must have a MAPI compliant e mail system Sending documents and document fragments To send an XML document 1 Make that document the active document in the Main Window If you wish to send a selection or a group of files from a project make the selection in the document or select the required files in the Project 2 Click Send by Mail The following dialog opens 3 Make the required choices and click OK The selected documents contents URLs are attached to the e mail or content is inserted into the e mail Sending URLs by mail To send one or more URLs select the URLs in the Project Window and click Send by Mail The following dialog opens Select how the URL is to be sent and click OK 2011 A
309. ich you edit in Authentic View contains only the content it contains no formatting whatsoever The formatting is contained in the stylesheet What this means for you the Authentic View user is that you do not have to nor can you format any of the text you edit You are editing content The formatting that is automatically applied to the content you edit is linked to the semantic and or structural value of the data you are editing For example an email address which could be considered a semantic unit will be formatted automatically in a certain way because of it is an email In the same way a headline must occur at a particular location in the document both a structural and semantic unit and will be formatted automatically in the way the stylesheet designer has specified that headlines be formatted You cannot change the formatting of either email address or headline All that you do is edit the content of the email address or headline In some cases content might need to be specially presented for example a text string that must be presented in boldface In all such cases the presentation must be tied in with a structural element of the document For example a text string that must be presented in boldface will be structurally separated from surrounding content by markup that the stylesheet designer will format in boldface If you as the Authentic View user need to use such a text string you would need to enclose the text string within
310. ick the icon and select respectively Global Resource or Browse 9 1 2 Folders In the Global Resource dialog for Folders screenshot below you can add a folder resource as follows Enter an alias name 1 The Configurations pane will have a configuration named Default screenshot above This Default configuration cannot be deleted nor have its name changed You can enter as many additional configurations for the selected alias as you like Add a configuration by clicking the Add Configuration icon and in the Add Configuration dialog 2011 Altova GmbH Defining Global Resources 183 Altova Global Resources User Manual which pops up enter the configuration name Click OK The new configuration will be listed in the Configurations pane Repeat for as many configurations as required for this particular alias global resource 2 Select one of the configurations in the Configurations pane and browse for the folder you wish to create as a global resource 3 Specify a folder resource for each configuration that is repeat Step 3 above for the various configurations you have created 4 Click OK in the Global Resource dialog to save the alias and all its configurations as a global resource The global resource will be listed under Folders in the Manage Global Resources dialog 9 1 3 Copying Configurations The Manage Global resources dialog allows you to duplicate existing configurations for all types of resources To
311. ick the required button XML Databases In the case of XML DBs such as IBM DB2 one cell or row contains a single XML document and therefore a single row is loaded into Authentic View at a time To load an XML document that is in another row use the menu command DB Queries A DB query enables you to query the records of a table displayed in Authentic View A query is made for an individual table and only one query can be made for each table You can make a query at any time while editing If you have unsaved changes in your Authentic View document at the time you submit the query you will be prompted about whether you wish to save all changes made in the document or discard all changes Note that even changes made in other tables will be saved discarded After you submit the query the table is reloaded using the query conditions Please note If you get a message saying that too many tables are open then you can reduce the number of tables that are open by using a query to filter out some tables To create and submit a query 1 Click the Query button for the required table in order to open the Edit Database Query dialog see screenshot This button typically appears at the top of each DB table or below it If a Query button is not present for any table the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet has not enabled the DB Query feature for that table 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 159 Authentic User Manua
312. ification for more information about pointless occurrences 3 3 7 xml base xml id xml lang xml space The namespace http www w3 org XML 1998 namespace is according to the XML Namespaces specification bound by definition to the xml prefix What this means is that this is the namespace that must be used with the xml prefix and that is reserved for it There are four attributes in this namespace that can be children of any XML element in any XML document schema or instance xml base for setting the base URI of an element xml id for specifying the unique ID of an element xml lang for identifying the language used within that element xml space for specifying how whitespace in the element should be handled In Schema View once the XML Namespaces namespace has been imported into the XML Schema document these four xml attributes can be referenced for use on any element in the 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 83 Editing Views User Manual schema In order to declare one of these attributes on an element do the following 1 Declare the XML Namespaces namespace for that schema document and bind the namespace to the xml prefix When any of the four xml attributes is used in the document its name would then be expanded to include the correct namespace part 2 Import the XML Namespaces namespace XMLSpy s validator will recognize the namespace and make the four xml attributes available as global att
313. in the window and select Make Global Element or Make Global Complex type 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 57 Editing Views User Manual Deleting global components To delete a global component 1 Select the global component in the list of global components in the Schema Overview 2 Press the Delete key or click the Delete icon at the top of the Schema Overview Attributes and identity constraints of components You can define attributes and identity constraints for components in either Schema Overview or Content Model View In Schema Overview the attributes and identity constraints of a component are displayed in the Attributes Identity Constraints pane at the bottom of the Schema Overview window and can be edited there In Content Model View attributes and identity constraints can appear either in the Attributes Identity Constraints pane at the bottom of the Content Model Window or within the Content Model diagram itself where it can be edited You can select how to display attributes and identity constraints in Content Model View with a setting in the Schema Display Configuration dialog which is accessed with the Schema design Configure view menu command Defining attributes for a component To define attributes for a component you use the Attributes Identity Constraints pane which is at the bottom of the Schema Overview window To define attributes for a global component for which attributes are allowed 1 Select th
314. ing in Text View can easily result in XML and other marked up documents such as HTML that are not well formed For example closing tags may be missing mis spelled or structurally mismatched XMLSpy automatically completes the start and end tags of elements as well as inserts all required attributes as soon as you finish entering the element name on your keyboard The cursor is also automatically positioned between the start and end tags of the element so that you can immediately continue to add child elements or contents lt img src alt gt lt img gt XMLSpy makes use of the XML rules for well formedness and validity to support auto completion The information about the structure of the document is obtained from the schema on which the document is based In the case of well used schemas such as HTML and XSLT the schema information is built into XMLSpy Auto completion uses not only information about the structure of the document but also the values stored in the document For example enumerations and schema annotations in an XML Schema are actively used by the Auto Completion feature If in the schema values are enumerated for a particular node then those enumerations will be displayed as auto completion options when that node comes to be edited Similarly if for a node annotations exist in the schema then these annotations are displayed when the node name is being typed in the document screenshot below First given name of
315. ing with files on this type of server 3 If the server is password protected enter your User ID and password in the User and Password fields 4 Click Browse to view and navigate the directory structure of the server 5 In the folder tree browse for the file you want to load and click it 226 User Reference File Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The file URL appears in the File URL field screenshot above The Open button only becomes active at this point 6 Click the Open button to load the file The file you open appears in the main window Note The Browse function is only available on servers which support WebDAV and on Microsoft SharePoint Servers The supported protocols are FTP HTTP and HTTPS Note To give you more control over the loading process you can choose to load the file through the local cache or a proxy server which considerably speeds up the process if the file has been loaded before Alternatively you may want to reload the file if you are working say with an electronic publishing or database system select the Reload option in this case Microsoft SharePoint Server Notes Note the following points about files on Microsoft SharePoint Servers In the directory structure that appears in the Available Files pane screenshot below file icons have symbols that indicate the check in check out status of files 2011 Altova GmbH File Menu 227 User Reference User Manual
316. ion it will have fewer views than shown in the screenshot Text View This check box lets you set syntax coloring for particular file types Disable automatic validation This option enables you to disable automatic validation per file type Automatic validation typically takes place when a file is opened or saved or when a view is changed Save empty elements in short lt E gt format Some applications that use XML documents or output generated from XML documents may have problems understanding the short lt Element gt form for empty elements defined in the XML 1 0 Specification You can instruct XMLSpy to save elements in the longer but also valid lt Element gt lt Element gt form Add new file extension Adds a new file type to the File types list You must then define the settings for this new file type using the other options in this tab Delete selected file extension Deletes the currently selected file type and all its associated settings After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog Editing The Editing tab enables you to specify editing behaviour in XMLSpy Intelligent editing While editing documents XMLSpy provides intelligent editing based on these settings You can also customize various aspects of the behavior of these Entry Helpers here Such customization varies according to the file type For example the option to load entry helpers on opening the file and sorting attributes will
317. ion and or demonstration copies of Altova software Evaluation Software and continues in effect until you purchase a license To the extent that any provision in this section is in conflict with any other term or condition in this Software License Agreement this section shall supersede such other term s and condition s with respect to the Pre release and or Evaluation Software but only to the extent necessary to resolve the conflict You acknowledge that the Pre release Software is a pre release version does not represent final product from Altova and may contain bugs errors and other problems that could cause system or other failures and data loss CONSEQUENTLY THE PRE RELEASE AND OR EVALUATION SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO YOU AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES FOR USE OR PERFORMANCE AND ALTOVA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OR LIABILITY OBLIGATIONS TO YOU OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHERE LEGALLY LIABILITY CANNOT BE EXCLUDED FOR PRE RELEASE AND OR EVALUATION SOFTWARE BUT IT MAY BE LIMITED ALTOVA S LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE SUM OF FIFTY DOLLARS USD 50 IN TOTAL If the Evaluation Software has a time out feature then the software will cease operation after the conclusion of the designated evaluation period Upon such expiration date your license will expire unless otherwise extended Your 364 License Information Altova End User License Agreement 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 license to u
318. ion dialog which pops up enter the configuration name Click OK The new configuration will be listed in the Configurations pane Repeat for as many configurations as required for this particular alias global resource You can also copy a configuration using the Add Configuration as Copy icon and then modify it 3 Select one of the configurations in the Configurations pane and then define the resource to which this configuration will map In the Settings for Configuration X pane you can select whether the resource is a file or the result of either an Altova MapForce or Altova StyleVision transformation After selecting the resource type by clicking its radio button browse for the file MapForce file or StyleVision file Where multiple inputs or outputs for the transformation are possible a selection of the options will be presented For example if the Result of StyleVision Transformation was selected as the resource type the output options are displayed according to the what edition of StyleVision is installed the screenshot below shows the outputs for Enterprise Edition Select the radio button of the desired option in the screenshot above HTML output is selected The result of a transformation can itself be saved as a global resource or as a file path click the icon and select respectively Global Resource or Browse If neither of these two saving options is selected the transformation result will be loaded as a temporary file w
319. ion or control You may print a copy of this Software License Agreement as part of the installation process at the time of acceptance Alternatively you may go to our Web site at http www altova com eula to download and print a copy of this Software License Agreement for your files and http www altova com privacy to review the Privacy Policy 1 SOFTWARE LICENSE a License Grant i Upon your acceptance of this Software License Agreement Altova grants you a non exclusive non transferable except as provided below limited license without the right to grant sublicenses to install and use a copy of the Software on one compatible personal computer or workstation up to the Permitted Number of computers Subject to the limitations set forth in Section 1 c you may install and use a copy of the Software on more than one of your compatible personal computers or workstations if you have purchased a Named User license The Permitted Number of computers and or users shall be determined and specified at such time as you elect to purchase the Software During the evaluation period hereinafter defined only a single user may install and use the software on one 1 personal computer or workstation If you have licensed the Software as part of a suite of Altova software products collectively the Suite and have not installed each product individually then the Software License Agreement governs your use of all of the software included in the Suit
320. ions dialog is described in detail in this section File The File tab defines the way XMLSpy opens and saves documents Related settings are in the Encoding tab Open New file in Grid view You can choose to open an existing file or create a new file either in Grid View or in Text View If you select Grid View you can also choose to automatically expand all lines Automatic reload of changed files If you are working in a multi user environment or if you are working on files that are dynamically generated on a server you can watch for changes to files that are currently open in the interface Each time XMLSpy detects a change in an open document it will prompt you about whether you want to reload the changed file Validation If you are using DTDs or schemas to define the structure of your XML documents you can automatically check the document for validity whenever it is opened or saved During Open and Save operations you have the option of validating files only if the file size is less than a size you specify in MB If the document is not valid an error message will be displayed If it is valid no message will be displayed and the operation will proceed without any notification XMLSpy can also cache these files in memory to save any unnecessary reloading e g when the schema 314 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 being referred to is accessed through a URL If your schema location declaration uses
321. is switch Authentic View to Show small markup mode or Show large markup mode and then print 146 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 7 2 Editing in Authentic View This section describes important features of Authentic View in detail Features have been included in this section either because they are frequently used or because the mechanisms or concepts involved require explanation The section explains the following There are three distinct types of tables used in Authentic View The section Using tables in Authentic View explains the three types of tables static SPS dynamic SPS and XML and when and how to use them It starts with the broad conceptual picture and moves to the details of usage The Date Picker is a graphical calendar that enters dates in the correct XML format when you click a date See Using the Date Picker An entity is shorthand for a special character or text string You can define your own entities which allows you to insert these special characters or text strings by inserting the corresponding entities See Defining Entities for details What image formats can be displayed in Authentic View 7 2 1 Basic Editing When you edit in Authentic View you are editing an XML document Authentic View however can hide the structural XML markup of the document thus displaying only the content of the document first screenshot below You are therefore n
322. is checked out by another user it is not available for check out When a file is checked out locally by you you can undo the check out with the Undo Check Out command in the context menu This has the effect of returning the file unchanged to the server If you check out a file in one Altova application you cannot check it out in another Altova application The file is considered to be already checked out to you The available commands at this point in any Altova application supporting Microsoft SharePoint Server will be Check In and Undo Check Out 12 3 15 Properties The Project Project Properties command lets you define important settings for any of the specific folders in your project To define the Project Properties for a folder 1 Right click on the folder you want to define the properties for 2 Select the Properties command from the context menu 262 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Please note If your project file is under source control a prompt appears asking if you want to check out the project file spp Click OK if you want to edit settings and be able to save them The files specified in the Use this xxx entry will take precedence over any local assignment directly within the XML file For example the OrgChart xsl file in the Use this XSL entry will always be used when transforming any of the XML files in the XML Files folder Also such specified files
323. is entered i directly as text or ii by selecting an option in a data entry device which is then mapped to a predefined text entry Adding text content You can enter element content and attribute values directly as text in the main window of Authentic View To insert content place the cursor at the location where you want to insert the text and type You can also copy text from the clipboard into the document Content can also be edited using standard editing mechanisms such as the Caps and Delete keys For example you can highlight the text to be edited and type in the replacement text with the Caps key on For example to change the name of the company in the Name field of Office place the cursor after Nanonull and type in USA to change the name from Nanonull Inc to Nanonull USA Inc If text is editable you will be able to place your cursor in it and highlight it otherwise you will not be able to Try changing any of the field names not the field values such as Street City or State Zip in the address block You are not able to place the cursor in this text because such text is not XML content it is derived from the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Inserting special characters and entities When entering data the following type of content is handled in a special way Special characters that are used for XML markup ampersand apostrophe greater than less than and quotes These characters are available as built in
324. is sufficient to install the client and the Visual Studio SCC plug in components ComponentSoftware CS RCS PRO 5 1 http www componentsoftware com Products RCS 202 Source Control Installing Source Control Systems 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 To install ComponentSoftware CS RCS PRO start the setup and choose the option Workstation Setup 2 Specify your repository tree root and when the installation is finished restart your machine as requested 3 Use the ComponentSoftware RCS Properties to choose or create a project and to specify a work folder Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere for VSS 5 3 2 Client http www dynamsoft com Products SAW_Overview aspx A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products To integrate with Altova products you do not need to install the plug in for Adobe DreamWeaver CS3 After the installation establish a server connection and set a working folder Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Hosted Client 22252 http www dynamsoft com Products SourceAnywhere Hosting Version Control Sourc e Control aspx A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products To integrate with the Altova products you do not need to install the plug in for Adobe DreamWeaver CS3 Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere Standalone 2 2 Client http www dynamsoft com Products SourceAnywhere SourceSafe VSS aspx A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products To integrate wi
325. is that the resource being used can be instantly changed by changing the active configuration in XMLSpy Global resources in other Altova products Currently global resources can be defined and used in the following individual Altova products XMLSpy StyleVision MapForce and DatabaseSpy 178 Altova Global Resources Defining Global Resources 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 9 1 Defining Global Resources Altova Global Resources are defined in the Manage Global Resources dialog which can be accessed in two ways Click Tools in the menu bar to pop up the Tools menu screenshot below and select the command Global Resources This pops up the Global Resources dialog Click the menu command Tools Customize to display the Customize dialog Then select the Toolbars tab and check the Global Resources option This switches on the display of the Global Resources toolbar screenshot below Once the toolbar is displayed click the Manage Global Resources icon This pops up the Global Resources dialog The Global Resources XML File Information about global resources that you define is stored in an XML file By default this XML file is called GlobalResources xml and it is stored in the Altova sub folder of the My documents folder This file is set as the default Global Resources XML File for all Altova applications As a result a global resource defined in any application will be available to all Altova applications
326. itch to Global Resource This pops up a dialog in which you can select the global resource These dialogs are described in the section Using Global Resources For a general description of Global Resources see the Global Resources section in this documentation 12 1 3 Reload The Reload command allows you to reload open documents This is useful if an open document has been modified outside XMLSpy If a modification occurs XMLSpy asks whether you wish to reload the file If you reload then any changes you may have made to the file since the last save will be lost This option can be changed in the Options dialog Tools Options 12 1 4 Encoding The Encoding command lets you view the current encoding of the active document XML or non XML and to select a different encoding with which the active document will be saved the next time In XML documents if you select a different encoding than the one in use before the encoding specification in the XML declaration will be adjusted accordingly For two byte and four byte character encodings UTF 16 UCS 2 and UCS 4 you can also specify the byte order to be used for the file Another way to change the encoding of an XML document is to directly edit the encoding attribute of the document s XML declaration Default encodings for existing and new XML and non XML documents can be set in the Encoding tab of the Options dialog Note When saving a document XMLSpy automatically checks the encodi
327. itches between open documents CTRL F6 Cycle through open windows Arrow keys up down Move selection bar Esc Abandon edits close dialog box Return Space bar confirms a selection Alt F4 Closes XMLSpy CTRL F4 Closes active window Alt F 1 Open last file CTRL Double click an element Schema view Display element definition CTRL N File New CTRL O File Open CTRL S File Save CTRL P File Print CTRL A Select All Shift Del Cut or CTRL X CTRL C Copy CTRL V Paste CTRL Z Undo CTRL Y Redo Del Delete Delete item in Schema CTRL F Find F3 Find Next CTRL H Replace 308 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 CTRL I Append Attribute CTRL E In Grid View Append Element in Text View Jump to Start End Tag when cursor is in other member of the pair CTRL T Append Text CTRL D Append CDATA CTRL M Append Comment CTRL SHIFT I Insert Attribute CTRL SHIFT E Insert Element CTRL SHIFT T Insert Text content CTRL SHIFT D Insert CDATA CTRL SHIFT M Insert Comment CTRL ALT I Add Child Attribute CTRL ALT E Add Child Element CTRL ALT T Add Child Text CTRL ALT D Add Child CDATA CTRL ALT M Add Child Comment Hotkeys for Text View CTRL Zoom In CTRL Zoom Out CTRL 0 Reset Zoom CTRL mouse wheel forward Zoom In
328. ite data to the XML file This data is dynamically processed using all the capability available to XSLT stylesheets and instantly produces the output in Authentic View Additionally StyleVision Power Stylesheets can be created to display an editable XML view of a database The StyleVision Power Stylesheet contains information for connecting to the database displaying the data from the database in Authentic View and writing back to the database The Authentic menu contains commands relevant to editing XML documents in Authentic View For a tutorial on Authentic View see the Tutorials section 12 8 1 New Document The Authentic New Document command enables you to open a new XML document template in Authentic View The XML document template is based on a StyleVision Power Stylesheet sps file and is opened by selecting the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Clicking the New Document command opens the Create New Document dialog 290 User Reference Authentic Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Browse for the required SPS file and select it This opens an XML document template in Authentic View Note StyleVision Power Stylesheets are created using Altova StyleVision The StyleVision Power Stylesheet has a Template XML File assigned to it The data in this XML file provides the starting data of the new document template that is opened in Authentic View 12 8 2 Edit Database Data The Authentic Edit Database Data
329. ith or without indentation according to whether the Use Indentation option in this dialog is checked or not When the document is pretty printed with indentation it will be indented according to the settings in the Tabs pane of the Text View Settings dialog If the document is pretty printed every line in the document will be displayed with zero indentation If pretty printing has been switched on with the Use Indentation setting and if you change from Text View to Grid View and back to Text View then the document will be pretty printed automatically Program logo You can turn off the splash screen upon program startup to speed up the application Window title The window title for each document window can contain either the file name only or the full path name After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog Grid Fonts The Grid fonts tab allows you to customize the appearance of text in Grid View Font face You can select the font face and size to be used for displaying the various items in Grid View The same fonts are also used for printing so only TrueType fonts should be selected Size Select the required size If you want to use the same font size for all items check the Use the same for all check box Styles The style and color can be set using the options in this pane The current settings are immediately reflected in the list in the left hand pane so you can preview the way your document will lo
330. k into the interface click the maximize button at top right of the active window 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 303 User Reference User Manual 12 11 Tools Menu The tools menu allows you to Compare any two files to check for differences Compare any two folders to check for differences Define global resources Change the active configuration for global resources in XMLSpy Customize your version of XMLSpy define your own toolbars keyboard shortcuts menus and macros Define global XMLSpy settings 12 11 1 Global Resources The Global Resources command pops up the Global Resources dialog screenshot below in which you can Specify the Global Resources XML File to use for global resources Add file folder and database global resources or aliases Specify various configurations for each global resource alias Each configuration maps to a specific resource How to define global resources is described in detail in the section Defining Global Resources Note The Altova Global Resources dialog can also be accessed via the Global Resources toolbar Tools Customize Toolbars Global Resources 304 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 11 2 Active Configuration Mousing over the Active Configuration menu item rolls out a submenu containing all the configurations defined in the currently active Global Resources XML File screensho
331. l 2 Click the Append AND or Append OR button This appends an empty criterion for the query shown below 4 Enter the expression for the criterion An expression consists of i a field name available from the associated combo box ii an operator available from the associated combo box and iii a value to be entered directly For details of how to construct expressions see the Expressions in criteria section 5 If you wish to add another criterion click the Append AND or Append OR button according to which logical operator AND or OR you wish to use to join the two criteria Then add the new criterion For details about the logical operators see the section Re ordering criteria in DB Queries 160 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Expressions in criteria Expressions in DB Query criteria consist of a field name an operator and a value The available field names are the child elements of the selected top level data table the names of these fields are listed in a combo box see screenshot above The operators you can use are listed below Equal to lt gt Not equal to lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to LIKE Phonetically alike NOT LIKE Phonetically not alike IS NULL Is empty NOT NULL Is not empty If IS NULL or NOT NULL is selected the Value field is disabled Values must be entered wit
332. l To use the Share from Source Control command you must have the Check in out rights to the project you are sharing from To share a file from source control do the following 1 In the Project window select the file you want to share and select Project Source Control Share from Source Control 2 In the Projects list select the project folder that contains the file you want to share 250 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 In the Files to share list box select the file you want to share and click the Share button The file will be removed from the Files to share list 4 Click the Close button to continue Branch after share The Branch After Share option shares the file and creates a new branch to create a separate version Show History The Show History command displays the history of a file under source control and allows you to view detailed history info of previous versions of a file view differences and retrieve previous versions of the file To show the history of a file do the following 1 Click on the file in the Project window 2 Select the menu option Project Source control Show History A dialog box prompting for more information may appear this example uses Visual Source Safe 3 Select the appropriate entries and confirm with OK 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 251 User Reference User Manual This dialog box provides various way of comparing and ge
333. l and click the Split vertically icon Your table will look like this 5 Now place the cursor in the cell below the cell containing Telephone and click the Split horizontally icon Then type in the column headers Office and Home Your table will now look like this Now you will have to split the horizontal width of each cell in the Telephone column 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 155 Authentic User Manual You can also add and delete columns and rows and vertically align cell content using the table editing icons The CALS HTML table editing icons are described in the section titled CALS HTML Table Editing Icons Moving among cells in the table To move among cells in the CALS HTML table use the Up Down Right and Left arrow keys Entering data in a cell To enter data in a cell place the cursor in the cell and type in the data Formatting text Text in a CALS HTML table as with other text in the XML document must be formatted using XML elements or attributes To add an element highlight the text and double click the required element in the Elements Entry Helper To specify an attribute value place the cursor within the text fragment and enter the required attribute value in the Attributes Entry Helper After formatting the header text bold your table will look like this The text above was formatted by highlighting the text and double clicking the element strong for which a global temp
334. l also notice that if you are online your Altova product contains many useful functions these are unrelated to the license metering technology 358 License Information Intellectual Property Rights 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 3 Intellectual Property Rights The Altova Software and any copies that you are authorized by Altova to make are the intellectual property of and are owned by Altova and its suppliers The structure organization and code of the Software are the valuable trade secrets and confidential information of Altova and its suppliers The Software is protected by copyright including without limitation by United States Copyright Law international treaty provisions and applicable laws in the country in which it is being used Altova retains the ownership of all patents copyrights trade secrets trademarks and other intellectual property rights pertaining to the Software and that Altova s ownership rights extend to any images photographs animations videos audio music text and applets incorporated into the Software and all accompanying printed materials Notifications of claimed copyright infringement should be sent to Altova s copyright agent as further provided on the Altova Web Site Altova software contains certain Third Party Software that is also protected by intellectual property laws including without limitation applicable copyright laws as described in detail at http www altova com legal_3rdpar
335. l attribute click Yes The attribute is added as a reference XInclude and xml base When XInclude s include element is replaced by the XML file specified in the href attribute of 84 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 the include element the top level element of the parsed XML document is included with an xml base attribute If this XML document is going to be validated then the schema must define an xml base attribute on the relevant element s 3 3 8 Back and Forward Moving through Positions The Back and Forward commands in Schema View enable you to move through previously viewed positions in Schema View This is useful because while clicking through schema components in Schema View you might wish to view a previously viewed component Clicking the Back button once in the toolbar takes you to the previously viewed position By repeatedly clicking the Back button you can view up to 500 of the last visited positions After moving back through previous positions you can move forward through these positions by using the Forward button in the toolbar The shortcut keys for the two commands are Back Alt Left Arrow Forward Alt Right Arrow Back Forward versus Undo Redo Note that the Back and Forward commands are not the same as the Undo Ctrl Z and Redo Ctrl Y commands These two sets of commands make up two different series of steps Clicking the Back command once takes you to th
336. last Jones return concat first last Note It is not an error if an external XQuery variable or XSLT parameter is defined in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog but is not used in the XQuery document Neither is it an error if an XSLT parameter or external XQuery variable is defined in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog but is not used in an XSLT transformation 12 7 4 XQuery Execution The XSL XQuery XQuery Execution command executes an XQuery document It can be invoked when an XQuery or XML file is active When invoked from an XML file it opens a dialog asking for an XQuery file to associate with the XML file You can also select a file via a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button Automating XQuery executions with AltovaXML 2011 AltovaXML is a free application which contains Altova s XML Validator XSLT 1 0 XSLT 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 engines It can be used from the command line via a COM interface in Java programs and in NET applications to validate XML documents transform XML documents using XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 stylesheets and execute XQuery documents 2011 Altova GmbH XSL XQuery Menu 287 User Reference User Manual XQuery execution tasks can therefore be automated with the use of AltovaXML For example you can create a batch file that calls AltovaXML to execute a set of XQue
337. late exists that specifies bold as the font weight The text formatting becomes immediately visible Please note For text formatting to be displayed in Authentic View a global template with the required text formatting must have been created in StyleVision for the element in question CALS HTML Table Editing Icons The commands required to edit CALS HTML tables are available as icons in the toolbar and are listed below Note that no corresponding menu commands exist for these icons For a full description of when and how CALS HTML Tables are to be used see CALS HTML Tables Insert table The Insert Table command inserts a CALS HTML table at the current cursor position Delete table The Delete table command deletes the currently active table Append row The Append row command appends a row to the end of the currently active table Append column 156 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The Append column command appends a column to the end of the currently active table Insert row The Insert row command inserts a row above the current cursor position in the currently active table Insert column The Insert column command inserts a column to the left of the current cursor position in the currently active table Join cell left The Join cell left command joins the current cell current cursor position with the cell to the left The tags of both cells remain i
338. lay 88 editing data in an XML DB 291 editing DB data in 290 editing XML in 106 entering attribute values 143 entering data in 141 entities in 141 entry helpers 136 entry helpers in 90 formating text in 86 inserting entities in 143 inserting nodes 138 interface 85 main window in 88 markup display in 86 88 opening an XML document in 135 opening new XML file in 289 overview of GUI 85 paste as XML Text 94 printing an XML document from 144 removing nodes 138 special characters in 141 SPS Tables 150 switching to 297 tables SPS and XML 150 tables in 138 toolbar icons 86 tutorial 134 usage of important features 146 usage of XML tables 151 XML table icons 155 XML tables 151 Authentic View template 135 Authentic XML 132 Auto complete Index 2011 Altova GmbH 372 Auto complete text view enable disable 315 Auto hiding windows 9 Automatic validation 314 B Back in Schema View 84 Background status updates 208 status updates increase interval 194 Background Information 348 backwards compatibility of XSLT 2 0 Engine 334 Base type modifying 70 Big endian 319 Bookmark 324 Bookmark margin 299 Bookmarks inserting and removing 236 navigating 236 Bookmarks in Text View 44 Browser 316 View 297 Browser menu 301 Browser View 97 301 back 301 font size 301 forward 301 refresh content 301 separa
339. le in Authentic View 135 Templates of XML documents in Authentic View 289 Text editing in Authentic View 146 find and replace 236 finding in document 235 font 317 formatting in Authentic View 146 pretty printing 235 Text view 42 296 and commenting in XML documents 103 and empty lines in XML documents 103 auto complete enable disable 315 bookmarks in 44 editing in 25 Entry helpers in 49 font properties 42 formatting of text 42 indentation 42 indentation in 44 intelligent editing features 47 line numbering in 44 schema fonts 316 source folding in 44 special editing features for XML documents 103 word wrapping 42 Text View Settings dialog 299 Tile horizontally 322 vertically 322 Toggle 322 323 Toolbar 15 activate deactivate 305 add command to 304 create new 305 reset toolbar amp menu commands 305 2011 Altova GmbH Index 381 Toolbar 15 show large icons 312 Tools menu 303 Tooltip show 312 show shortcuts in 312 Topic view on TOC 324 Transformation see XSLT transformation 282 Turn off automatic validation 314 Tutorial example files 18 goals 18 Tutorials location of installed files 16 type extension in XML document 24 U UCS 2 319 Undo command 231 Unicode support in Altova products 352 Unicode support in Altova products 352 353 Unselected 298 Update background status updates 208
340. le the active file in the Main Window 3 Select the menu option Project Add active and related files to project Two files are added to the project CompanyLast xml and AddressLast xsd Note that files 2011 Altova GmbH Project Management 39 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual referenced with Processing instructions such as XSLT files do not qualify as related files 4 Select the menu option Project Save Project and save the project under the name Tutorial Adding files to the project You can add other files to the project as well Do this as follows 1 Click on any open XML file with the xml file extension other than CompanyLast xml to make that XML file the active file If no other XML file is open open one or create a new XML file 2 Select the menu option Project Add active file to project The XML file is added to the XML Files folder on the basis of its xml file type 3 In the same way add an HTML file and XSD file say the Company html and AddressFirst xsd files to the project These files will be added to the HTML Files folder and DTD Schemas folder respectively 4 Save the project either by selecting the menu option Project Save Project or by selecting any file or folder in the Project Window and clicking the Save icon in the toolbar or File Save Please note Alternatively you can right click a project folder and select Add Active File to add the active file to that specific folder Other use
341. le work around solution in an upcoming maintenance release or update which is made available at certain times at Altova s sole discretion If Altova in its discretion requests written verification of an error or malfunction discovered by you or requests supporting example files that exhibit the Software problem you shall promptly provide such verification or files by email telecopy or overnight mail setting forth in reasonable detail the respects in which the Software fails to perform You shall use reasonable efforts to cooperate in diagnosis or study of errors Altova may include error corrections in maintenance releases updates or new major releases of the Software Altova is not obligated to fix errors that are immaterial Immaterial errors are those that do not significantly impact use of the Software as determined by Altova in its sole discretion Whether or not you have purchased the Support amp Maintenance Package technical support only covers issues or questions resulting directly out of the operation of the Software and Altova will not provide you with generic consultation assistance or advice under any circumstances Updating Software may require the updating of software not covered by this Software License Agreement before installation Updates of the operating system and application software not specifically covered by this Software License Agreement are your responsibility and will not be provided by Altova under this Softwar
342. les having the specified extension Validating and checking a folder for well formedness To check the files in a folder for well formedness or to validate them select the folder and then click the Check well formedness or Validate icon hotkeys F7 or F8 respectively All the files that are visible in the folder are checked If a file is malformed or invalid then this file is opened in the main window allowing you to edit it Correct the error and restart the process to recheck the rest of the folder Note that you can select discontinuous files in the folder by holding Ctrl and clicking the files singly Only these files are then checked when you press F7 or F8 Updating the contents of the project folder Files may be added or deleted from the web folder at any time To update the folder view right click the external folder and select the context menu option Refresh Deleting folders and files Since it is the Web folder that has been added to the project it is only the Web folder and not files within it that can be deleted from the project You can delete a Web folder from a project by either i right clicking the folder and selecting Delete or ii selecting the folder and pressing the Delete key This only deletes the folder from the Project view it does not delete anything on the web server Note Right clicking a single file and pressing the Delete key does not delete a file from the Project window You have to delete it physic
343. list with a icon to the left of the component name Clicking on this icon opens the Content Model View for that global component Alternatively i select a component and then select the menu option Schema design Display Diagram or ii double click on a component s name in the Component Navigator which is the entry helper located by default at top right Note that only one content model in the schema can be open at a time When a content model is open you 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 59 Editing Views User Manual can jump to the content model of a component within the current content model by holding down Ctrl and double clicking the required component The content model is displayed in the Content Model View as a tree see screenshot below You can configure the appearance of the tree in the Schema Display Configuration dialog menu item Schema design Configure view Note the following editing features of Content Model View Each level of elements or element groups in the tree is joined to adjacent levels with a compositor Drag and drop functionality enables you to move tree objects compositors elements element groups around You can use keyboard shortcuts to copy Ctrl c and paste Ctrl v tree objects You can add objects compositors elements and element groups via the context menu right click an object You can sort sibling components by selecting the sibling components you wish t
344. llOrg xml change the title of Joe Martin in Marketing to Marketing Manager Europe amp Asia Do this as follows 1 Place the cursor where the ampersand is to be inserted 2 Double click the entity listed as amp This inserts an ampersand screenshot below Note The Entities Entry Helper is not context sensitive All available entities are displayed no matter where the cursor is positioned This does not mean that an entity can be inserted at all locations in the document If you are not sure then validate the document after inserting the entity XML Validate XML F8 Defining your own entities As a document editor you can define your own document entities How to do this is described in the section Defining Entities in Authentic View 7 1 7 Printing the Document A printout from Authentic View of an XML document preserves the formatting seen in Authentic View To print NanonullOrg xml do the following 1 Switch to Hide Markup mode if you are not already in it You must do this if you do not want markup to be printed 2 Select File Print Preview to see a preview of all pages Shown below is part of a print preview page reduced by 50 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View Tutorial 145 Authentic User Manual Notice that the formatting of the page is the same as that in Authentic View 3 To print the file click File Print Note that you can also print a version of the document that displays markup To do th
345. lly use right to left writing systems This is due to the fact that only the Hebrew and Arabic versions of Windows NT contains support for rendering and editing right to left text on the operating system layer 354 Technical Data Internet Usage 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 5 Internet Usage Altova applications will initiate Internet connections on your behalf in the following situations If you click the Request evaluation key code in the Registration dialog Help Software Activation the three fields in the registration dialog box are transferred to our web server by means of a regular http port 80 connection and the free evaluation key code is sent back to the customer via regular SMTP e mail If you use the URL mode of the Open dialog box to open a document directly from a URL File Open Switch to URL that document is retrieved through a http port 80 connection This functionality is available in XMLSpy and Authentic Desktop If you open an XML document that refers to an XML Schema or DTD and the document is specified through a URL it is also retrieved through a http port 80 connection once you validate the XML document This may also happen automatically upon opening a document if you have instructed the application to automatically validate files upon opening in the File tab of the Options dialog Tools Options This functionality is available in XMLSpy and Authentic Desktop If yo
346. lowing 1 Select the menu option Project Add External Web Folder to Project This opens the Add Web Folder to Project dialog box screenshot below 2 Click in the Server URL field and enter the URL of the server URL If the server is a Microsoft SharePoint Server check this option See the Folders on a Microsoft SharePoint Server section below for further information about working with files on this type of server 3 If the server is password protected enter your User ID and password in the User and Password fields 4 Click Browse to connect to the server and view the available folders 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 259 User Reference User Manual 5 Click the folder you want to add to the project view The Open button only becomes active once you do this The URL of the folder now appears in the File URL field 6 Click Open to add the folder to the project 7 Click the plus icon to view the folder contents 260 User Reference Project Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Filtering folder contents To filter the contents of a folder right click the folder and select Properties from the context menu In the Properties dialog that pops up click in the File Extensions field and enter the file extensions of the file types you want to see for example XML and XSD files Separate each file type with a semicolon for example xml xsd sps The Project window will now show that folder only with fi
347. lpers for each document type are described in the description of that document type 2 The current view Since the editing mechanisms in the different views are different the entry helpers are designed so as to be compatible with the editing mechanism in the relevant views For example In Text View an element can only be inserted at the cursor location point so the entry helper is designed to insert an element when the element is double clicked But in Grid View an element can be inserted before the selected node appended after it or added as a child node so the Elements entry helper in Grid View has three tabs for Insert Append and Add as Child with each tab containing the elements available for that particular operation A general description of entry helpers in each type of view is given in Editing Views Further document type related differences within a view are noted in the description of the individual document types for example XML entry helpers and XQuery entry helpers 14 Introduction The Graphical User Interface GUI 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Note the following You can turn the display of entry helpers on or off with the menu option Window Entry Helpers 1 1 5 Output Window Messages The Messages Window displays messages about actions carried out in XMLSpy as well as errors and other output For example if an XML XML Schema DTD or XQuery document is validated and is valid a successful v
348. lt editor for XQuery files activate the Use XMLSpy as default editor check box 2011 Altova GmbH XQuery 127 XSLT and XQuery User Manual 6 2 2 XQuery Entry Helpers There are three Entry Helpers in the XQuery Mode of Text View XQuery Keywords blue XQuery Variables purple and XQuery Functions olive Note the following points The color of items in the three Entry Helpers are different and correspond to the syntax coloring used in the text These colors cannot be changed The listed keywords and functions are those supported by the Altova XQuery Engine The variables are defined in the XQuery document itself When a and a character are entered in Text View the character is entered in the Variables Entry Helper unless a variable consisting of exactly that character exists As soon as a variable name that is being entered matches a variable name that already exists the newly entered variable name disappears from the Entry Helper To navigate in any Entry Helper click an item in the Entry Helper and then use either the scrollbar mouse wheel or page down and page up to move up and down the list To insert any of the items listed in the Entry Helpers into the document place the cursor at the required insertion point and double click the item In XQuery some character strings represent both a keyword and a function empty unordered and except These strings are always entered as keywords in blue
349. ltova GmbH File Menu 229 User Reference User Manual 12 1 8 Print Ctrl P The Print command opens the Print dialog box in which you can select printer options The currently active document as seen in the current view can then be printed 12 1 9 Print Preview Print Setup The Print Preview command opens the Print dialog box Click the Preview button to display a print preview of the currently active document In Print Preview mode the Print Preview toolbar at top left of the preview window provides print and preview related options The preview can be magnified or miniaturized using the the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons When the page magnification is such that an entire page length fits in a preview window then the One Page Two Page button toggles the preview to one or two pages at a time The Next Page and Previous Page buttons can be used to navigate among the pages The toolbar also contains buttons to print all pages and to close the preview window The Print Setup command displays the printer specific Print Setup dialog box in which you specify such printer settings as paper format and page orientation These settings are applied to all subsequent print jobs The screenshot above shows the Print Setup dialog in which an HP LaserJet 4 printer attached to a parallel port LPT1 is selected Note To enable background colors and images in Print Preview do the following i In the Tools menu of Internet Explorer cli
350. ltova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 specified does not exist a dialog box opens prompting you to create it Click Yes to confirm the new folder 4 The Open dialog now pops up screenshot below 5 Click the application project file you wish to create and click Open The selected application project will open in XMLSpy and the file is placed under source control Source control symbols Folders and files display certain symbols the meanings of which are given below Checked in Available for check out Checked out by another user Not available for check out Checked out locally Can be edited and checked in Enable Source Control The Enable Source Control command allows you to enable or disable source control for a XMLSpy project Selecting this option on any file or folder enables disables source control for the whole project Enabling Source Control for a project To enable source control for a project do the following 1 Click on any file or folder in the Project window 2 Select the menu option Project Source Control Enable Source Code Control The previous check in out status of the various files are retrieved and displayed in the Project window 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 243 User Reference User Manual Disabling Source Control for a project To disable source control for a project select the menu option Project Source Control Enable Source Control You are now prompted if you want to remove the
351. lts the Find in Files window and the XPath window which shows XPath evaluation results The initial setting is for them to open at below the Main Window The Output Windows command lets you switch the Output Windows on or off The Output Windows window is dockable Dragging on its title bar detaches it from its current position and makes it a floating window Click right on the title bar to allow docking or to hide the window 2011 Altova GmbH Window Menu 323 User Reference User Manual For a complete description of Output Windows see Output Windows in the section Text View 12 12 8 Project and Entry Helpers This command toggles on and off the display of the Project Window and the Entry Helpers together 12 12 9 All On Off This command lets you switch all dockable windows on or off the Project Window the Info Window the three Entry Helper Windows the Output Windows This is useful if you want to hide all non document windows quickly to get the maximum viewing area for the document you are working on 12 12 10Currently Open Window List This list shows all currently open windows and lets you quickly switch between them You can also use the Ctrl TAB or CTRL F6 keyboard shortcuts to cycle through the open windows 324 User Reference Help Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 13 Help Menu The Help menu contains all commands required to get help or more information on
352. ly 12 12 2 322 Tile Vertically 12 12 3 322 Project Window 12 12 4 322 Info Window 12 12 5 322 Entry Helpers 12 12 6 322 Output Windows 12 12 7 323 Project and Entry Helpers 12 12 8 323 All On Off 12 12 9 8 Altova XMLSpy 2011 323 Currently Open Window List 12 12 10 324 Help Menu 12 13
353. mediately Additionally the linked HTML file can be opened in multiple browsers via the CSS Info window thus enabling changes in the CSS document to be viewed in multiple browsers The CSS Info window lists the imported CSS stylesheets thus giving you an overview of the import structure of the active CSS stylesheet Note the following usage points Only one HTML file can be linked to the active CSS document Do this by clicking the icon to the right of the Linked HTML item then selecting the command Set Link to HTML and browsing for the required HTML file The linked HTML file will be listed under the Linked HTML item in the Info window see screenshot below Creating this link does not modify the CSS document or the HTML document in any way The link serves to set up an HTML file to which the active CSS document can be applied for 176 HTML CSS JSON CSS 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 testing Double clicking the Linked HTML file listing opens the HTML file in XMLSpy The toolbar icons enable you to horizontally and vertically tile the CSS document and the HTML file When changes to the CSS document are saved the HTML file that is open in XMLSpy can be automatically updated To enable these automatic updates check the Update Linked HTML Browser check box Note that these updates will only occur if the HTML file contains a reference to the CSS document being edited To change the linked HTML file
354. medies to prevent such actions and to recover lost profits damages and costs c LiveUpdate Altova provides a new LiveUpdate notification service to you which is free of charge Altova may use your internal network and Internet connection for the purpose of transmitting license related data to an Altova operated LiveUpdate server to validate your license at appropriate intervals and determine if there is any update available for you d Use of Data The terms and conditions of the Privacy Policy are set out in full at http www altova com privacy and are incorporated by reference into this Software License Agreement By your acceptance of the terms of this Software License Agreement and or use of the Software you authorize the collection use and disclosure of information collected by Altova for the purposes provided for in this Software License Agreement and or the Privacy Policy Altova has the right in its sole discretion to amend this provision of the Software License Agreement and or Privacy Policy at any time You are encouraged to review the terms of the Privacy Policy as posted on the Altova Web site from time to time e Notice to European Users Please note that the information as described in paragraph 7 d above may be transferred outside of the European Economic Area for purposes of processing analysis and review by Altova Inc a company located in Beverly Massachusetts U S A or its subsidiaries or Altova s subsidia
355. menu with a list of all configurations in the Global Resources XML File pops out Select the required configuration In the combo box of the Global Resources toolbar screenshot below select the required configuration The Global Resources toolbar can be toggled on and off with the menu command Tools Customize Toolbars Global Resources The XSLT file will be changed immediately In this way by changing the active configuration you can change source files that are assigned via a global resource 188 Projects 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 10 Projects A project is a collection of files that are related to each other in some way you determine For example in the screenshot below a project named Examples collects the files for various examples in separate example folders each of which can be organized further into sub folders Within the Examples project for instance the OrgChart example folder is organized further into sub folders for XML XSL and Schema files Projects thus enable you to gather together files that are used together and to access them quicker Additionally you can define schemas and XSLT files for individual folders thus enabling the batch processing of files in a folder This section describes how to create and edit projects and how to use projects 2011 Altova GmbH Creating and Editing Projects 189 Projects User Manual 10 1 Creating and Editing Projects Projects are ma
356. mercial items and only with those rights as are granted to all other end users under the terms and conditions set forth in this Software License Agreement Manufacturer is Altova GmbH Rudolfsplatz 13a 9 A 1010 Vienna Austria EU You may not use or otherwise export or re export the Software or Documentation except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Software was obtained In particular but without limitation the Software or Documentation may not be exported or re exported i into or to a national or resident of any U S embargoed country or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Department of Commerce s Table of Denial Orders By using the Software you represent and warrant that you are not located in under control of or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list 10 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE The Software may contain third party software which requires notices and or additional terms and conditions Such required third party software notices and or additional terms and conditions are located at our Website at http www altova com legal_3rdparty html and are made a part of and incorporated by reference into this Agreement By accepting this Agreement you are also accepting the additional terms and conditions if any set forth therein 11 GENERAL PROVISIONS If you are located in the European Union and are using the So
357. mit a rule screenshot above turns bold when the cursor is placed either before or after one of the curly braces This indicates clearly where the definition of a particular rule starts and ends CSS outline The CSS Outline entry helper screenshots below provides an outline of the document in terms of its selectors Clicking a selector in the CSS Outline highlights it in the document In the screenshot at left below the selectors are unsorted and are listed in the order in which they appear in the document In the screenshot at right the Alphabetical Sorting feature has been toggled on using the toolbar icon and the selectors are sorted alphabetically You should note the following points i For evaluating the alphabetical order of selectors all parts of the selector are considered including the period hash and colon characters ii If the CSS document contains several selectors grouped together to define a single rule e g h4 h5 h6 then each selector in the group is listed separately 174 HTML CSS JSON CSS 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The icons in the toolbar of the CSS Outline entry helper from left to right do the following Toggles automatic synchronization with the document on and off When auto synchronization is switched on selectors are entered in the entry helper even as you type them into the document Synchronizes the entry helper with the current state of the document Toggles alphab
358. n Text View 42 Wrap word wrap enable disable 298 X XInclude 231 inserting in Grid View 231 inserting in Text View 231 inserting in XML document 103 XML Oasis catalog 267 XML DB loading new data row into Authentic View 291 loading new XML data row 157 XML document assigning to XSLT stylesheet 287 creating new 22 editing in Text View 25 generating from DTD 114 generating from XML Schema Enterprise and Professional editions 115 opening in Authentic View 135 XML document creation tutorial 22 XML documents 98 and commenting in Text View 103 and empty lines in Text View 103 and XPath expression of a node 103 and XQuery 110 assigning schemas incl DTDs 101 automatic validation 99 automating XQuery executions of 110 automating XSLT transformations of 110 checking validity of 29 checking well formedness 101 default views of 99 editing in Authentic View 106 editing in Grid View Enterprise and Professional editions 105 encoding of 112 evaluating XPath expressions on 112 generating schemas from 112 importing and exporting text 112 inserting file paths in 103 inserting XInclude 103 opening 99 saving 99 searching and replacing in 112 Text View editing features for 103 transforming with XSLT 110 validating 101 XML file generate from DTD or XML Schema 272 XML menu 264 XML Parser about 350 XML Schema also see Schema 271 as
359. n an element or attribute is optional according to the referenced schema a prompt of type add element attribute is displayed Clicking the prompt adds the element and places the cursor for data entry If there are multiple optional nodes the prompt add is displayed Clicking the prompt displays a menu of the optional nodes 3 4 4 Authentic View Entry Helpers There are three entry helpers in Authentic View for Elements Attributes and Entities They are displayed as windows down the right side of the Authentic View interface see screenshot below 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View 91 Editing Views User Manual The Elements and Attributes Entry Helpers are context sensitive i e what appears in the entry helper depends on where the cursor is in the document The entities displayed in the Entities Entry Helper are not context sensitive all entities allowed for the document are displayed no matter where the cursor is Each of the entry helpers is described separately below Elements Entry Helper The Elements Entry Helper consists of two parts The upper part containing an XML tree that can be toggled on and off using the Show XML tree check box The XML tree shows the ancestors up to the document s root element for the current element When you click on an element in the XML tree elements corresponding to that element as described in the next item in this list appear in the lower part of the Elements Entry Helpe
360. n do the following in the Define Entities dialog Append entities Insert entities Delete entities Sort entities by the alphabetical value of any column by clicking the column header clicking once sorts in ascending order twice in descending order Resize the dialog box and the width of columns Locking Once an entity is used in the XML document it is locked and cannot be edited in the Define Entities dialog Locked entities are indicated by a lock symbol in the first column Locking an entity ensures that the XML document valid with respect to entities The document would be invalid if an entity is referenced but not defined Duplicate entities are flagged Limitations of entities An entity contained within another entity is not resolved either in the dialog Authentic View or XSLT output and the ampersand character of such an entity is displayed in its escaped form i e amp amp External unparsed entities that are not image files are not resolved in Authentic View If an image in the design is defined to read an external unparsed entity and has its URI set to be an entity name for example logo then this entity name can be defined in the Define Entities dialog see screenshot above as an external unparsed entity with a value that resolves to the URI of the image file as has been done for the logo entity in the screenshot above 7 2 6 Images in Authentic View Authentic View allows
361. n the new cell the column headers remain unchanged and are concatenated Join cell right The Join cell right command joins the current cell current cursor position with the cell to the right The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell Join cell below The Join cell below command joins the current cell current cursor position with the cell below The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell Join cell above The Join cell above command joins the current cell current cursor position with the cell above The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell Split cell horizontally The Split cell Horizontally command creates a new cell to the right of the currently active cell The size of both cells is now the same as the original cell Split cell vertically The Split cell Vertically command creates a new cell below the currently active cell Align top This command aligns the cell contents to the top of the cell Center vertically This command centers the cell contents 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 157 Authentic User Manual Align bottom This command aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell Table properties The Table properties command opens the Table Properties dialog box This icon is only made active for HTML tables it cannot be clicked for CALS tables 7 2 3 Editing a DB In Authentic View you can edit database D
362. n which the Authentic View document is based Entities Entry Helper The Entities Entry Helper allows you to insert an entity in your document Entities can be used to insert special characters or text fragments that occur often in a document such as the name of a company To insert an entity place the cursor at the point in the text where you want to have the entity inserted then double click the entity in the Entities Entry Helper Note An internal entity is one that has its value defined within the DTD An external entity is one that has its value contained in an external source e g another XML file Both internal and external entities are listed in the Entities Entry Helper When you insert an entity whether internal or external the entity not its value is inserted into the XML text If the entity is an internal entity Authentic View displays the value of the entity If the entity is an external entity Authentic View displays the entity and not its value This means for example that an XML file that is an external entity will be shown in the Authentic View display as an entity its content does not replace the entity in the Authentic View display You can also define your own entities in Authentic View and these will also be displayed in the entry helper see Define Entities in the Editing in Authentic View section 3 4 5 Authentic View Context Menus Right clicking on some selected document content or node pops up a context
363. naged via the Project Window screenshot below and the Project menu One project can be open at a time in the application The open project is displayed in the Project Window Creating new projects opening existing projects A new project is created with the menu command Project New Project An existing project is opened with the menu command Project Open Project The newly opened project whether new or existing replaces the previously opened project in the Project Window If the previously opened project contains unsaved changes indicated by an asterisk next to the folder name see screenshot below you are asked whether you wish to save these changes Naming and saving projects A new project is named when you save it A project is saved with the Project Save Project command and has the spp file extension After a project has been modified the project must be saved for the modifications to be stored Note that a project indicated by the top level folder in the Project Window can only be re named by changing its name in Windows File Explorer the name cannot be changed in the GUI The names of sub folders however can be changed in the GUI Project structure A project has a tree structure of folders and files Folders and files can be created at any level and to an unlimited depth Do this by selecting a folder in the Project Window and then using the commands in the Project menu or context menu to add folders files or resources F
364. namespace Some XPath 2 0 functions have the same name as XML Schema datatypes For example for the XPath functions fn string and fn boolean there exist XML Schema datatypes with the same local names xs string and xs boolean So if you were to use the XPath expression string Hello the expression evaluates as fn string Hello not as xs string Hello Schema awareness The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine is schema aware Whitespace in XML document By default the Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine strips all boundary whitespace from boundary whitespace only nodes in the source XML document The removal of this whitespace affects the values that the fn position fn last fn count and fn deep equal functions return For more details see Whitespace only Nodes in XML Document in the XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions section Note If a boundary whitespace only text node is required in the output then insert the required whitespace within one of the two adjoining child elements For example the XML fragment lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt when processed with the XSLT template lt xsl template match para gt lt xsl apply templates gt lt xsl template gt will produce This is bolditalic To get a space between bold and italic in the output insert a space character within either the lt b gt or lt i gt elements in the XML source For example lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt
365. nd Add Child tabs 2011 Altova GmbH Entry Helpers for XML Documents 109 XML User Manual Note that if you add an internal entity you will need to save and reopen your document before the entity appears in the Entities entry helper 110 XML Processing with XSLT and XQuery 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 4 7 Processing with XSLT and XQuery XML documents can be processed with XSLT or XQuery documents to produce output documents XMLSpy has built in XSLT 1 0 XSLT 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 processors The following processing related features are available in the GUI Assigning XSLT stylesheets Go to XSLT XSLT parameters and XQuery variables XSLT transformations XQuery executions Automating XML tasks with AltovaXML Assigning XSLT stylesheets You can assign an XSLT stylesheet to an XML document via the XSL XQuery Assign XSL command browse for the file in the dialog screenshot below that pops up The assignment is entered in the XML document as a processing instruction PI having the standard XSLT target defined by the W3C xml stylesheet This assignment is used when an XSLT transformation is invoked XSL XQuery XSL Transformation Additionally an XSLT for FO stylesheet can be assigned with the XSL XQuery Assign XSL FO command browse for the file in the dialog screenshot below that pops up The assignment is entered in the XML document as a processing instruction PI havi
366. nd is used i for transformations of XML to FO to PDF in two steps and ii for one step transformations of FO to PDF Specifying the XSLT processor for the transformation The XSLT engine that will be used for transformations is specified in the XSL tab of the Options dialog The available options are explained in the User Reference section The engine specified in the XSL tab will be used for all XSLT transformations Note that for the XSL FO transformation an additional XSLT engine option is available the XSLT engine that is packaged with some FO processors To select this option select the corresponding radio button at the bottom of the XSL tab see screenshot above Specifying the FO processor The FO processor that will be used for transformations of FO to PDF is specified in the text box at the bottom of the XSL tab of the Options dialog screenshot above XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 and Altova s XSLT engines The XSLT version of a stylesheet is specified in the version attribute of the xsl stylesheet or xsl transform element XMLSpy contains the built in Altova XSLT 1 0 and Altova XSLT 2 0 engines and the appropriate engine is selected according to the value of the version attribute 1 0 or 2 0 XSLT Transformation The XSLT Transformation F8 command can be used in the following scenarios To transform an XML document that is active in the GUI and has an XSLT document assigned to it If no XSLT document is assigned you are prompted
367. new XML file will have a skeletal structure based on the SPS schema The name of the newly created XML file must be assigned when saving the XML file Open an SPS file as an XML document in Text View Command xmlspy exe raw mysps sps Action Opens the file mysps sps as an XML document in Text View The raw flag specifies that the SPS file that follows is to be edited as an XML file Appendices Altova XMLSpy 2011 330 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Appendices These appendices contain technical information about XMLSpy and important licensing information Each appendix contains sub sections as given below Engine Information Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions Extensions Technical Data OS and memory requirements Altova XML Parser Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines Unicode support Internet usage License Information Electronic software distribution Software activation and license metering Copyrights End User License Agreement 2011 Altova GmbH 331 Engine Information Appendices 1 Engine Information This section contains information about implementation specific features of the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine and Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine 332 Engine Information XSLT 1 0 Engine Implementation Information 2011 Altova GmbH Altova X
368. ng specification and opens a dialog box if it cannot recognize the encoding entered by the user Also if your document contains characters that cannot be represented in the selected encoding you will get a warning message when you save your file 12 1 5 Close Close All Close All But Active The Close command closes the active document window If the file was modified indicated by an asterisk after the file name in the title bar you will be asked if you wish to save the file first 2011 Altova GmbH File Menu 223 User Reference User Manual The Close All command closes all open document windows If any document has been modified indicated by an asterisk after the file name in the title bar you will be asked if you wish to save the file first The Close All But Active command closes all open document windows except the active document window If any document has been modified indicated by an asterisk after the file name in the title bar you will be asked if you wish to save the file first 12 1 6 Save Save As Save All The Save Ctrl S command saves the contents of the active document to the file from which it has been opened When saving a document the file is automatically checked for well formedness The file will also be validated automatically if this option has been set in the File tab of the Options dialog Tools Options The XML declaration is also checked for the encoding specification and this enco
369. ng the Altova defined target altova_xslfo This assignment is used when an XSLT for FO transformation is invoked XSL XQuery XS FO Transformation You can also select a global resource to specify the XSLT file A global resource is an alias for a file or folder The target file or folder can be changed within the GUI by changing the active configuration of the global resource via the menu command Tools Active Configuration Global resources therefore enable the assigned XSLT file to be switched from one to another which can be useful for testing How to use global resources is described in the section Altova Global Resources If a previous assignment using either of these PI targets exists then you are asked whether you wish to overwrite the existing assignment Go to XSLT The XSL XQuery Go to XSL command opens the XSLT file that has been assigned to the XML document XSLT parameters and XQuery variables XSLT parameters and XQuery variables can be defined edited and deleted in the dialog that 2011 Altova GmbH Processing with XSLT and XQuery 111 XML User Manual appears on clicking the command XSL XQuery XSLT Parameters XQuery Variables The parameter variable values defined here are used for all XSLT transformations and XQuery executions in XMLSpy However these values will not be passed to external engines such as MSXML For the details of how to use this feature see the User Reference section XSLT transforma
370. nicode MS that has been created by Agfa Monotype for Microsoft This font contains over 50 000 glyphs and covers the entire set of characters specified by the Unicode 2 1 standard It needs 23MB and is included with Microsoft Office 2000 2011 Altova GmbH Unicode Support 353 Technical Data Appendices We highly recommend that you install this font on your system and use it with the application if you are often editing documents in different writing systems This font is not installed with the Typical setting of the Microsoft Office setup program but you can choose the Custom Setup option to install this font In the Examples folder in your application folder you will also find a new XHTML file called Unicode UTF8 html that contains the sentence When the world wants to talk it speaks Unicode in many different languages Wenn die Welt miteinander spricht spricht sie Unicode and writing systems this line has been adopted from the 10th Unicode conference in 1997 and is a beautiful illustration of the importance of Unicode for the XML standard Opening this file will give you a quick impression on what is possible with Unicode and what writing systems are supported by the fonts available on your PC installation 2 4 2 Right to Left Writing Systems Please note that even under Windows NT 4 0 any text from a right to left writing system such as Hebrew or Arabic is not rendered correctly except in those countries that actua
371. nized into the following six groups Element Declarations Elements Model Groups Groups Complex Types Simple Types Attribute Declarations Attributes Attribute Groups Expanding a component type group in the tree displays all the components in that group see screenshot This enables you to easily navigate to a required component If a component has a content model i e if it is an Element Group or Complex Type double clicking it will cause the content model of that component to be displayed in Content Model View in the Main Window If the component does not have a content model i e if it is a Simple Type Attribute or Attribute Group then the component is highlighted in the Schema Overview in the Main Window 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 73 Editing Views User Manual Please note If the component is in an included or imported schema then the included imported schema is opened if it is not already open and either the component s content model is displayed in Content Model View or the component is highlighted in Schema Overview Details Entry Helper The Details Entry Helper is available in Schema View It displays editable information about the compositor or component currently selected in the Main Window If you are editing a schema file which contains database extensions an additional tab with information about the DB extensions may be visible To change the properties of the
372. not be applicable to DTD or XQuery documents Text View The Auto complete option automatically adds unambiguous structural components For example when the closing angular bracket of the start tag of an element is entered then the end tag of that element is automatically added if this option is enabled In Text View Auto completion and entry helpers can be disabled if a file is bigger than the size specified in the Disable Auto completion combo box This is useful if you wish to speed up the editing of large files and can do without the auto completion feature and entry helpers If the file size is bigger than that specified for this option then the Text View context menu contains a toggle command for switching on and off Auto completion and entry helper use So you can always switch these editing aids on and off at any time during editing in the event of files having 316 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 a size greater than the size specified for this option If the value specified for this option is smaller than the size of the opened file locations indicated in error messages will not correctly correspond to the location in Text View After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog View The View tab enables you to customize the XML documents presentation in XMLSpy Pretty print When you select Edit Pretty Print XML Text the XML document will be pretty printed w
373. nshot below the informaltable element and table element have each been defined as both a CALS table as well as an HTML table 2 Select the entry containing the element and table model you wish to insert and click OK 3 In the next dialog screenshot below select the number of columns and rows and specify whether a header and or footer is to be added to the table and whether the table is to extend over the entire available width Click OK when done For the specifications given in the dialog box shown above the following table is created 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 153 Authentic User Manual By using the Table menu commands you can add and delete columns and create row and column joins and splits But to start with you must create the broad structure Formatting tables and entering data The table formatting will already have been assigned in the document design However you might under certain circumstances be able to modify the table formatting These circumstances are as follows The elements corresponding to the various table structure elements must have the relevant CALS or HTML table properties defined as attributes in the underlying XML Schema Only those attributes that are defined will be available for formatting If in the design values have been set for these attributes then you can override these values in Authentic View In the design no style attribute containing CSS style
374. nt 2 Select the context menu option Edit Name and edit the name or select Edit Type and edit the type Alternatively double click the element name and type in the change Creating and editing documentation for a compositor or component You can add documentation to individual compositors and components as a guide for schema editors Do this as follows 1 Right click the compositor or component 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 67 Editing Views User Manual 2 Select the context menu option Edit Annotation This highlights the documentation space below the compositor component in which you can enter descriptive text about the compositor or component In Text View the annotation and annotation documentation elements will have been created and the documentation element will contain the descriptive text you enter Alternatively you can right click the compositor or component and select Whole Annotation Data In the Annotation dialog that opens you can append or insert a documentation item and enter content for it In order to edit pre existing documentation text you can use either of the two methods described above but a quicker method is to double click the annotation in the diagram and edit directly Creating and editing application info for a compositor or component 1 Right click the compositor or component 2 Select the context menu option Whole Annotation Data The Annotation dialog box opens see screensh
375. nt the application uses its built in validating parser the Altova XML Parser to check for well formedness validate the document against a schema if specified and build trees and Infosets The Altova XML Parser is also used to provide intelligent editing help while you edit documents and to dynamically display any validation error that may occur The built in Altova XML Parser implements the Final Recommendation of the W3C s XML Schema specification New developments recommended by the W3C s XML Schema Working Group are continuously being incorporated in the Altova Parser so that Altova products give you a state of the art development environment 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines 351 Technical Data Appendices 2 3 Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines Altova products use the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine and Altova XQuery 1 0 Engines Documentation about implementation specific behavior for each engine is in the section Engine Information in Appendix 1 of the product documentation should that engine be used in the product These three engines are also available in the AltovaXML package which can be downloaded from the Altova website free of charge Documentation for using the engines is available with the AltovaXML package 352 Technical Data Unicode Support 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 4 Unicode Support Unicode is the 16 bit character set extendable to 32 bit defined by th
376. nt para element and experiment with applying the bold and italic elements The stylesheet designer might also have created a toolbar icon to apply an element In the NanonullOrg xml document the bold and italic elements can be applied by clicking the bold and italic icons in the application s Authentic toolbar Removing nodes A node can be removed if its removal does not render the document invalid Removing a node causes a node and all its contents to be deleted A node can be removed using the Remove command in the context menu When the Remove command is highlighted a submenu pops up which contains all nodes that may be removed starting from the selected node and going up to the document s top level node To select a node for removal the cursor can be placed within the node or the node or part of it can be highlighted In the Elements entry helper nodes that can be removed are indicated with the icon A removable node can also be removed by selecting it and pressing the Delete key In the NanonullOrg xml document experiment with removing a few nodes using the mechanisms described You can undo your changes with Ctrl Z Clearing elements Element nodes that are children of elements with mixed content both text and element children can be cleared The entire element can be cleared when the node is selected or when the cursor is placed inside the node as an insertion point A text fragment within the element can be cleared of the elemen
377. nwealth of Massachusetts in connection with any such dispute or claim If you are located outside of the European Union or the United States and are not using the Software in the United States then this Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Austria excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any way to your use of the Software resides in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna in connection with any such dispute or claim This Software License Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded This Software License Agreement contains the entire agreement and understanding of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior written and oral understandings of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof Any notice or other communication given under this Software License Agreement shall be in writing and shall have been properly given by either of us to the other if sen
378. o show the XML tree by checking the Show XML Tree check box at the top of the entry helper see screenshot above The XML tree shows the hierarchy of nodes from the top level element node all the way down to the node selected in the Main Window Attributes entry helper The Attributes entry helper displays the attributes of the element selected in the Main Window and the values of these attributes Attribute values can be entered or edited in the Attributes entry helper Element nodes from the top level element down to the selected element are available for selection in the combo box of the Atributes entry helper Selecting an element from the dropdown list of the combo box causes that element s attributes to be displayed in the entry helper where they can then be edited Entities entry helper The Entities entry helper is not context sensitive and displays all the entities declared for the document Double clicking an entity inserts it at the cursor location How to add entities for a document is described in the section Authentic View Interface Context menu Right clicking at a location in the Authentic View document pops up a context menu relevant to that node location The context menu provides commands that enable you to Insert nodes at that location or before or after the selected node Submenus display lists of nodes that are allowed at the respective insert locations Remove the selected node if this allowed by the schema
379. o Authentic View In the description below related icons are grouped together Show hide XML markup In Authentic View the tags for all some or none of the XML elements or attributes can be displayed either with their names large markup or without names small markup The four markup icons appear in the toolbar and the corresponding commands are available in the Authentic menu Hide markup All XML tags are hidden except those which have been collapsed Double clicking on a collapsed tag which is the usual way to expand it in Hide markup mode will cause the node s content to be displayed and the tags to be hidden Show small markup XML element attribute tags are shown without names Show large markup XML element attribute tags are shown with names 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View 87 Editing Views User Manual Show mixed markup In the StyleVision Power Stylesheet each XML element or attribute can be specified to display as either large or small markup or not to display at all This is called mixed markup mode since some elements can be specified to be displayed with markup and some without markup In mixed markup mode therefore the Authentic View user sees a customized markup Note however that this customization is created by the person who has designed the StyleVision Power Stylesheet It cannot be defined by the Authentic View user Editing dynamic table structures Rows in a dynamic SPS table are repetitions
380. o sort right clicking and selecting the Sort Components command from the context menu You can prioritize two sort criteria i local name and ii component kind You can edit the properties of an object in the Details entry helper compositors elements element groups and the Attributes Identity Constraints pane The Attributes and Identity Constraints of a component are displayed in a pane at the bottom of the Main Window Attributes and Identity Constraints can also be displayed in the Content Model diagram instead of in the Attributes Identity Constraints pane This viewing option can be set in the Schema Display Configuration dialog These features are explained in detail in the subsections of this section and in the tutorial To return to the Schema Overview click the Show Globals icon or select the menu option Schema design Display All Globals Note In Standard Edition Grid View is available as a read only view Editing in Grid View is 60 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 available in the Enterprise and Professional editions Editing in Content Model View Content Model View enables you to quickly define the content model of the following three component types graphically with a few mouse clicks Complex types Element declarations Model groups All other schema components annotations attribute declarations simple types etc do not have a content model
381. ocuments and sends the output to a text file See the AltovaXML documentation for details 270 User Reference XML Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 4 4 Update Entry Helpers The XML Update Entry Helpers command updates the Entry Helper windows by reloading the underlying DTD or Schema If you have modified the XML Schema or DTD that an open XML document is based upon it is advisable to update the Entry Helpers so that the intelligent editing information reflects the changes in the schema 2011 Altova GmbH DTD Schema Menu 271 User Reference User Manual 12 5 DTD Schema Menu The DTD Schema menu contains commands that let you work efficiently with DTDs and XML Schemas This section contains a complete description of all the commands in this menu 12 5 1 Assign DTD The DTD Schema Assign DTD command is enabled when an XML file is active It assigns a DTD to an XML document thus allowing the document to be validated and enabling intelligent editing for the document The command opens the Assign File dialog to let you specify the DTD file you wish to assign You can also select a file via a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button Note that you can make the path of the assigned DTD file relative by clicking the Make Path Relative To check box When you are done your XML document will contain a DOCTYPE declaration that
382. oft com en us vstudio aa718670 aspx A standard installation of Microsoft Source Safe 2005 will work correctly with Altova products Microsoft Team Foundation Server 2008 MSSCCI Provider http www microsoft com downloads Requirements Visual Studio 2008 Team Explorer or Visual Studio 2008 with Team Explorer 2008 A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products Perforce P4V 2008 1 204 Source Control Installing Source Control Systems 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 http www perforce com The Perforce Visual Client P4V offers a choice To install all client features default behavior To install only the SCC Plug in P4SCC feature The default installation will work correctly with all Altova products If the SCC Plug in P4SCC feature is chosen Two SCC functions Show differences and Source control manager will not work The Show differences functionality and the possibility to launch the source control manager will not work because they rely on the non installed features Visual Merge Tool and Visual Client P4V respectively The differencing functionality will need 3rd party software while the launch of the source control manager will only be possible after the explicit installation of the Visual Client P4V After starting your Perforce Visual Client installation specify your own client configuration settings server nam
383. oint in the text double click the entry helper item When an element is inserted via the Elements entry helper its start and end tags are inserted in the document text Mandatory elements are also inserted if this option has been specified in the Options dialog Tools Options Editing When an attribute is inserted via the Attributes entry helper the attribute is inserted at the cursor point together with an equals to sign and quotes to delimit the attribute value The cursor is placed between the quotes so you can start typing in the attribute value directly Note For large files Auto completion and entry helpers can be disabled thus enabling faster loading and editing The threshold file size is specified by the user For more details see the reference section Options Editing 2011 Altova GmbH Grid View 51 Editing Views User Manual 3 2 Grid View Grid View screenshot below shows the hierarchical structure of XML documents and DTDs through a set of nested containers that can be easily expanded and collapsed to get a clear picture of the document s structure In Grid View contents and structure can both be easily manipulated Note In Standard Edition Grid View is available as a read only view Editing in Grid View is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions A hierarchical item such as the XML declaration document type declaration or element containing child elements is represented wi
384. ok After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog Schema Fonts The Schema fonts tab enables you to customize the appearance of text in Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 317 User Reference User Manual Font face You can select the font face and size to be used for displaying the various items in the Schema Design view Size Select the required size If you want to use the same font size for all items click on the Use The Same For All check box Styles The style and color can be set using the options in this pane The current settings are immediately reflected in the list in the left pane so you can preview the way your document will look After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog Text Fonts The Text fonts tab enables you to customize the appearance of text in Text View You can customize the appearance of of text items according to the type of text item For example you can color element names and attribute names differently The text item types are categorized into three groups XML generic XQuery CSS JSON To customize text fonts do the following 1 In the combo box at top left select the type of document for which you wish to customize text fonts On doing this the text item types for that document type appear in the box below the combo box In the screenshot above XML generic has been selected as the documen
385. older for the current user StartUpFolder Full path to Start Up folder for the current user TemplateFolde r Full path to the Template folder for the current user AdminToolsFol der Full path to the file system directory that stores administrative tools for the current user AppDataFolder Full path to the Application Data folder for the current user CommonAppData Folder Full path to the file directory containing application data for all users FavoritesFold er Full path of the Favorites folder for the current user PersonalFolde r Full path to the Personal folder for the current user SendToFolder Full path to the SendTo folder for the current user FontsFolder Full path to the System Fonts folder ProgramFilesF older Full path to the Program Files folder for the current user CommonFilesFo lder Full path to the Common Files folder for the current user WindowsFolder Full path to the Windows folder for the current user SystemFolder Full path to the System folder for the current user CommonAppData Folder Full path to the file directory containing application data for all users 118 DTDs and XML Schemas Catalogs in XMLSpy 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 LocalAppDataF older Full path to the file system directory that serves as the data repository for local nonroaming applications MyPicturesFol der Full path to the MyPictures folder How cat
386. older type 182 toolbar activation 305 using 184 187 using file type and folder type 184 Global Resources XML File 178 Go to File 299 Go to line char 298 Grammar 314 Graphics formats in Authentic View 166 Gray bar 297 Grid fonts 316 Grid view 51 296 297 appending elements and attributes 32 editing XML documents in Enterprise and Professional editions 105 entry helpers in 52 switching to Table View 264 Index 2011 Altova GmbH 376 Grid view 51 296 297 using Entry Helpers 32 GUI description 9 H Help contents 324 index 324 key map 325 search 324 Help menu 324 Help system 324 Hide 322 323 Hide markup 86 88 Hide markup in Authentic View 294 Hotkey 306 HTML 170 HTML documents editing 171 Info window 171 HTML Info window 171 I Icon add to toolbar menu 304 show large 312 Identity constraints 74 defining in Schema View 54 Image formats in Authentic View 166 implementation specific behavior of XSLT 2 0 functions 336 implicit timezone and XPath 2 0 functions 340 Indentation in Text View 235 Indentation guides 299 Indentation in Text View 42 Index help 324 Info window 19 Info Window 13 322 323 for CSS documents 173 for HTML documents 171 Insert row in Authentic View 294 Installation location of example files 16 Installing version control systems 201 Intelligent E
387. olders files and resources that have been added to a project can be deleted or dragged to other locations in the project tree When a new project is created the default project structure organizes the project by file type 190 Projects Creating and Editing Projects 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 XML XSL etc see screenshot below File type extensions are associated with a folder via the property definitions for that folder When a file is added to a folder it is automatically added to the appropriate child folder according to the file type extension For each folder you can define what file type extensions are to be associated with it What can be added to a project Folder files and other resources can be added either to the top level project folder or to a folder at any level in the project There are three types of folders i project folders ii external folders iii external web folders To add an object select the relevant folder and then the required command from the Project menu or context menu of the selected folder The following objects are available for addition to a project folder Project folders green are folders that you add to the project in order to structure the project s contents You can define what file extensions are to be associated with a project folder in the properties of that folder When files are added to a folder they are automatically added to the first child folder that h
388. olders in the sub sections of this section To delete a global resource select it and click Delete After you finish adding editing or deleting make sure to click OK in the Manage Global Resources dialog to save your modifications to the Global Resources XML File Adding a global resource Creating a global resource involves mapping one alias name to one or more resources Each mapping is called a configuration A single alias name can therefore be associated with several resources via different configurations screenshot below 180 Altova Global Resources Defining Global Resources 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 In the Manage Global Resources dialog screenshot above when you click the Add button you can select whether you wish to add a file type or folder type resource How to add and edit each type of resource is described in the sub sections of this section 9 1 1 Files In the Global Resource dialog for Files screenshot below you can add a file resource as follows 1 Enter an alias name 2011 Altova GmbH Defining Global Resources 181 Altova Global Resources User Manual 2 The Configurations pane will have a configuration named Default screenshot above This Default configuration cannot be deleted nor have its name changed You can enter as many additional configurations for the selected alias as you like Add a configuration by clicking the Add Configuration icon and in the Add Configurat
389. ompatible repositories are supported Note The 64 bit version of XMLSpy automatically supports any of the supported 32 bit source control programs mentioned in this documentation When using a 64 bit version of XMLSpy with a 32 bit source control program the Perform background status updates every ms option Tools Options is automatically grayed out and cannot be selected Overview of the Source Control feature The mechanism for placing files in a XMLSpy project under source control is as follows 1 In XMLSpy a project folder containing the files to be placed under source control is created Typically the project folder will correspond to a local folder in which the project files are located The path to the local folder is referred to as the local path 2 In the source control system s database also referred to as source control or repository a folder is created that will contain the files to be placed under source control 3 Project files are added to source control using the command Project Source Control Add to Source Control 4 Source control actions such as checking in to checking out from and removing files from source control can be carried out by using the commands in the Project Source Control submenu The commands in this submenu are listed and described in the Project menu section of the User Reference Note If you wish to change the current source control provider this can be done in any of two
390. oolbar icons when activated Keyboard The Keyboard tab allows you to define or change keyboard shortcuts for any XMLSpy command To assign a new Shortcut to a command 1 Select the All Commands category using the Category combo box 2 Select the command you want to assign a new shortcut to in the Commands list box 3 Click in the Press New Shortcut Key text box and press the shortcut keys that are to activate the command The shortcuts appear immediately in the text box If the shortcut was assigned previously then that function is displayed below the text box 4 Click the Assign button to assign the shortcut The shortcut now appears in the Current Keys list box To clear this text box press any of the control keys CTRL ALT or SHIFT To de assign or delete a shortcut 1 Click the shortcut you want to delete in the Current Keys list box 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Close button to confirm Set accelerator for Currently no function 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 307 User Reference User Manual Currently assigned keyboard shortcuts Hotkeys by key F1 Help Menu F3 Find Next F5 Refresh F7 Check well formedness F8 Validate F10 XSL Transformation CTRL F10 XSL FO Transformation F11 Step into CTRL F11 Step Over Shift F11 Step Out Num Expand Num Collapse Num Expand fully CTRL Num Collapse unselected CTRL G Goto line char CTRL TAB Sw
391. or any removable ancestor element The nodes that may be removed according to the schema are listed in a submenu Insert entities and CDATA sections The entities declared for the document are listed in a submenu CDATA sections can only be inserted withn text Cut copy paste including pasting as XML or text and delete document content Note For more details about the interface see Authentic View Interface 7 1 3 Node Operations There are two major types of nodes you will encounter in an Authentic View XML document element nodes and attribute nodes These nodes are marked up with tags which you can switch on There are also other nodes in the document such as text nodes which are not marked up and CDATA section nodes which are marked up in order to delimit them from surrounding text The node operations described in this section refer only to element nodes and attribute nodes When trying out the operations described in this section it is best to have large markup switched on Note It is important to remember that only same or higher level elements can be inserted before or after the selected element Same level elements are siblings Siblings of a paragraph element would be other paragraph elements but could also be lists a table an image etc Siblings could occur before or after an element Higher level elements are ancestor elements and siblings of ancestors For a paragraph element ancestor elements could
392. or text document In the Open dialog you can select more than one file to open Use the Files of Type combo box to restrict the kind of files displayed in the dialog box The list of available file types can be configured in the File Types tab of the Options dialog Tools Options When an XML file is opened it is checked for well formedness If the file is not well formed you will get a file not well formed error Fix the error and select the menu command XML Check Well Formedness F7 to recheck If you have opted for automatic validation upon opening and the file is invalid you will get an error message Fix the error and select the menu command XML Validate XML F8 to revalidate Selecting files via URLs and Global Resources In several File Open and File Save dialogs you can choose to select the required file or save a file via a URL or a global resource see screenshot below Select the Switch to URL or Switch to Global Resource to go to one of these selection processes 2011 Altova GmbH File Menu 219 User Reference User Manual Selecting files via URLs To select a file via a URL do the following 1 Click the Switch to URL command This switches to the URL mode of the Open dialog screenshot below 2 Enter the URL you want to access in the Server URL field screenshot above If the server is a Microsoft SharePoint Server check the Microsoft SharePoint Server check box See the Microsoft SharePoint S
393. ormed a standard installation of Altova DiffDog the file path to the Altova DiffDog executable is c program files altova diffdog2011 DiffDog exe If Altova DiffDog is installed elsewhere on your system insert the appropriate value when the filepath is required Aigenta Unified SCC 1 0 6 http aigenta com products UnifiedScc aspx The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Aigenta Unified SCC 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Select the Comparison and merging tab and specify the full DiffDog filepath as comparison tool 2011 Altova GmbH SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing 209 Source Control User Manual Borland StarTeam Cross Platform Client 2008 R2 http www borland com us products starteam The following steps integrate Altova DiffDog into Borland Star Team 1 Use the StarTeam client personal options Tools Personal options File Alternate applications 2 Compare utility Enter the DiffDog full path 3 Compare utility options file1 file2 ComponentSoftware CS RCS PRO 5 1 http www componentsoftware com Products RCS The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into ComponentSoftware CS RCS Pro 1 Go to the ComponentSoftware CS RCS Properties 2 In the File Types tab choose a file extension and edit it 3 Enter select the value Custom Tool for the Difference Analysis Tool and browse to insert the DiffDog full path Dynamsoft SourceAnywhere for V
394. orted To access namespace information with XPath 2 0 mechanisms use the fn in scope prefixes fn namespace uri and fn namespace uri for prefix functions Static typing extensions The optional static type checking feature is not supported 1 4 2 Functions Support The table below lists in alphabetical order the implementation specific behavior of certain functions The following general points should be noted In general when a function expects a sequence of one item as an argument and a sequence of more than one item is submitted then an error is returned All string comparisons are done using the Unicode codepoint collation Results that are QNames are serialized in the form prefix localname Function Name Notes 342 Engine Information XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 base uri If external entities are used in the source XML document and if a node in the external entity is specified as the input node argument of the base uri function it is still the base URI of the including XML document that is used not the base URI of the external entity The base URI of a node in the XML document can be modified using the xml base attribute collection The argument is a relative URI that is resolved against the current base URI If the resolved URI identifies an XML file then this XML file is treated as a catalog which references a collection of fil
395. ot below If annotation either documentation or appinfo exists for that element then this is indicated by a corresponding row in the dialog 3 To create an appinfo element click the Append or Insert icon at top left to append or insert a new row respectively 4 In the Kind field of the new row select the app option from the dropdown menu 5 In the Content pane of the dialog enter the script or info that you want to have processed by a processing application 6 Optionally in the Source field you can enter a source URI where further information can be made available to the processing application 68 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Copy XPath of Instance Node The context menu command Copy XPath of Instance Node is enabled for elements and attributes defined within a global element or complex type It copies to the clipboard an XPath expression that locates the selected node Find All References and Rename with All References The two context menu commands Find All References and Rename with All References is enabled for global elements These respectively find and rename the selected global component in the active document and optionally in all schema files related to the active document See Finding and Renaming Globals for details Sorting declarations and references The Sort command is enabled when a node element or attribute has multiple declarations or references The sorting
396. ot element If the schema contains more than one global element these are listed and the root element required for the sample XML file can be selected from the list 12 5 9 Flush Memory Cache The DTD Schema Flush Memory Cache command flushes all cached schema DTD and XML Schema documents from memory To speed up validation and intelligent editing XMLSpy caches recently used schema documents and external parsed entities in memory Information from these cached documents is also displayed when the Go to Definition command is invoked Flush the memory cache if memory is tight on your system or if you have used documents based on different schemas recently 2011 Altova GmbH Schema Design Menu 275 User Reference User Manual 12 6 Schema Design Menu The Schema Design menu enables you to design XML Schemas in a GUI It is available when an XML Schema document is active in Schema View The commands available in this menu are described in this section 12 6 1 Schema Settings The Schema Design Schema Settings command lets you define global settings for the active schema These settings are attributes and their values of the XML Schema document element xs schema You can make the following settings in this dialog The elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes of the xs schema element can each be set to qualified or unqualified The blockDefault finalDefault and version attributes can be entered in t
397. ot exposed to the technicalities of XML and can edit the document as you would a normal text document If you wish you could switch on the markup at any time while editing second screenshot below An editable Authentic View document with no XML markup 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 147 Authentic User Manual An editable Authentic View document with XML markup tags Inserting nodes Very often you will need to add a new node to the Authentic XML document For example a new Person element might need to be added to an address book type of document In such cases the XML Schema would allow the addition of the new element All you need to do is right click the node in the Authentic View document before which or after which you wish to add the new node In the context menu that appears select Insert Before or Insert After as required The nodes available for insertion at that point in the document are listed in a submenu Click the required node to insert it The node will be inserted All mandatory descendant nodes are also inserted If a descendant node is optional a clickable link Add NodeName appears to enable you to add the optional node if you wish to If the node being added is an element with an abstract type then a dialog something like in the screenshot below appears containing a list of derived types that are available in the XML Schema 148 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Alt
398. ot supported in Authentic View Going to schema definitions With the XML document open you can directly open the DTD or XML Schema on which it is based by clicking the Go to DTD or Go to Schema commands in the DTD Schema menu Additionally you can place the cursor within a node in the XML document and go to the schema definition of that node via the Go to Definition command in the DTD Schema menu 102 XML Assigning Schemas and Validating 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Validating and checking well formedness To validate and or check for well formedness use the Validate XML F8 and Check Well Formedness F7 commands in the XML menu or the corresponding commands in the toolbar Any error is reported in the Messages window 2011 Altova GmbH Editing XML in Text View 103 XML User Manual 4 3 Editing XML in Text View XMLSpy offers some specialized XML text editing features in addition to the generally available editing features in Text View which are described in Text View in the Editing Views section Commenting text in and out Inserting file paths Inserting XML fragments via XInclude Copying XPath and XPointer expressions to the clipboard Commenting text in out Text in an XML document can be commented out using the XML start comment and end comment delimiters respectively lt and gt In XMLSpy these comment delimiters can be easily inserted using the Edit Comment In Out menu
399. ound SCM Client 2009 0 0 http www seapine com surroundscm html The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Seapine Surround SCM 1 Go to the Surround SCM client user options Diff Merge section 2 Edit the Diff Merge settings to compare with a selected application 3 Enter the DiffDog full path with the parameters 1 2 4 Restart the Surround SCM client and the Altova products Sergey Antonov HgSCC 1 0 1 http www newsupaplex pp ru hgscc_news_eng html The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Mercurial 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Select differencing tool custom and specify the DiffDog full path SourceGear Fortress 1 1 4 Client http www sourcegear com fortress SourceGear Vault 4 1 4 Client http www sourcegear com vault The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into SourceGear Fortress and SourceGear Vault 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Set the Diff Merge Vault options by specifying as the differencing program the DiffDog full path and using the Arguments ro1 ro2 title1 LEFT_LABEL title2 RIGHT_LABEL LEFT_PATH RIGHT_PATH SourceGear SourceOffsite Client 4 2 0 Windows http www sourcegear com sos The following steps will integrate DiffDog into SourceGear SourceOffsite 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Specify as External Programs Application for
400. ound status updates 194 CR amp LF 313 CSS 170 auto completion 173 document outline 173 Info window 173 properties 173 syntax coloring 173 CSS Info window 173 CustomCatalog 267 Customization 16 Customize context menu 310 menu 310 toolbar menu commands 304 Cut command 231 CVS 194 D Databases editing in Authentic View 290 see also DB 157 datatypes in XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 340 Date Picker using in Authentic View 163 Dates changing manually 164 DB creating queries 158 editing in Authentic View 157 162 filtering display in Authentic View 158 navigating tables in Authentic View 157 parameters in DB queries 158 queries in Authentic View 157 deep equal function in XPath 2 0 see fn deep equal 340 Default encoding 319 menu 310 Default editor 314 default functions namespace for XPath 2 0 and XQueyr 1 0 expressions 340 in XSLT 2 0 stylesheets 334 Default view setting in Main Window 314 Delete command from context menu 310 command from toolbar 304 icon from toolbar 304 row in Authentic View 294 shortcut 306 toolbar 305 Delete command 231 Derived types modifying base type of 70 Deriving a schema type 78 Diffdog configure for differencing 208 Differencing configuring Diffdog 208 Display all globals 280 Display diagram 280 Display Settings 318 Distribution of Altova s software products 355
401. ova XMLSpy 2011 Selecting one of the available derived types and clicking OK does the following Sets the selected derived type as the value of the xsi type attribute of the element Inserts the element together with the descendant nodes defined in the content model of the selected derived type The selected derived type can be changed subsequently by changing the value of the element s xsi type attribute in the Attributes Entry Helper When the element s type is changed in this way all nodes of the previous type s content model are removed and nodes of the new type s content model are inserted Text editing An Authentic View document will essentially consist of text and images To edit the text in the document place the cursor at the location where you wish to insert text and type You can copy move and delete text using familiar keystrokes such as the Delete key and drag and drop mechanisms One exception is the Enter key Since the Authentic View document is pre formatted you do not and cannot add extra lines or space between items The Enter key in Authentic View therefore serves to append another instance of the element currently being edited and should be used exclusively for this purpose Copy as XML or as text Text can be copied and pasted as XML or as text If text is pasted as XML then the XML markup is pasted together with the text content of nodes The XML markup is pasted even if only part of a node s
402. path as the External Diff EXE path Warning When using the default diff editor CvsConflictEditor you might have problems comparing files with excessively long lines We recommended that you pretty print all files particularly ump files before storing them in the repository This limits the line length thus avoiding problems with the CVSConflictEditor March Hare CVS Suite Client 2008 3321 http www march hare com cvsnt en asp The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Marc Hare CVS Suite 2008 1 Go to the TortoiseCVS Preferences and choose the Tools tab 2 Specify the DiffDog full path as Diff application and the parameters 1 2 as two way differencing parameters Mercurial see under Sergey Antonov HgScc 1 0 1 Microsoft SourceSafe 2005 with CTP http msdn microsoft com en us vstudio aa718670 aspx The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Microsoft SourceSafe 2005 1 Click the Advanced button of the Source Control tab 2 Click the Custom Editors tab and enter C Program Files Altova DiffDog2011 DiffDogexe 1 2 in the Command Line field 3 In the Operation combo box select File Difference Microsoft Team Foundation Server 2008 MSSCCI Provider http www microsoft com downloads Requirements Visual Studio 2008 Team Explorer or Visual Studio 2008 with Team Explorer 2008 The following steps will integrate Altova DiffDog into Microsoft Visual Studio Team System 2008 Team Foundation Server
403. pear in the Entities Entry Helper 3 Enter the type of entity from the drop down list in the Type field Three types are possible An Internal entity is one for which the text to be used is stored in the XML document itself Selecting PUBLIC or SYSTEM specifies that the resource is located outside the XML file and will be located with the use of a public identifier or a system identifier respectively A system identifier is a URI that gives the location of the resource A public identifier is a location independent identifier which enables some processors to identify the resource If you specify both a public and system identifier the public identifier resolves to the system identifier and the system identifier is used 4 If you have selected PUBLIC as the Type enter the public identifier of your resource in the PUBLIC field If you have selected Internal or SYSTEM as your Type the PUBLIC field is disabled 5 In the Value Path field you can enter any one of the following If the entity type is Internal enter the text string you want as the value of your entity Do not enter quotes to delimit the entry Any quotes that you enter will be treated as part of the text string If the entity type is SYSTEM enter the URI of the resource or select a resource on your local network by using the Browse button If the resource contains parsed data it must be an XML file i e it must have a xml extension Alternatively the resource can be a
404. pecific fragment of the document located with the href attribute it is this fragment that will be included The encoding attribute specifies the encoding of the included document so that XMLSpy can transcode this document or the part of it to be included into the encoding of the including document The contents of the fallback child element replace the xi include element if the document to be included cannot be located Here is an example of an XML document that uses XInclude to include two XML documents lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 16 gt lt AddressBook xsi schemaLocation http www altova com sv myaddresses AddressBook xsd xmlns http www altova com stylevision tutorials myaddresses xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xmlns xi http www w3 org 2001 XInclude gt lt xi include href BusinessAddressBook xml gt lt xi include href PersonalAddressBook xml gt lt AddressBook gt When this XML document is parsed it will replace the two XInclude elements with the files specified in the respective href attributes xml base When the XML validator of XMLSpy reads an XML document and encounters the include element in the XInclude namespace hereafter xi include it replaces this element xi include with the XML document named in the href attribute of the xi include element The document element root element of the included XML document or the element identified by an XPointer will be included with
405. pen document window directly from the menu 12 12 1 Cascade This command rearranges all open document windows so that they are all cascaded i e staggered on top of each other 12 12 2 Tile Horizontally This command rearranges all open document windows as horizontal tiles making them all visible at the same time 12 12 3 Tile Vertically This command rearranges all open document windows as vertical tiles making them all visible at the same time 12 12 4 Project Window This command lets you switch the Project Window on or off This is a dockable window Dragging on its title bar detaches it from its current position and makes it a floating window Click right on the title bar to allow docking or hide the window 12 12 5 Info Window This command lets you switch the Info Window on or off This is a dockable window Dragging on its title bar detaches it from its current position and makes it a floating window Click right on the title bar to allow docking or hide the window 12 12 6 Entry Helpers This command lets you switch all three Entry Helper Windows on or off All three Entry helpers are dockable windows Dragging on a title bar detaches it from its current position and makes it a floating window Click right on the title bar to allow docking or hide the window 12 12 7 Output Windows The Output Windows are a set of tabbed output windows such as the Messages window which displays messages like validation resu
406. puter to the other as necessary provided that only one 1 instance of the Software will be used by you as the Named User at any given time If you have purchased multiple Named User licenses each individual Named User will receive a separate license key code d Concurrent Use If you have licensed a Concurrent User version of the Software you may install the Software on any compatible computers in a commercial environment only up to ten 10 times the Permitted Number of users provided that only the Permitted Number of users actually use the Software at the same time and further provided that the computers on which the Software is installed are on the same physical computer network The Permitted Number of concurrent users shall be delineated at such time as you elect to purchase the Software licenses Each separate physical network or office location requires its own set of separate Concurrent User Licenses for those wishing to use the Concurrent User versions of the Software in more than one location or on more than one network all subject to the above Permitted Number limitations and based on the number of users using the Software If a computer is not on the same physical network then a locally installed user license is required Home User restrictions and limitations with respect to the Concurrent User licenses used on home computers are set forth in Section 1 f e Backup and Archival Copies You may make one 1 backup and one 1
407. r The lower part containing a list of the nodes that can be inserted within before and after removed applied to or cleared from the selected element or text range in Authentic View What you can do with an element listed in the Entry Helper is indicated by the icon to the left of the element name in the Entry Helper The icons that occur in 92 Editing Views Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 the Elements Entry Helper are listed below together with an explanation of what they mean To use node from the Entry Helper click its icon Insert After Element The element in the Entry Helper is inserted after the selected element Note that it is appended at the correct hierarchical level For example if your cursor is inside a sect1 para element and you append a sect1 element then the new sect1 element will be appended not as a following sibling of sect1 para but as a following sibling of the sect1 element that is the parent of that para element Insert Before Element The element in the Entry Helper is inserted before the selected element Note that just as with the Append After Element command the element is inserted at the correct hierarchical level Remove Element Removes the element and its content Insert Element An element from the Entry Helper can also be inserted within an element When the cursor is placed within an element then the allowed child elements of that element can be inserted No
408. r ii repair or replacement of the Software that does not meet Altova s Limited Warranty and which is returned to Altova with a copy of your receipt This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident abuse misapplication abnormal use Trojan horse virus or any other malicious external code Any replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty 30 days whichever is longer This limited warranty does not apply to Evaluation and or Pre release Software b No Other Warranties and Disclaimer THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY AND REMEDIES STATE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ALTOVA OR ITS SUPPLIER S BREACH OF WARRANTY ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE EXCEPT FOR THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY AND FOR ANY WARRANTY CONDITION REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE EXTENT WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHETHER BY STATUTE COMMON LAW CUSTOM USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PAR
409. r 6 0 or later which uses MSXML 3 0 an XML parser that fully supports the XSLT 1 0 standard You might also wish to install MSXML 4 0 Please see our Download Center for more details Note that support for XSLT in IE 5 is not 100 compatible with the official XSLT Recommendation So if you encounter problems in Browser View with IE 5 you should upgrade to IE 6 or later You should also check the support for XSLT of your version of Internet Explorer Browser View features The following features are available in Browser View They can be accessed via the Browser menu File menu and Edit menu Open in separate window When Browser View is a separate window it can be positioned side by side with an editing view of the same document This command is in the Browser menu and is a toggle command that can be used to return a separate Browser View window as a tabbed view In the View tab of the Options dialog you can set whether Browser View should by default be a separate window Forward and Back The common browser commands to navigate through pages that were loaded in Browser View These commands are in the Browser menu Font size Can be adjusted via the Browser menu command Stop Refresh Print More standard browser commands these can be found in the Browser and File menus Find Enables searches for text strings this command is in the Edit menu 98 XML 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 4 XML This se
410. rd is modified in Authentic View the entire record is updated when the data is saved to the DB The date value 0001 01 01 is defined as a NULL value for some DBs and could result in an error message 2011 Altova GmbH Editing in Authentic View 163 Authentic User Manual Deleting a record To delete a record 1 Place the cursor in the row representing the record to be deleted and click the icon The record to be deleted is marked with a strikethrough The AltovaRowStatus is set as follows primary instances of the record are set to D secondary instances to d and records indirectly deleted to X Indirectly deleted records are fields in the deleted record that are held in a separate table For example an Address table might be included in a Customer table If a Customer record were to be deleted then its corresponding Address record would be indirectly deleted If an Address record in the Customer table were deleted then the Address record in the Customer table would be primarily deleted but the same record would be secondarily deleted in an independent Address table if this were instantiated 2 Click File Save to save the modifications to the DB Please note Saving data to the DB resets the Undo command so you cannot undo actions that were carried out prior to the save 7 2 4 Working with Dates There are two ways in which dates can be edited in Authentic View Dates are entered or modified using the Date
411. re Activation dialog will pop up In it is a button to request a free evaluation key code Enter your name company and e mail address in the dialog that appears and click Request Now The evaluation key is sent to the e mail address you entered and should reach you in a few minutes Now enter the key in the key code field of the Software Activation dialog box and click OK to start working with your Altova product The software will be unlocked for a period of 30 days Permanent license key The Software Activation dialog contains a button to purchase a permanent license key Clicking this button takes you to Altova s online shop where you can purchase a permanent license key for your product There are two types of permanent license single user and multi user Both will be sent to you by e mail A single user license contains your license data and includes your name company e mail and key code A multi user license contains your license data and includes your company name and key code Note that your license agreement does not allow you to install more than the licensed number of copies of your Altova software on the computers in your organization per seat license Please make sure that you enter the data required in the registration dialog exactly as given in your license e mail Note When you enter your license information in the Software Activation dialog ensure that you enter the data exactly as given in your license e mail For multi u
412. re license The Support Period hereinafter defined covered by such SMP shall be delineated at such time as you elect to purchase a SMP Your rights with respect to support 366 License Information Altova End User License Agreement 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 and maintenance as well as your upgrade eligibility depend on your decision to purchase SMP and the level of SMP that you have purchased a If you have not purchased SMP you will receive the Software AS IS and will not receive any maintenance releases or updates However Altova at its option and in its sole discretion on a case by case basis may decide to offer maintenance releases to you as a courtesy but these maintenance releases will not include any new features in excess of the feature set at the time of your purchase of the Software In addition Altova will provide free technical support to you for thirty 30 days after the date of your purchase the Support Period for the purposes of this paragraph 6 a and Altova in its sole discretion on a case by case basis may also provide free courtesy technical support during your thirty 30 day evaluation period Technical support is provided via a Web based support form only and there is no guaranteed response time b If you have purchased SMP then solely for the duration of its delineated Support Period you are eligible to receive the version of the Software edition that you have licensed and all maintenan
413. re might be editing and validation errors when this global resource is opened in XMLSpy This is because XMLSpy will open the file assuming the filetype specified in the definition of the configuration Assigning files for XSLT transformations XSLT files can be assigned to XML documents and XML files to XSLT documents via global resources When the commands for assigning XSLT files XSL XQuery Assign XSL and XSL XQuery Assign XSL FO and XML files XSL XQuery Assign Sample XML are clicked the assignment dialog pops up Clicking the Browse button pops up the Open dialog in which you can switch to the Open Global Resource dialog and select the required global resource A major advantage of using a global resource to specify files for XSLT transformations is that the XSLT file or XML file can be changed for a transformation merely by changing the active configuration in XMLSpy no new file assignments have to be made each time a transformation is required with a different file When an XSLT transformation is started it will use the file s associated with the active configuration 2011 Altova GmbH Using Global Resources 187 Altova Global Resources User Manual XSLT transformations and XQuery executions Clicking the command XSL XQuery XSL Transformation XSL XQuery XSL FO Transformation or XSL XQuery XQuery Execution pops up a dialog in which you can browse for the required XSLT XQuery or XML file Click the Browse button and
414. reate and edit a new XML document In this tutorial you will open an existing XML document in Authentic View described in this section and learn how you can edit it subsequent sections Additionally in this section is a description of how a new XML document can be created for editing in Authentic View Opening an existing XML document The file you will open is NanonullOrg xml It is in the Examples folder of your Altova application You can open NanonullOrg xml in one of two ways Click File Open in your Altova product then browse for NanonullOrg xml in the dialog that appears and click Open Use Windows Explorer to locate the file right click and select your Altova product as the application with which to open the file The file NanonullOrg xml opens directly in Authentic View screenshot below This is because 1 The file already has a StyleVision Power Stylesheet SPS assigned to it and 2 In the Options dialog Tools Options in the View tab the option to open XML files in Authentic View if an SPS file is assigned has been checked Otherwise the file would open in Text View 136 Authentic Authentic View Tutorial 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Remember It is the SPS that defines and controls how an XML document is displayed in Authentic View Without an SPS there can be no Authentic View of the document Creating a new XML document based on an SPS You can also create a new XML document that is
415. reation Authentic Scripts Enabled StyleVision Enterprise Yes Yes StyleVision Professional Yes Yes StyleVision Standard No No XMLSpy Enterprise No Yes XMLSpy Professional No Yes XMLSpy Standard No No AuthenticDesktop Community No No AuthenticDesktop Enterprise No Yes Authentic Browser Plug in Community No No Authentic Browser Plug in Enterprise Trusted No Yes Authentic Browser Plug in Enterprise Untrusted No Yes No AuthenticView Both Trusted and Untrusted versions Scripted designs displayed No internal macro execution or event handling External events fired Authentic Scripts behave in the same way in all Altova products so no product specific code or settings are required How Authentic Scripting works The designer of the SPS design can use Authentic Scripting in two ways to make Authentic documents interactive By assigning scripts for user defined actions macros to design elements toolbar buttons and context menu items By adding to the design event handlers that react to Authentic View events All the scripting that is required for making Authentic documents interactive is done within the StyleVision GUI Enterprise and Professional editions Forms macros and event handlers are created within the Scripting Editor interface of StyleVision and these scripts are saved with the SPS Then in the Design View of StyleVision the saved scripts are
416. reen help system The latest version of the user manual is available at www altova com i in HTML format for online browsing and ii in PDF format for download and to print if you prefer to have the documentation on paper 30 day evaluation period After downloading this product you can evaluate it for a period of up to 30 days free of charge About 20 days into this evaluation period the software will start to remind you that it has not yet been licensed The reminder message will be displayed once each time you start the application If you would like to continue using the program after the 30 day evaluation period you have to purchase an Altova Software License Agreement which is delivered in the form of a key code that you enter into the Software Activation dialog to unlock the product You can purchase your license at the online shop at the Altova website Helping Others within Your Organization to Evaluate the Software If you wish to distribute the evaluation version within your company network or if you plan to use it on a PC that is not connected to the Internet you may only distribute the Setup programs provided that they are not modified in any way Any person that accesses the software installer that you have provided must request their own 30 day evaluation license key code and after expiration of their evaluation period must also purchase a license in order to be able to continue using the product For further details please
417. references the assigned DTD The DOCTYPE declaration will look something like this lt DOCTYPE main SYSTEM http link xmlspy com spyweb dtd gt Please note A DTD can be assigned to a new XML file at the time the file is created 12 5 2 Assign Schema The DTD Schema Assign Schema command is enabled when an XML document is active It assigns an XML Schema to an XML document thus allowing the document to be validated and enabling intelligent editing for the document The command opens the Assign File dialog to let you specify the XML Schema file you wish to assign You can also select a file via a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button Note that you can make the path of the assigned file relative by clicking the Make Path Relative To check box When you are done your XML document will contain an XML Schema assignment with the required namespaces The schema assignment will look something like this xmlns http www xmlspy com schemas icon orgchart xmlns xsi http www w3 org 1999 XMLSchema instance xsi schemaLocation http www xmlspy com schemas icon orgchart http schema xmlspy com schemas icon orgchart xsd 12 5 3 Go to DTD The DTD Schema Go to DTD command opens the DTD on which the active XML document is based If no DTD is assigned then an error message is displayed 272 User Reference DTD Schema Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altov
418. respond to any hierarchical organization of files on your hard disk Folders can correspond to and have a direct relationship to physical directories on your file system We call such folders external folders and they are indicated in the Project Window by a yellow folder icon as opposed to normal project folders which are green External project folders must be explicitly synchronized by using the Refresh command A folder can contain an arbitrary mix of file types Alternatively you can define file type extensions for each folder in the Properties dialog of that folder to keep common files in one convenient place When a file is added to the parent folder it is automatically added to the sub folder that has been defined to contain files of that file extension In the Project Window a folder can be dragged to another folder or to another location within the same folder while a file can be dragged to another folder but cannot be moved within the same folder within which files are arranged alphabetically Additionally files and folders can be dragged from Windows File Explorer to the Project Window Each folder has a set of properties that are defined in the Properties dialog of that 2011 Altova GmbH The Graphical User Interface GUI 13 Introduction User Manual folder These properties include file extensions for the folder the schema by which to validate XML files the XSLT file with which to transform XML
419. ributes which can be referenced within that schema 3 Insert the required xml attribute as the child of an element The attribute is declared as a reference to the imported global attribute Declare the XML Namespaces namespace You can declare the XML Namespaces namespace http www w3 org XML 1998 namespace by entering it via the Schema Settings dialog where all namespaces declared for that schema are stored and can be edited The namespace must be bound to the xml prefix Alternatively you could declare the namespace with the xml prefix on the xs schema element in Text View Import the XML Namespaces namespace In Schema Overview create a global import declaration for the XML Namespaces namespace Do this by clicking the Insert or Append icon at the top of the Schema Overview window and selecting Import from the menu that pops up Enter the XML Namespaces namespace as the namespace to be imported In Text View the import declaration should look like this lt xs import namespace http www w3 org XML 1998 namespace schemaLocation http www w3 org XML 1998 namespace gt Adding the xml attribute In Schema Overview select the element for which the xml attribute is to be added and add an attribute for it In the Details entry helper screenshot below click the down arrow of the name combo box and select the required xml attribute for example xml base When you are prompted whether you wish to reference the globa
420. ries or divisions or authorized partners located worldwide You are advised that the United States uses a sectoral model of privacy protection that relies on a mix of legislation governmental regulation and self regulation You are further advised that the Council of the European Union has found that this model does not provide adequate privacy protections as contemplated by Article 25 of the European Union s Data Directive Directive 95 46 EC 1995 O J L 281 31 Article 26 of the European Union s Data Directive allows for transfer of personal data from the European Union to a third country if the individual has unambiguously given his consent to the transfer of personal information regardless of the third country s level of protection By agreeing to this 368 License Information Altova End User License Agreement 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Software License Agreement you consent to the transfer of all such information to the United States and the processing of that information as described in this Software License Agreement and the Privacy Policy 8 TERM AND TERMINATION This Software License Agreement may be terminated a by your giving Altova written notice of termination b by Altova at its option giving you written notice of termination if you commit a breach of this Software License Agreement and fail to cure such breach within ten 10 days after notice from Altova or c at the request of an authorized Altova
421. ring with another text string It features the same options as the Find command You can replace each item individually or you can use the Replace All button to perform a global search and replace operation 12 2 10 Bookmark Commands Insert Remove Bookmark The Insert Remove Bookmark command Ctrl F2 inserts a bookmark at the current cursor position or removes the bookmark if the cursor is in a line that has been bookmarked previously This command is only available in Text View Bookmarked lines are displayed in one of the following ways If the bookmarks margin has been enabled then a solid blue ellipse appears to the left of the text in the bookmark margin If the bookmarks margin has not been enabled then the complete line containing the cursor is highlighted The F2 key cycles through all the bookmarks in the document Remove All Bookmarks The Remove All Bookmarks command Ctrl Shift F2 removes all the currently defined bookmarks This command is only available in Text View Note that the Undo command does not undo the effects of this command Goto Next Bookmark The Goto Next Bookmark command F2 places the text cursor at the beginning of the next bookmarked line This command is only available in the Text View Goto Previous Bookmark The Goto Previous Bookmark command Shift F2 places the text cursor at the beginning of the previous bookmarked line This command is only available in the Text View 1
422. rk feature is useful for setting up markers in your document To insert a bookmark use the command Edit Insert Remove Bookmark Once bookmarks have been inserted you can navigate these bookmarks using commands in the Edit menu The screenshot below shows the current XML file in Text View with all structural editing features enabled For the sake of clarity none of the line numbers indentation guides etc will be shown in Text View in rest of this tutorial Please see the User Manual for more information on Text View Editing in Text View In this section you will enter and edit data in Text View in order to become familiar with the features of Text View 2011 Altova GmbH XML Documents 27 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual Do the following 1 Select the menu item View Text view or click on the Text tab You now see the XML document in its text form with syntax coloring 2 Place the text cursor after the end tag of the Address element and press Enter to add a new line 3 Enter the less than angular bracket lt at this position A dropdown list of all elements allowed at that point according to the schema is displayed Since only the Person element is allowed at this point it will be the only element displayed in the list 4 Select the Person entry The Person element as well as its attribute Manager are inserted with the cursor inside the value field of the Manager attribute 5 From the dropdown list for the Man
423. rmations until it is explicitly deleted or the application is restarted Parameters entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog are specified at the application level and will be passed to the respective XSLT document for every transformation that is carried out via the IDE from that point onward This means that parameters are not associated with any particular document any parameter entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog is erased once XMLSpy has been closed Usage example for XSLT parameters In the following example we select the required document footer from among three possibilities in the XML document footer1 footer2 footer3 lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt document xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation C workarea footers footers xsd gt lt footer1 gt Footer 1 lt footer1 gt lt footer2 gt Footer 2 lt footer2 gt lt footer3 gt Footer 3 lt footer3 gt lt title gt Document Title lt title gt lt para gt Paragraph text lt para gt lt para gt Paragraph text lt para gt lt document gt The XSLT file contains a local parameter called footer in the template for the root element This parameter has a default value of footer1 The parameter value is instantiated subsequently in the template with a footer value in the definition of the footer block lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt
424. rmines i what global resources can be assigned and ii what global resources are available for look up for example if a global resource in one Global Resource XML File is assigned but there is no global resource of that name in the currently active Global Resources XML File then the assigned global resource alias cannot be looked up The active configuration is selected via the menu item Tools Active Configuration or via the Global Resources toolbar Clicking this command or drop down list in the toolbar pops up a list of configurations across all aliases Selecting a configuration makes that configuration active application wide This means that wherever a global resource or alias is used the resource corresponding to the active configuration of each used alias will be loaded The active configuration is applied to all used aliases If an alias does not have a configuration with the name of the active configuration then the default configuration of that alias will be used The active configuration is not relevant when assigning resources it is significant only when the resources are actually used 9 2 1 Assigning Files and Folders In this section we describe how file type and folder type global resources are assigned File type and folder type global resources are assigned differently In any one of the usage scenarios below clicking the Switch to Global Resources button pops up the Open Global Resource dialog screenshot b
425. rs If you created you own toolbar you can populate it with your own commands icons Please note You can also edit the commands in the context menus right click anywhere to open the context menu using the same method Click the Menu tab and then select the specific context menu available in the Context Menus combo box To delete a command or menu 1 Select the menu item Tools Customize The Customize dialog appears 2 Click on the menu entry or icon you want to delete and drag with the mouse 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 305 User Reference User Manual 3 Release the mouse button whenever the x icon appears below the mouse pointer The command or menu item is deleted from the menu or tool bar Toolbars The Toolbars tab allows you to activate or deactivate specific toolbars as well as create your own specialized ones XMLSpy toolbars contain symbols for the most frequently used menu commands For each symbol you get a brief tool tip explanation when the mouse cursor is directly over the item and the status bar shows a more detailed description of the command You can drag the toolbars from their standard position to any location on the screen where they appear as a floating window Alternatively you can also dock them to the left or right edge of the main window Toolbar settings defined in Schema View and Text View are valid in those views The Browser View toolbars are independent of all the other vi
426. ry documents See the AltovaXML documentation for details 12 7 5 Assign XSL The XSL XQuery Assign XSL command assigns an XSLT stylesheet to an XML document Clicking the command opens a dialog to let you specify the XSLT file you want to assign You can also select a file via a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button An xml stylesheet processing instruction is inserted in the XML document lt xml stylesheet type text xsl href C workarea recursion recursion xslt gt Please note You can make the path of the assigned file relative by clicking the Make Path Relative To check box 12 7 6 Assign XSL FO The XSL XQuery Assign XSL FO command assigns an XSLT stylesheet for transformation to FO to an XML document The command opens a dialog to let you specify the XSL or XSLT file you want to assign and inserts the required processing instruction into your XML document lt xmlspyxslfo C Program Files Altova xmlspy Examples OrgChartFO xsl gt You can make the path of the assigned file relative by clicking the Make Path Relative To check box You can also select a file via a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button Please note An XML document may have two XSLT files assigned to it one for standard XSLT transformations a second for an XSLT transformation
427. s the software sends a short broadcast datagram to find any other instance of the product running on another computer in the same network segment If it doesn t get any response it will open a port for listening to other instances of the application Multi license If more than one instance of the application is used within the same LAN these instances will briefly communicate with each other on startup These instances exchange key codes in order to help you to better determine that the number of concurrent licenses purchased is not accidentally violated This is the same kind of license metering technology that is common in the Unix world and with a number of database development tools It allows Altova customers to purchase reasonably priced concurrent use multi user licenses We have also designed the applications so that they send few and small network packets so as to not put a burden on your network The TCP IP ports 2799 used by your Altova product are officially registered with the IANA see http www isi edu in notes iana assignments port numbers for details and our license metering module is tested and proven technology If you are using a firewall you may notice communications on port 2799 between the computers that are running Altova products You are of course free to block such traffic between different groups in your organization as long as you can ensure by other means that your license agreement is not violated You wil
428. s feature is described in the User Reference section of the manual Saving projects Any changes you make to a project such as adding or deleting a file or modifying a project property must be saved with the Save Project command Refreshing projects If a change is made to an external folder this change will not be reflected in the Project Window till the project is refreshed 192 Projects Using Projects 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 10 2 Using Projects Projects are very useful for organizing your workspace applying settings to multiple files and for setting up and executing batch commands Using projects can therefore greatly help speed up and ease your work Benefits of using projects The following list lists the benefits of using projects Files and folders can be grouped into folders by file extension or any other desired criterion Schemas and XSLT files can be assigned to a folder This can be useful if you wish to quickly validate or transform a single XML file using different schema or XSLT files Add the XML file to different folders and define different schemas and XSLT files for the different folders Batch processing can be applied to individual folders The commands available for batch processing are listed below Output folders can be specified for transformations Organizing resources for quick access Folder and file resources can be organized into a tree structure giving you a cle
429. s must have been set If a style attribute containing CSS styles has been specified for an element the style attribute has precedence over any other formatting attribute set on that element As a result any formatting specified in Authentic View will be overridden To format a table row column or cell do the following 1 Place the cursor anywhere in the table and click the Table Properties icon This opens the Table Properties dialog see screenshot where you specify formatting for the table or for a row column or cell 2 Set the cellspacing and cellpadding properties to 0 Your table will now look like this 3 Place the cursor in the first row to format it and click the Table Properties icon Click the Row tab 154 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Since the first row will be the header row set a background color to differentiate this row from the other rows Note the Row properties that have been set in the figure above Then enter the column header text Your table will now look like this Notice that the alignment is centered as specified 4 Now say you want to divide the Telephone column into the sub columns Office and Home in which case you would need to split the horizontal width of the Telephone column into two columns First however we will split the vertical extent of the header cell to make a sub header row Place the cursor in the Telephone cel
430. s the Apache XML Project s FOP takes an FO file as input and generates PDF as output So the production of a PDF document from an XML document is a two step process 1 The XML document is transformed to an FO document using an XSLT aka XSL FO stylesheet 2 The FO document is processed by an FO processor to generate PDF or some alternative output The XSL XQuery XSL FO Transformation command transforms an XML document or an FO document to PDF If the XSL FO Transformation command is executed on a source XML document then both of the steps listed above are executed in sequence one after the other If the XSLT or XSL FO stylesheet required to transform to FO is not referenced in the XML document you are prompted to assign one for the transformation screenshot below Note that you can also select a file via a global resource or a URL click the Browse button or a file in one of the open windows in XMLSpy click the Window button The transformation from XML to XSL FO is carried out by the XSLT processor specified in the of the Options dialog Tools Options By default the selected XSLT processor is XMLSpy s built in XSLT processor The resultant FO document is directly processed with the FO processor specified in the of the Options dialog Tools Options If the XSL FO Transformation command is executed on an FO document then the document is processed with the FO processor specified in the of the Options dialog Tools
431. scribes the editing support for XSLT documents in XMLSpy XSLT Processing shows the various ways in which XSLT transformations can be carried out in the XMLSpy GUI using engines of your choice This section also explains important XSLT settings in XMLSpy Additional XSLT features Additional and more detailed information about the various features described in this section is in the descriptions of the relevant menu commands in the User Reference section Altova XSLT Engines For details about how the Altova XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 Engines are implemented see Engine Information in the Appendices AltovaXML for command line and batch processing The XMLSpy GUI enables batch processing via the projects functionality However if you are looking for more flexibility you should try Altova s free AltovaXML product which contains the Altova XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 Engines that are built into XMLSpy AltovaXML is ideal if you wish to perform XSLT transformations from the command line or batch processing 6 1 1 XSLT Documents XSLT 1 0 and 2 0 documents can be edited in Text View and are edited like any other XML document in Text View In Standard Edition XSLT documents can also be viewed but not edited in Grid View Entry helpers Entry helpers are available for elements attributes and entities Information about the items displayed in the entry helpers is built into XMLSpy and is not dependent on references contained in the XSLT document 122
432. se any output created with the Evaluation Software that contains generated program code including Unrestricted Source Code such as Java C C VB NET or XSLT and associated project files and build scripts as well as generated XML XML Schemas documentation UML diagrams and database structures terminates automatically upon the expiration of the designated evaluation period but the license to use such output is revived upon your purchase of a license for the Software that you evaluated and used to create such output Access to any files created with the Evaluation Software is entirely at your risk You acknowledge that Altova has not promised or guaranteed to you that Pre release Software will be announced or made available to anyone in the future that Altova has no express or implied obligation to you to announce or introduce the Pre release Software and that Altova may not introduce a product similar to or compatible with the Pre release Software Accordingly you acknowledge that any research or development that you perform regarding the Pre release Software or any product associated with the Pre release Software is done entirely at your own risk During the term of this Software License Agreement if requested by Altova you will provide feedback to Altova regarding testing and use of the Pre release Software including error or bug reports If you have been provided the Pre release Software pursuant to a separate written agreement your use of the
433. ser licenses each user should enter his or her own name in the Name field The Software Activation dialog can be accessed at any time by clicking the Help Software Activation command Order Form When you are ready to order a licensed version of the software product you can use either the Order license key button in the Software Activation dialog see previous section or the Help Order Form command to proceed to the secure Altova Online Shop Registration The first time you start your Altova software after having activated it a dialog appears asking whether you would like to register your product There are three buttons in this dialog OK Takes you to the Registration Form Remind Me Later Pops up a dialog in which you can select when you wish to be next reminded Cancel Closes the dialog and suppresses it in future If you wish to register at a later time you can use the Help Registration command Check for Updates Checks with the Altova server whether a newer version than yours is currently available and displays a message accordingly 12 13 6 Support Center FAQ Downloads Support Center If you have any questions regarding our product please feel free to use this command to send a query to the Altova Support Center at any time This is the place where you ll find links to the FAQ support form and e mail addresses for contacting our support staff directly FAQ 2011 Altova GmbH Help Menu 327 Us
434. sert an entity in Grid View place the cursor at the required position in a text field or select the required field then select the appropriate tab and double click the entity Note the following rules If the cursor is placed within a text field including an attribute value field the entity is inserted at the cursor insertion point If an element with a text only child i e PCDATA or simpleType is selected but the cursor is not placed in the text field then any existing text content is replaced by the entity If a non text field is selected then the entity is created as text at a location corresponding to the Entry Helper tab that you select Please note If you add an internal entity you will need to save and reopen your document before the entity appears in the Entities Entry Helper 54 Editing Views Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 3 Schema View XML Schemas can be viewed and edited in Schema View Schema View itself has two views Schema Overview displays all global components such as global elements and complex types in a simple tabular list see screenshot Content Model View shows the content models of individual global components see screenshot You can switch from Schema Overview to the content model of a specific global component by clicking the icon of that global component To return to Schema Overview click the Show Globals icon in Content Model View Note In
435. ses for file and folder resources Each alias can have multiple configurations and each configuration maps to a single resource Therefore when a global resource is used as an input the global resource can be switched among its configurations This is done easily via controls in the GUI For example if an XSLT stylesheet for transforming an XML document is assigned via a global resource then we can set up multiple configurations for the global resource each of which points to a different XSLT file After setting up the global resource in this way switching the configuration would switch the XSLT file used for the transformation A global resource can not only be used to switch resources within an Altova application but also to generate and use resources from other Altova applications So files can be generated on the fly in one Altova application for use in another Altova application All of this tremendously eases and speeds up development and testing For example an XSLT stylesheet in XMLSpy can be used to transform an XML file generated on the fly by an Altova MapForce mapping Using Altova Global Resources involves two processes Defining Global Resources Resources are defined and the definitions are stored in an XML file These resources can be shared across multiple Altova applications Using Global Resources Within an Altova application files can be located via a global resource instead of via a file path The advantage
436. signing to XML document 271 configuring Content Model View 276 generate outline XML file from 272 generating from DTD Enterprise and Professional editions 114 go to definition in from XML document 272 go to from XML document 272 menu commands related to 271 namespaces settings in Schema Design View 275 settings in Schema Design View 275 XML Schema tutorial 20 XML Schemas 113 and global resources 101 converting to DTD Enterprise and Professional editions 115 editing in Grid View Enterprise and Professional editions 115 editing in Schema View Enterprise and Professional editions 115 editing in Text View 115 generating XML document from 115 plus DTDs 101 XML tables in Authentic View icons for editing 155 usage of 151 xml base 82 and XInclude 231 xml id 82 xml lang 82 xml space 82 2011 Altova GmbH Index 383 XML Conformance 314 XMLSPY 214 327 features 17 help 17 XMLSpy Enterprise Edition user manual 3 XML Text 315 XPath generating of a node in an XML document 103 XPath 2 0 functions general information about 340 implementation information 340 see under fn for specific functions 340 XPath functions support see under fn for individual functions 341 XPath of selected node in XML document copying to the clipborad 234 XPath to selected node 85 XPointer generating of a node in an XML document 103 XPointer of selected node in
437. single XML document This is because XQuery expressions can select any number of XML documents with the doc function In XMLSpy however before executing individual XQuery documents you can select a source XML document for the execution In such cases the document node of the selected 2011 Altova GmbH XQuery 131 XSLT and XQuery User Manual XML source is the starting context item available at the root level of the XQuery document Paths that begin with a leading slash are resolved with this document node as its context item To execute an XQuery document 1 Make the XQuery document the active document 2 Select XSL XQuery XQuery Execution or click the toolbar icon This opens the Define an XML Source for the XQuery dialog 3 Do one of the following To select an XML file use either the Browse button or the Window button which lists files that are open in XMLSpy and that are in XMLSpy projects Select an XML source if you wish to assign its document node as the context item for the root level of the XQuery document Click Execute To skip this dialog click Skip XML The result document is generated as a temporary file that can be saved to any location with the desired file format and extension XQuery Variables If you are using the Altova XQuery engine XQuery variables can be stored in a convenient GUI dialog All the stored variables are passed to the XQuery document each time you execute an XQuery docum
438. st of project files is displayed in the Project window A file in the Project window can be accessed by double clicking it Main window This is the window in which the XML document is displayed and edited It is described in the section Authentic View main window Entry helpers There are three entry helper windows in this area Elements Attributes and Entities What entries appear in these windows Elements and Attributes Entry Helpers are context sensitive i e it depends on where in the document the cursor is You can enter an element or entity into the document by double clicking its entry helper The value of an attribute is entered into the value field of that attribute in the Attributes Entry Helper See the section Authentic View Entry Helpers for details Status Bar The Status Bar displays the XPath to the currently selected node Context menus These are the menus that appear when you right click in the Main Window The available commands are context sensitive editing commands i e they allow you to manipulate structure and content relevant to the selected node Such manipulations include inserting appending or deleting a node adding entities or cutting and pasting content 3 4 2 Authentic View Toolbar Icons Icons in the Authentic View toolbar are command shortcuts Some icons will already be familiar to you from other Windows applications or Altova products others might be new to you This section describes icons unique t
439. stopped Dynamic type checking is carried out at run time when the query is actually executed If a type is incompatible with the requirement of an operation an error is reported For example the expression xs string 1 1 returns an error because the addition operation cannot be carried out on an operand of type xs string Library Modules Library modules store functions and variables so they can be reused The Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine supports modules that are stored in a single external XQuery file Such a module file must contain a module declaration in its prolog which associates a target namespace Here is an example module module namespace libns urn module library declare variable libns company Altova declare function libns webaddress http www altova com All functions and variables declared in the module belong to the namespace associated with the module The module is used by importing it into an XQuery file with the import module statement in the query prolog The import module statement only imports functions and variables declared directly in the library module file As follows import module namespace modlib urn module library at modulefilename xq if modlib company Altova then modlib webaddress else error No match found External functions External functions are not supported i e in those expressions using the external keyword as in declare function hoo param as xs integer as
440. t 88 Editing Views Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 for you to be able to use XML tables this function must be enabled and suitably configured in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet A detailed description of the types of tables used in Authentic View and of how XML tables are to be created and edited is given in Using tables in Authentic View Text formatting icons Text in Authentic View is formatted by applying to it an XML element or attribute that has the required formatting If such formatting has been defined the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet can provide icons in the Authentic View toolbar to apply the formatting To apply text formatting using a text formatting icon highlight the text you want to format and click the appropriate icon DB Row Navigation icons The arrow icons are from left to right Go to First Record in the DB Go to Previous Record Open Go to Record dialog Go to Next Record and Go to Last Record This icon opens the Edit Database Query dialog in which you can enter a query Authentic View displays the queried record s XML database editing The Select New Row with XML Data for Editing command enables you to select a new row from the relevant table in an XML DB such as IBM DB2 This row appears in Authentic View can be edited there and then saved back to the DB 3 4 3 Authentic View Main Window There are four viewing modes in Authentic View Large Markup Small M
441. t All CTRL A Start Debugger Go Alt F11 310 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Step Into F11 Step Out Shift F11 Step Over CTRL F11 To view an element definition CTRL Double click on an element Undo CTRL Z Validate F8 XSL Transformation F10 XSL FO Transformation CTRL F10 In the application you can see a list of commands together with their shortcuts and descriptions in the Keyboard Map dialog Help Keyboard Map Menu The Menu tab allows you to customize the main menu bars as well as the popup right click context menus You can customize both the Default and XMLSpy menu bars The Default menu screenshot below is the one visible when no XML documents of any type are open in XMLSpy The XMLSpy menu is the menu bar visible when at least one XML document has been opened To customize a menu 1 Select the menu bar you want to customize from the Show Menus for combo box 2 Click the Commands tab and drag the commands to the menu bar of your choice 2011 Altova GmbH Tools Menu 311 User Reference User Manual To delete commands from a menu 1 Click right on the command or icon representing the command 2 Select the Delete option from the popup menu or 1 Select Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog box 2 Drag the command away from the menu and drop it as soon as the check mark icon appears below the mouse point
442. t a script or information that a processing application may use this information is contained in the appinfo child element of annotation Given below is the text of an annotation element It is based on the example in the description of creating documentation and application information given above lt xs element name session_date type xs dateTime nillable true gt lt xs annotation gt lt xs documentation gt Date and time when interview was held lt xs documentation gt 2011 Altova GmbH Schema View 69 Editing Views User Manual lt xs appinfo source http www altova com datehandlers interviews gt separator lt xs appinfo gt lt xs annotation gt lt xs element gt Comments and processing instructions In XML Schema documents comments and processing instructions within simple types and complex types are collected and moved to the end of the enclosing object In such cases it is therefore recommended that you use annotations instead of comments Configuring the content model view You can configure the content model view for the entire schema in the Schema display configuration dialog Schema design Configure view For details about configuration options see the Configure view section later in the User Reference Note that the settings you define here apply to the whole schema and to the schema documentation output as well the printer output Changing component properties directly in the content model If t
443. t below The currently active configuration is indicated with a bullet In the screenshot above the currently active configuration is Default To change the active configuration select the configuration you wish to make active Note The active configuration can also be selected via the Global Resources toolbar Tools Customize Toolbars Global Resources 12 11 3 Customize The Customize command lets you customize XMLSpy to suit your personal needs Commands The Commands tab allows you customize your menus or toolbars To add a command to a toolbar or menu 1 Select the menu item Tools Customize The Customize dialog appears 2 Select the All Commands category in the Categories list box The available commands appear in the Commands list box 3 Click on a command in the Commands list box and drag it to an to an existing menu or toolbar An I beam appears when you place the cursor over a valid position to drop the command 4 Release the mouse button at the position you want to insert the command A small button appears at the tip of mouse pointer when you drag a command The x below the pointer means that the command cannot be dropped at the current cursor position The x disappears whenever you can drop the command over a tool bar or menu Placing the cursor over a menu when dragging opens it allowing you to insert the command anywhere in the menu Commands can be placed in menus or tool ba
444. t by certified or registered mail return receipt requested or by overnight courier to the address shown on Altova s Web site for Altova and the address shown in Altova s records for you or such other address as the parties may designate by notice given in the manner set forth above This Software License Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of the parties and our respective heirs personal and legal representatives affiliates successors and permitted assigns The failure of either of us at any time to require performance of any provision hereof shall in no manner affect such party s right at a later time to enforce the same or any other term of this Software License Agreement This Software License Agreement may be amended only by a document in writing signed by both of us In the event of a breach or threatened breach of this Software License Agreement by either party the other shall have all applicable equitable as well as legal remedies Each party is duly authorized and empowered to enter into and perform this Software License Agreement If for any reason any provision of this Software License Agreement is held invalid or otherwise unenforceable such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the remainder of this Software License Agreement and this Software License Agreement shall continue in full force and effect to the fullest extent allowed by law The parties knowingly and expressly consent to the foregoing terms and condi
445. t limitation by United States Copyright Law international treaty provisions and applicable laws in the country in which it is being used You acknowledge that Altova retains the ownership of all patents copyrights trade secrets trademarks and other intellectual property rights pertaining to the Software and that Altova s ownership rights extend to any images photographs animations videos audio music text and applets incorporated into the Software and all accompanying printed materials You will take no actions which adversely affect Altova s intellectual property rights in the Software Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice including identification of trademark owners names Trademarks may only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software and such use of any trademark does not give you any right of ownership in that trademark XMLSpy Authentic StyleVision MapForce UModel DatabaseSpy DiffDog SchemaAgent SemanticWorks MissionKit Markup Your Mind Nanonull and Altova are trademarks of Altova GmbH registered in numerous countries Unicode and the Unicode Logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc Windows Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 are trademarks of Microsoft W3C CSS DOM MathML RDF XHTML XML and XSL are trademarks registered in numerous countries of the World Wide Web Consortium W3C marks of the W3C are registered and held by its
446. t markup by highlighting the text fragment With the selection made select Clear in the context menu and then the element to clear In the Elements entry helper elements that can be cleared for a particular selection are indicated with the icon insertion point selection and icon range selection In the NanonullOrg xml document try the clearing mechanism with the bold and italic child elements of para which has mixed content Tables and table structure There are two types of Authentic View table 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic View Tutorial 141 Authentic User Manual SPS tables static and dynamic The broad structure of SPS table is determined by the stylesheet designer Within this broad structure the only structural changes you are allowed are content driven For example you could add new rows to a dynamic SPS table XML tables in which you decide to present the contents of a particular node say one for person specific details as a table If the stylesheet designer has enabled the creation of this node as an XML table then you can determine the structure of the table and edit its contents XML tables are discussed in detail in the Using tables in Authentic View section 7 1 4 Entering Data in Authentic View Data is entered into the XML document directly in the main window of Authentic View Additionally for attributes data the value of the attribute can be entered in the Attributes entry helper Data
447. t related commands 2011 Altova GmbH File Menu 215 User Reference User Manual 12 1 File Menu The File menu contains commands relevant to manipulating files in the order common to most Windows software products In addition to the standard New Open Save Print Print Setup and Exit commands XMLSpy offers a range of XML and application specific commands 12 1 1 New Ctrl N The New command is used to create a new document Clicking New opens the Create New Document dialog in which you can select the type of document you wish to create If the document type you wish to create is not listed select XML and change the file extension when you save the file Note that you can add new file types to the list in this dialog using the Tools Options File types tab Creating templates for new documents You can create multiple templates for various file types These templates can then be opened directly from the Create New Document dialog and edited To create your own template so that it appears in the list of documents in the Create New Document dialog you first create the template document and then save it to the folder that contains all the templates Do the following 1 Open the XMLSpy Template folder using Windows Explorer or your preferred navigation tool and select a rudimentary template file from among the files named new xxx where xxx is a file extension such as xml and xslt 2 Open the file in XMLSpy and
448. t the active document and make sure you are in Grid View 2 Select the menu option XSL XQuery Go to XSL The command opens the Company xsl file referenced in the XML document 2011 Altova GmbH XSLT Transformations 37 XMLSpy Tutorial User Manual 3 Find the line lt table border 1 bgcolor lime gt and change the entry bgcolor lime to bgcolor yellow 4 Select the menu option File Save to save the changes made to the XSL file 5 Click the CompanyLast xml tab to make the XML file active and select XSL XQuery XSL Transformation or press F10 A new XSL Output html file appears in the XMLSpy GUI in Browser View The background color of the table is yellow 6 Select the menu option File Save and save the document as Company html 38 XMLSpy Tutorial Project Management 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 5 Project Management This section introduces you to the project management features of XMLSpy After learning about the benefits of organizing your XML files into projects you will organize the files you have just created into a simple project 2 5 1 Benefits of Projects The benefits of organizing your XML files into projects are listed below Files and URLs can be grouped into folders by common extension or any other criteria Batch processing can be applied to specific folders or the project as a whole A DTD or XML Schema can be assigned to specific folders allowing valid
449. t type 2 Select the text item type you wish to customize by clicking it In the screenshot above Element names has been selected 3 Set the font properties using the options in the panes on the right hand side You can 318 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 select the font family font size font style font color and background color for the text Additionally you can also select a background color for the entire Text View Note The same font style and size is used for all text item types Only the text color and background color can be changed for individual text types This enables the syntax coloring feature After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog Colors The Colors tab enables you to customize the background colors used in the Table View of Grid View In the screenshot below the colors have been changed from the default colors by clicking the palette icon next to each item and then selecting the preferred color Table View The Header unselected and Header selected options refer to the column and row headers The screenshot below shows headers unselected its color is as set in the dialog above The Header Selected color is activated when all headers are selected screenshot below not when individual headers are selected The screenshot below shows this using the colors defined in the dialog shown above All headers can be selected by clicking the
450. te that allowed child elements can be part of an elements only content model as well as a mixed content model text plus child elements An allowed child element can be inserted either when a text range is selected or when the cursor is placed as an insertion point within the text When a text range is selected and an element inserted the text range becomes the content of the inserted element When an element is inserted at an insertion point the element is inserted at that point After an element has been inserted it can be cleared by clicking either of the two Clear Element icons that appear in the Elements Entry Helper for these inline elements Which of the two icons appears depends on whether you select a text range or place the cursor in the text as an insertion point see below Apply Element If you select an element in your document by clicking either its start or end tag in the Show large markup view and that element can be replaced by another element for example in a mixed content element such as para an italic element can be replaced by the bold element this icon indicates that the element in the Entry Helper can be applied to the selected original element The Apply Element command can also be applied to a text range within an element of mixed content the text range will be created as content of the applied element If the applied element has a child element with the same name as a child of the original
451. te window 301 stop loading page 301 C Carriage return key see Enter key 167 Cascade Window 322 Catalog Oasis XML 267 Catalogs 116 CDATA sections inserting in Authentic View 146 Changing view to Authentic View 86 Chapters 324 Character position 298 character entities in HTML output of XSLT transformation 332 character normalization in XQuery document 337 Character Set encoding 319 Code page 316 Collapse unselected 298 collations in XPath 2 0 340 in XQuery document 337 Color 316 317 tab 318 table 318 Command add to toolbar menu 304 context menu 310 delete from menu 310 reset menu 310 Command line 328 Commands listing in key map 325 Commenting in and out in XML documents in Text View 103 Commenting XML text in and out 236 Component Navigator 71 Compositor in Schema View 58 Configurations of a global resource 178 Configurations in global resources 187 Configure view dialog for Content Model View 276 Constraints 74 Content Model View 58 configuring 276 Content models of schema components 58 Context menu commands 310 2011 Altova GmbH Index 373 Context menus in Authentic View 94 Copy command 231 Copy XPath 234 Copy XPointer 234 Copyright information 327 355 count function in XPath 1 0 332 count function in XPath 2 0 see fn count 340 CPU load increase backgr
452. temp folder as xs string Gets the temporary folder 348 Technical Data 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 Technical Data This section contains useful background information on the technical aspects of your software It is organized into the following sections OS and Memory Requirements Altova XML Parser Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines Unicode Support Internet Usage 2011 Altova GmbH OS and Memory Requirements 349 Technical Data Appendices 2 1 OS and Memory Requirements Operating System Altova software applications are 32 bit Windows applications for Windows XP Windows Server 2003 and 2008 Windows Vista and Windows 7 or 64 bit Windows applications for Windows Vista and Windows 7 Memory Since the software is written in C it does not require the overhead of a Java Runtime Environment and typically requires less memory than comparable Java based applications However each document is loaded fully into memory so as to parse it completely and to improve viewing and editing speed The memory requirement increases with the size of the document Memory requirements are also influenced by the unlimited Undo history When repeatedly cutting and pasting large selections in large documents available memory can rapidly be depleted 350 Technical Data Altova XML Parser 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 2 Altova XML Parser When opening any XML docume
453. tent model of a global component in Content Model View which is accessed by clicking the Content Model View icon at the left of the global component Note the following editing features of Schema Overview You can reposition components in the Schema Overview list using drag and drop You can navigate using the arrow keys of your keyboard You can copy or move global components attributes and identity constraints to a different position and from one schema to another using cut copy and paste Right clicking a component opens a context menu that allows you to cut copy paste delete or edit the annotation data of that component Note In Standard Edition Grid View is available as a read only view Editing in Grid View is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions Global components in Schema Overview At the top level of an XML Schema document i e at the level of children of the schema element the following five basic components can be defined Annotation Type definition simple or complex Declaration element or attribute Attribute group Model group These components are called global components The Schema Overview displays a list of all global components in your schema in a tabular form Some global components such as complex types element declarations and model groups can have a content model which describes the component s structure and contents Other global components
454. th a gray bar on the left side containing a small upwards pointing arrow at the top Clicking the side bar expands or collapses the item An element is denoted with the icon an attribute with the icon Display and navigation The contents of an item depend on its kind For example in the case of elements the contents will typically be attributes character data comments and child elements Attributes are always listed and are ordered as in the input file Following the attributes items appear exactly in the order found in the source file This order can be changed using drag and drop and the change will also be implemented in the source data If an element contains only character data the data will be shown in the same line as the element and the element will not be considered hierarchical by nature The character data for any other element will be shown indented with the attributes and potential child elements and will be labeled as Text If an element is collapsed its attributes and their values are shown in the same line in gray This attribute preview is especially helpful when editing XML documents that contain a large number of elements of the same name that differ only in their contents and attributes for example database like applications The arrow keys move the selection bar in the grid view The and keys on the numeric keypad allow you to expand and collapse items 52 Editing Views Grid View
455. th notation of the base URI notation If the value of the first argument is the zero length string the base URI from the static context is returned and this URI includes the file name of the document from which the base URI of the static context is derived e g the XSLT or XML file static base ur i The base URI from the static context is the base URI of the XSLT stylesheet or the base URI specified in the prolog of the XQuery document When using XPath Evaluator in the XMLSpy IDE the base URI from the static context is the URI of the active XML document upper case The Unicode character set is supported 344 Engine Information Extensions 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 5 Extensions Altova Engines XSLT 1 0 XSLT 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 which are used in a number of Altova products support the use of a set of AltovaXML specific custom extension functions 1 5 1 Altova Extension Functions Altova extension functions are in the namespace http www altova com xslt extensions and are indicated in this section with the prefix altova which is assumed to be bound to the namespace given above The following extension functions are supported in the current version of your Altova product in the manner described below However note that in future versions of your product support for one or more of these functions might be discontinued or the behavior of individual functions might change Consult the
456. th the Altova products you do not need to install the plug in for Adobe DreamWeaver CS3 After the installation establish a server connection and set a working folder IBM Rational ClearCase 7 0 1 LT http www 01 ibm com software awdtools clearcase To install IBM Rational ClearCase LT run the setup You will be asked to update the version of the InstallShield scripting engine if it is older than version 10 5 choose Update it if necessary The update runs prior to the installation starting Choose the default option Enterprise deployment create a network release area and customize it using Siteprep To integrate with Altova products it is sufficient to install only the client Check only the client check box Provide a server name and the license server element s following the examples provided by the installer port server_name Provide a configuration description name by editing a name you like and insert the path to a Release area This path must specify a shared folder You can create a new folder on your machine share it and use it as a Release Area In Vista you must set the Network discovery to on in Network and Sharing Center to set this path The Release Area is now created some files are copied into it and a shortcut is created with the name sitedefs lnk When all files are copied continue by clicking the shortcut from Windows Explorer A 2011 Altova GmbH Installing So
457. the Options dialog Tools Options Please note In the above screenshot one pair of colored parentheses for a comment is displayed black and bold This is because of the bracket matching feature see XQuery Intelligent Editing 2011 Altova GmbH XQuery 129 XSLT and XQuery User Manual 6 2 4 XQuery Intelligent Editing The XQuery Mode of Text View provides the following intelligent editing features Bracket matching The bracket matching feature highlights the opening and closing brackets of a pair of brackets enabling you to clearly see the contents of a pair of brackets This is particularly useful when brackets are nested as in XQuery comments see screenshot below Bracket matching is activated when the cursor is placed either immediately before or immediately after a bracket either opening or closing That bracket is highlighted bold black together with its corresponding bracket Notice the cursor position in the screenshot above Bracket matching is enabled for round parentheses square brackets and curly braces The exception is angular brackets lt gt which are used for XML tags Please note When you place the cursor just inside a start or end bracket both brackets are highlighted Pressing Ctrl E moves the cursor to the other member of the pair Pressing Ctrl E repeatedly enables you to switch between the start and end brackets This is another aid to quickly navigating your document Keywords
458. then the Switch to Global Resource button to pop up the Open Global Resource dialog screenshot at top of section The file that is associated with the currently active configuration of the selected global resource is used for the transformation Assigning an SPS When assigning a StyleVision stylesheet to an XML file Authentic Assign StyleVision Stylesheet you can select a global resource to locate the stylesheet Click the Browse button and then the Switch to Global Resource button to pop up the Open Global Resource dialog screenshot at top of section With a global resource selected as the assignment the Authentic View of the XML document can be changed merely by changing the active configuration in XMLSpy 9 2 2 Changing Configurations One global resource configuration can be active at any time and it is active application wide This means that the active configuration is active for all aliases in all currently open files If an alias does not have a configuration with the name of the active configuration then the default configuration of that alias will be used As an example of how to change configurations consider the case in which an XSLT file has been assigned to an XML document via a global resource with multiple configurations The XSLT file can be switched merely by changing the configuration of the global resource This can be done in two ways When you hover over the menu command Tools Active Configuration a sub
459. thentic Authentic View Tutorial 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 7 1 Authentic View Tutorial In Authentic View you can edit XML documents in a graphical WYSIWYG interface screenshot below just like in word processor applications such as Microsoft Word In fact all you need to do is enter data You do not have to concern yourself with the formatting of the document since the formatting is already defined in the stylesheet that controls the Authentic View of the XML document The stylesheet StyleVision Power Stylesheet shortened to SPS in this tutorial is created by a stylesheet designer using Altova s StyleVision product Editing an XML document in Authentic View involves two user actions i editing the structure of the document for example adding or deleting document parts such as paragraphs and headlines and ii entering data the content of document parts This tutorial takes you through the following steps Opening an XML document in Authentic View The key requirement for Authentic View editing is that the XML document be associated with an SPS file A look at the Authentic View interface and a broad description of the central editing mechanisms Editing document structure by inserting and deleting nodes Entering data in the XML document Entering i attribute values via the Attributes entry helper and ii entity values Printing the document Remember that this tutorial is int
460. therwise absolute as in the screenshot above 2 4 2 Transforming the XML File To transform the XML document using the XSL file you have assigned to it 1 Ensure that the XML file is the active document 2 Select the menu option XSL XQuery XSL Transformation F10 or click the icon This starts the transformation using the XSL stylesheet referenced in the XML document Since the Company xsl file is an XSLT 1 0 document the built in Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine is automatically selected for the transformation The output document is displayed in Browser View it has the name XSL Output html If the HTML output file is not generated ensure that in the XSL tab of the Options dialog Tools Options the default file extension of the output file has been set to html The HTML document shows the Company data in one block down the left and the Person data in tabular form below 36 XMLSpy Tutorial XSLT Transformations 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Please note Should you only see a table header and no table data in the output file make sure that you have defined the target namespace for your schema The namespace must be identical in all three files Schema XML and XSL 2 4 3 Modifying the XSL File You can change the output by modifying the XSL document For example let s change the background color of the table in the HTML output from lime to yellow Do the following 1 Click the CompanyLast xml tab to make i
461. this could lead to errors Two catalog files are supplied with XMLSpy How these work is described in the section Catalogs in XMLSpy The PUBLIC or SYSTEM identifier in the DOCTYPE statement of your XML file will be used for the catalog lookup For popular schemas the PUBLIC identifier is usually pre defined thus requiring only the URI in the catalog file to be changed when XML documents are used on multiple machines When writing your CustomCatalog xml file or other custom catalog file use only the following subset of the OASIS catalog in order for XMLSpy to process the catalog correctly Each of the elements in the supported subset can take the xml base attribute which is used to specify the base URI of that element lt catalog gt lt public publicId PublicID of Resource uri URL of local file gt lt system systemId SystemID of Resource uri URL of local file gt lt rewriteURI uriStartString StartString of URI to rewrite rewritePrefix String to replace StartString gt lt rewriteSystem systemIdStartString StartString of SystemID rewritePrefix Replacement string to locate resource locally gt lt uri name filename uri URL of file identified by filename gt lt catalog gt Please note The catalog xml file in the AltovaCommonFolder Schemas schema folder contains references to DTDs that implement older XML Schema specifications You should not validate your XML Schema documents against
462. tical data structure not the case with static tables Therefore you can perform row operations append row insert row move row up move row down and delete row These commands are available under the Authentic menu and as icons in the toolbar shown below To use these commands place the cursor anywhere in the appropriate row and then select the required command To move among cells in the table use the Up Down Left and Right arrow keys To move forward from one cell to the next use the Tab key Pressing the Tab key in the last cell of a row creates a new row CALS HTML Tables CALS HTML tables can be inserted by you the user of Authentic View for certain XML data structures that have been specified to show a table format There are three steps involved when working with CALS HTML tables inserting the table formatting it and entering data The commands for working with CALS HTML tables are available as icons in the toolbar see CALS HTML table editing icons 152 Authentic Editing in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Inserting tables To insert a CALS HTML table do the following 1 Place your cursor where you wish to insert the table and click the icon Note that where you can insert tables is determined by the schema The Insert Table dialog screenshot below appears This dialog lists all the XML element data structures for which a table structure has been defined For example in the scree
463. ties Entry Helper and in the Insert Entity submenu of the context menu When you double click on an entity in the Entities Entry Helper that entity is inserted at the cursor insertion point An entity is useful if you will be using a text string XML fragment or some other external resource in multiple locations in your document You define the entity which is basically a short name that stands in for the required data in the Define Entities dialog After defining an entity you can use it at multiple locations in your document This helps you save time and greatly enhances maintenance There are two broad types of entities you can use in your document a parsed entity which is XML data either a text string or a fragment of an XML document or an unparsed entity which is non XML data such as a binary file usually a graphic sound or multimedia object Each entity has a name and a value In the case of parsed entities the entity is a placeholder for the XML data The value of the entity is either the XML data itself or a URI that points to a xml file that contains the XML data In the case of unparsed entities the value of the entity is a URI that points to the non XML data file 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic Menu 293 User Reference User Manual To define an entity 1 Click Authentic Define XML Entities This opens the Define Entities dialog 2 Enter the name of your entity in the Name field This is the name that will ap
464. tion command XSL XQuery XSL Transformation and then transform the FO to PDF using the XSL FO Transformation command XSL XQuery XSL FO Transformation If you use an XSLT processor other than the built in Altova XSLT Engines parameters you enter using the Input Parameters dialog will not be passed to the external processor Using external XQuery variables The value you enter for an external XQuery variable could be an XPath expression without quotes or a text string delimited by quotes The datatype of the external variable is specified in the variable declaration in the XQuery document Note Once a set of external XQuery variables are entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog they are used for all subsequent executions until they are explicitly deleted or the application is restarted Variables entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog are specified at the application level and will be passed to the respective XQuery document for every execution that is carried out via the IDE from that point onward This means that Variables are not associated with any particular document Any variable entered in the XSLT Input Parameters XQuery External Variables dialog is erased once the application XMLSpy has been closed down 286 User Reference XSL XQuery Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Usage example for external XQuery variables In the following example a
465. tion it is reported in the Messages Window Validation If any error is detected during the batch execution it is reported in the Messages Window Transformations Transformation outputs are saved to the folder specified as the output folder in the Properties dialog of that folder If no folder is specified the output folder of the next ancestor project folder is used If no ancestor project folder has an output folder defined a document window is opened and the results of each transformation is displayed successively in this document window An XSL FO transformation transforms an XML document or FO document to PDF 2011 Altova GmbH Using Projects 193 Projects User Manual Note To execute batch commands use the context menu of the relevant folder in the Project Window Do not use the commands in the XML DTD Schema or XSL XQuery menus These commands will be executed on the document active in the Main Window 194 Source Control 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 11 Source Control Project files can be placed under source control A variety of source control systems are supported and Altova has tested support with a large number of drivers and source control systems The tested systems are listed in the section Supported Source Control Systems Since XMLSpy implements the Microsoft Source Code Control Interface MSSCCI v1 1 v1 3 multiple source control systems including Microsoft SourceSafe and other c
466. tion session or virtual machine environment from another computer provided that the total number of users that access or use the Software concurrently at any given point in time on such network virtual machine or terminal server does not exceed the Permitted Number and provided that the total number of users authorized to use the Software through the terminal server application virtualization session or virtual machine environment does not exceed six 6 times the Permitted Number of users Accordingly the limitations set forth in Section 1 d regarding the number of installations and the requirement that the usage be on the same physical network shall not apply to terminal server application virtualization session or virtual machine environments Altova makes no warranties or representations about the performance of Altova software in a terminal server application virtualization session or virtual machine environment and the foregoing are expressly excluded from the limited warranty in Section 5 hereof and technical support is not available with respect to issues arising from use in such environments 2011 Altova GmbH Altova End User License Agreement 361 License Information Appendices c Named Use If you have licensed the Named User version of the software you may install the Software on up to five 5 compatible personal computers or workstations of which you are the primary user thereby allowing you to switch from one com
467. tions Last updated 2011 06 08 2011 Altova GmbH Index 371 Index A Activating the software 325 Active configuration for global resources 304 Alias see Global Resources 177 Altova Engines in Altova products 351 Altova extension functions chart functions see chart functions 344 general functions 344 Altova extensions chart functions see chart functions 344 Altova Global Resources see under Global Resources 177 Altova products 17 Altova support 17 Altova XML Parser about 350 Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine limitations and implementation specific behavior 332 Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine general information about 334 information about 334 Append row in Authentic View 294 Apply 313 Assign shortcut to a command 306 Assigning StyleVision Power Stylesheet to XML file 291 atomization of nodes in XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 evaluation 340 Attribute preview 316 Attribute values entering in Authentic View 143 AttributeFormDefault settings in Schema Design View 275 Attributes entry helper in Authentic View 90 Attributes of schema components defining in Schema View 54 Authentic menu 289 dynamic table editing 86 markup display 86 Authentic View adding nodes 138 applying elements 138 CDATA sections in 141 clearing elements 138 context menu 136 context menus 94 data entry devices in 141 displaying markup tags 136 document disp
468. tions Two types of XSLT transformation are available Standard XSLT transformation XSL XQuery XSL Transformation The output of the transformation is displayed in a new window or if specified in the stylesheet is saved to a file location The engine used for the transformation is specified in the XSL tab of the Options dialog Tools Options XSL for FO transformation XSL XQuery XSL FO Transformation The XML document is transformed to PDF in a two step process In the first step the XML document is transformed to an FO document using the XSLT processor specified in the XSL tab of the Options dialog Tools Options note that you can also select at the bottom of the tab the XSLT engine that comes with some FO processors such as FOP In the second step the FO document is processed by the FO processor specified in the XSL tab of the Options dialog Tools Options to produce PDF output Note An FO document which is a particular type of XML document can be transformed to PDF by clicking the XSL FO transformation command When the source document is an FO document the second step of the two step process for this command is executed directly XQuery executions An XQuery document can be executed on the active XML document by clicking the command XSL XQuery XQuery Execution You are prompted for the XQuery file and the result document is displayed in a new window in the GUI Automating XML tasks with AltovaXML AltovaX
469. to completion In Text View auto completion is available in a pop up as you type with the first item in the pop up list being highlighted that matches the typed text When an element is being typed a list of elements pops up with the first nearest match in alphabetical order being highlighted Similarly when an attribute is being typed in a list of applicable attributes pops up The items in the list are determined according to the rules described in the previous section on entry helpers XPath intelligent editing At locations in the XSLT document where XPath expressions can be entered for example the value of a select attribute intelligent XPath editing is available XPath functions and XPath axes become available in popup as you type Validating XSLT documents The XSLT document can be validated against the XSLT schema built into XMLSpy click XML Validate F8 The correct built in schema is automatically selected according to whether the XSLT document is XSLT 1 0 or XSLT 2 0 specified in the version attribute of the xsl stylesheet element 2011 Altova GmbH XSLT 123 XSLT and XQuery User Manual 6 1 2 XSLT Processing In the XMLSpy GUI two types of XSLT transformation are available The XSL XQuery XSL Transformation F10 command is used for straightforward XML transformations with an XSLT stylesheet to result formats specified and described in the stylesheets The XSL XQuery XSL FO Transformation comma
470. to the view that is active 2011 Altova GmbH 113 DTDs and XML Schemas User Manual 5 DTDs and XML Schemas Altova website XML Schema Editor This section provides an overview of how to work with DTDs and XML Schemas In addition to the editing features XMLSpy provides the following powerful DTD Schema features Catalog mechanism Support for the OASIS catalog mechanism enables the re direction of URIs to local addresses thus facilitating use across multiple workstations Generate Sample XML file You can generate via the DTD Schema Generate Sample XML File menu command a skeleton XML document based on the active DTD or XML Schema file This is very useful for quickly creating an XML file based on a schema Go to definition When the cursor is located within a node in an XML document clicking the DTD Schema Go to Deinition menu command opens the schema file and highlights the definition of the selected XML node 114 DTDs and XML Schemas DTDs 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 5 1 DTDs A DTD document can be edited in Text View You can also view a DTD in Grid View but not edit it Text View In Text View the document is displayed with syntax coloring and must be typed in Given below is a sample of a DTD fragment lt Element declarations gt lt ELEMENT document header para img link gt lt ELEMENT header PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT img EMPTY gt lt ATTLIST img src CDATA REQUIRED
471. tomCatalog xml for any schema you require but that is not addressed by the catalog files in the Altova Common Folder Do this using the supported elements of the OASIS catalog mechanism see below There are a number of Catalog xml files in the Altova Common Folder Each is inside 2011 Altova GmbH Catalogs in XMLSpy 117 DTDs and XML Schemas User Manual the folder of a specific schema or XBRL taxonomy in the Altova Common Folder and each maps public and or system identifiers to URIs that point to locally saved copies of the respective schemas Location of catalog files and schemas The files RootCatalog xml and CoreCatalog xml are installed in the XMLSpy application folder The file CustomCatalog xml is located in your MyDocuments Altova XMLSpy folder The catalog xml files are each in a specific schema folder these schema folders being inside the folders AltovaCommonFolder Schemas and AltovaCommonFolder XBRL Shell environment variables and Altova variables Shell environment variables can be used in the nextCatalog element to specify the path to various system locations see RootCatalog xml listing above The following shell environment variables are supported AltovaCommonF older C Program Files Altova Common2011 DesktopFolder Full path to the Desktop folder for the current user ProgramMenuFo lder Full path to the Program Menu folder for the current user StartMenuFold er Full path to Start Menu f
472. trol plugin in which you can define settings for that source control plugin These settings are different for different source control plugins User preferences A range of user preferences is available including the following Status updates can be performed in the background after a user defined interval of time or they can be switched off entirely Very large source control databases could consume considerable CPU and network resources The system can be speeded up however by disabling background status updates or increasing the interval between them When opening and closing projects files can be automatically checked out and checked in respectively The display of the Check Out and Check In dialogs can be suppressed The Reset button is enabled if you have checked activated the Don t show this again option in one of the dialog boxes On clicking the Reset button the Don t show this again prompt is re enabled After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog 322 User Reference Window Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 12 12 Window Menu To organize the individual document windows in an XMLSpy session the Window menu contains standard commands common to most Windows applications You can cascade the open document windows tile them or arrange document icons once you have minimized them You can also switch the various Entry Helper windows on or off or switch to an o
473. ts 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 a skeleton document structure that is valid according to the assigned schema Note that you can create your own skeleton XML document If you save it in the Template folder of the application folder your skeleton document will be available for selection in the Create New Document dialog If you select the generic Extensible Markup Language document type you will be prompted for a schema DTD or XML Schema to assign to the document At this point you can choose to browse for a schema or go ahead and create an XML document with no schema assigned to it You can of course assign a schema via the DTD Schema menu at any subsequent time during editing Automatic validation If an existing XML document has a schema assigned to it then it can be automatically validated on opening and or saving The setting for this is in the File tab of the Options dialog Tools Options The automatic validation settings in the File tab can be combined with a setting in the File Types tab to disable automatic validation for specific file types Using the settings in the two tabs together enables you to specify automatic validation for specific file types 2011 Altova GmbH Assigning Schemas and Validating 101 XML User Manual 4 2 Assigning Schemas and Validating Altova website XML Validator XML Validation A schema DTD or XML Schema can be assigned to an XML document when it is first created A
474. tting specific versions of the file in question Double clicking an entry in the list opens the History Details dialog box for that file The buttons in the dialog provide the following functionality Close closes this dialog box View opens a further dialog box in which you can select the type of viewer with which you wish to see the file Details opens a dialog box in which you can see the properties of the currently active file Get allows you to retrieve one of the previous versions of the file in the version list and place it in the working directory Check Out allows you to check out a previous version of the file Diff opens the Difference options dialog box which allows you to define the difference options when viewing the differences between two file versions Use CTRL Click to mark two file versions in this window then click Diff to view the differences between them Pin pins or unpins a version of the file allowing you to define the specific file version to use when differencing two files Rollback rolls back to the selected version of the file Report Generates a history report which you can send to the printer file or clipboard Help opens the online help of the source control provider plugin Show Differences The Show Differences command displays the differences between the file currently in the source control repository and the checked in out file of the same name in the working
475. ttributes The element that you have selected you can click the start or end tag or place the cursor anywhere in the element content to select it appears in the combo box The Attributes Entry Helper shown in the figures below has a para element in the combo box Clicking the arrow in the combo box drops down a list of all the para element s ancestors up to the document s root element which in this case is OrgChart Below the combo box a list of valid attributes for that element is displayed in this case for para If an attribute is mandatory on a given element then it appears in bold In the example below there are no mandatory attributes except the built in attribute xsi type 94 Editing Views Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 To enter a value for an attribute click in the value field of the attribute and enter the value This creates the attribute and its value in the XML document In the case of the xsi nil attribute which appears in the Attributes Entry Helper when a nillable element has been selected the value of the xsi nil attribute can only be entered by selecting one of the allowed values true or false from the dropdown list for the attribute s value The xsi type attribute can be changed by clicking in the value field of the attribute and then selecting from the dropdown list that appears one of the listed values The listed values are the available abstract types defined in the XML Schema o
476. ty html All other names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2011 Altova GmbH Altova End User License Agreement 359 License Information Appendices 3 4 Altova End User License Agreement THIS IS A LEGAL DOCUMENT RETAIN FOR YOUR RECORDS ALTOVA END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Licensor Altova GmbH Rudolfsplatz 13a 9 A 1010 Wien Austria Important Read Carefully Notice to User This End User License Agreement Software License Agreement is a legal document between you and Altova GmbH Altova It is important that you read this document before using the Altova provided software Software and any accompanying documentation including without limitation printed materials online files or electronic documentation Documentation By clicking the I accept and Next buttons below or by installing or otherwise using the Software you agree to be bound by the terms of this Software License Agreement as well as the Altova Privacy Policy Privacy Policy including without limitation the warranty disclaimers limitation of liability data use and termination provisions below whether or not you decide to purchase the Software You agree that this agreement is enforceable like any written agreement negotiated and signed by you If you do not agree you are not licensed to use the Software and you must destroy any downloaded copies of the Software in your possess
477. u are using the Send by Mail command File Send by Mail in XMLSpy the current selection or file is sent by means of any MAPI compliant mail program installed on the user s PC As part of Software Activation and LiveUpdate as further described in this manual and the Altova Software License Agreement 2011 Altova GmbH 355 License Information Appendices 3 License Information This section contains Information about the distribution of this software product Information about the intellectual property rights related to this software product The End User License Agreement governing the use of this software product Please read this information carefully It is binding upon you since you agreed to these terms when you installed this software product 356 License Information Electronic Software Distribution 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 3 1 Electronic Software Distribution This product is available through electronic software distribution a distribution method that provides the following unique benefits You can evaluate the software free of charge before making a purchasing decision Once you decide to buy the software you can place your order online at the Altova website and immediately get a fully licensed product within minutes When you place an online order you always get the latest version of our software The product package includes a comprehensive integrated onsc
478. up down 295 S Saving files encoding of 222 Schema also see XML Schema 271 Design view 296 Documentation font 316 settings 313 Schema Design menu 275 Schema Design View Display all globals 280 Display diagram 280 zoom feature 279 Schema editing annotations 54 58 comments 54 58 content model 58 processing instructions 54 58 Schema fonts 316 Schema Overview 54 schema validation of XML document for XQuery 337 Schema View 54 entry helpers 71 moving back and forward 84 schema awareness of XPath 2 0 and XQuery Engines 340 Schemas in memory 274 Scripts in XSLT XQuery see under Extension functions 344 Search help 324 see Find 236 Select All command 235 Settings 16 313 SharePoint Server 258 Shortcut 306 assigning deleting 306 show in tooltip 312 Show 322 323 Show large markup 86 88 Show mixed markup 86 88 Show small arkup 88 Show small markup 86 Side by side 316 Size 317 Small markup in Authentic View 294 Smart Restrictions 78 Software product license 359 Source control 194 321 add to source control 248 changing provider 253 checking in 246 checking out 245 enabling disabling 242 get latest version 243 getting files 243 getting folders 244 open project 241 properties 252 refresh status 253 removing from 249 sharing from 249 show differences 251 show history 250 supported provid
479. urce Control Systems 203 Source Control User Manual new setup will start to install the client When setup starts choose the option Install IBM Rational ClearCase LT Keep clicking Next accept the Software License Agreement and start the installation In Vista the second setup could generate the internal error 2739 In this case start Windows Explorer and go to C Windows System32 Right click and run cmd exe As Administrator A command window pops up Type regsvr32 jscript dll Launch the setup again To work with files stored in ClearCase you should create a view that points to your ClearCase project Jalindi Igloo 1 0 3 http www jalindi com igloo To use Jalindi Igloo with Altova products it is sufficient to run the setup to install Jalindi Igloo Note that if you uninstall Jalindi Igloo all other installed SCC Provider Windows registry keys if any are deleted as well and are not longer available When working with Altova products setting the Auto Commit Mode is recommended Auto Commit Mode is found in the advanced Source Control options After defining a workspace you can start to work March Hare CVS Suite Client 2008 3321 http www march hare com cvsnt en asp A typical installation will work correctly with Altova products Mercurial see under Sergey Antonov HgScc 1 0 1 Microsoft SourceSafe 2005 with CTP http msdn micros
480. ursor selection point Insert XInclude The XInclude command is available in Text View and Grid View and enables you to insert a new XInclude element at the cursor selection point in Text View or before the selected item in both Text View and Grid View If in Grid View the current selection is an attribute the XInclude element is inserted after the attribute and before the first child element of the attribute s parent element Selecting this command pops up the XInclude dialog screenshot below The XML file to be included is entered in the href text box alternatively you can browse for the file by clicking the Browse button to the right of the text box The filename will be entered in the XML document as the value of the href attribute The parse xpointer and encoding attributes of the XInclude element xi include and the fallback child element of xi include can also be inserted via the dialog Do this by first checking the appropriate check box and then selecting entering the required values In the case of the fallback element checking its check box only inserts the empty element The content of the fallback element must be added subsequently in one of the editing views 2011 Altova GmbH Edit Menu 233 User Reference User Manual The parse attribute determines whether the included document is to be parsed as XML or text XML is the default value and therefore need not be specified The xpointer attribute identifies a s
481. urther illustrate usage lt xsl variable name xpath select p1 gt lt xsl value of select altova evaluate xpath Name 1 gt Outputs value of the first Name element lt xsl variable name xpath select p1 gt lt xsl value of select altova evaluate xpath Name 1 gt Outputs Name 1 The altova evaluate extension function is useful in situations where an XPath expression in the XSLT stylesheet contains one or more parts that must be evaluated dynamically For example consider a situation in which a user enters his request for the sorting criterion and this criterion is stored in the attribute UserReq sortkey In the stylesheet you could then have the expression lt xsl sort select altova evaluate UserReq sortkey order ascending gt The altova evaluate function reads the sortkey attribute of the UserReq child element of the parent of the context node Say the value of the sortkey attribute is Price then Price is returned by the altova evaluate function and becomes the value of the select attribute 346 Engine Information Extensions 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 lt xsl sort select Price order ascending gt If this sort instruction occurs within the context of an element called Order then the Order elements will be sorted according to the values of their Price children Alternatively if the value of sortkey were say Date then the Order elements would
482. ustomized level of markup The person who has designed the StyleVision Power Stylesheet can specify either large markup small markup or no markup for individual elements attributes in the document The Authentic View user sees this customized markup in mixed markup viewing mode 90 Editing Views Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Hide all markup All XML markup is hidden Since the formatting seen in Authentic View is the formatting of the printed document this viewing mode is a WYSIWYG view of the document Content display In Authentic View content is displayed in two ways Plain text You type in the text and this text becomes the content of the element or the value of the attribute Data entry devices The display contains either an input field text box a multiline input field combo box check box or radio button In the case of input fields and multiline input fields the text you enter in the field becomes the XML content of the element or the value of the attribute In the case of the other data entry devices your selection produces a corresponding XML value which is specified in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Thus in a combo box a selection of say approved which would be available in the dropdown list of the combo box could map to an XML value of 1 or to approved or anything else while not approved could map to 0 or not approved or anything else Optional nodes Whe
483. ute which has been defined in the schema as being of type ENTITY or ENTITIES Such entities are resolved when the document is processed with an XSLT generated from the SPS 12 8 6 Hide Markup Show Small Large Mixed Markup The Hide Markup command hides markup symbols in the Authentic View The Show Small Markup command shows small markup symbols in the Authentic View The Show Large Markup command shows large markup symbols in the Authentic View The Show Mixed Markup command shows mixed markup symbols in Authentic View The person who designs the StyleVision Power Stylesheet can specify either large markup small markup or no markup for individual elements attributes in the document The Authentic View user sees this customized markup in mixed markup viewing mode 12 8 7 Append Insert Duplicate Delete Row The Append Row command appends a row to the current table in Authentic View The Insert Row command inserts a row into the current table in Authentic View The Duplicate Row command duplicates the current table row in Authentic View 2011 Altova GmbH Authentic Menu 295 User Reference User Manual The Delete Row command deletes the current table row in Authentic View 12 8 8 Move Row Up Down The Move Row Up command moves the current table row up by one row in Authentic View The Move Row Down command moves the current table row down by one row in Authentic View 296 User Reference View Menu 2011 Altova
484. utes are displayed in the Content Model View These properties appear as grid lines in component boxes To define property descriptor lines 1 Select Schema Design Configure view The Schema display configuration dialog appears 2 In the Element or Attribute tab click the Append or Insert icon to add a property descriptor line The line is added in the dialog and to element boxes in the Content Model View 3 From the combo box select the property you want to display See screenshot 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for as many properties as required 2011 Altova GmbH Schema Design Menu 277 User Reference User Manual The Content Model View is updated showing the defined property descriptor lines for all elements for which they exist Please note For attributes the configuration you define appears only when attributes are displayed in the diagram as opposed to them being displayed in a pane below the Content Model View The configured view applies to all Content Model Views opened after the configuration is defined Deleting a property descriptor line from the Content Model View To delete individual property descriptor lines in the Schema Display Configuration dialog select the property descriptor line you want to delete and click the Delete icon 278 User Reference Schema Design Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Settings for configuring the Content Model View The Content Model View can
485. va Engines 341 fn current dateTime in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn current time in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn data in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn deep equal in XPath 2 0 and whitespace 340 fn id in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn idref in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn index of in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn in scope prefixes in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn last in XPath 2 0 and whitespace 340 fn lower case in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn normalize unicode in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn position in XPath 2 0 and whitespace 340 fn resolve uri in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn static base uri in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 fn upper case in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 341 Folding margin 299 Font schema 316 Schema Documentation 316 Font size in Browser View 301 Fonts in Text View 42 Formatting in Text View 42 Forward in Schema View 84 Full text search 324 functions see under XSLT 2 0 functions 336 XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 340 G Global settings 313 Global components creating in Schema Overview 54 Global resources 177 active configuration for 304 changing configurations 187 copying configurations 183 defining 178 303 defining file type 180 defining f
486. ve a query about Altova products visit our Support Center at the Altova website Here you will find Links to our FAQ pages Discussion forums on Altova products and general XML subjects Online Support Forms that enable you to make support requests should you have a support package Your support request will be processed by our support team Altova products For a list of all Altova products see the Altova website 18 XMLSpy Tutorial 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 2 XMLSpy Tutorial This tutorial provides an overview of XML and takes you through a number of key XML tasks In the process you will learn how to use some of XMLSpy s most powerful features The tutorial is divided into the following parts Creating an XML Schema You will be introduced to XML Schemas and the various views available in XMLSpy for viewing and editing XML Schemas Creating an XML document You will learn how to assign a schema for an XML document edit an XML document in Grid View and Text View and validate XML documents using XMLSpy s built in validator Transforming an XML file using an XSLT stylesheet This involves assigning an XSLT file and carrying out the transformation using XMLSpy s built in XSLT engines Working with XMLSpy projects which enable you to easily organize your XML documents Installation and configuration This tutorial assumes that you have successfully installed XMLSpy on your computer an
487. vides a number of useful HTML editing features These are described in detail in Text View but the main features as well as HTML specific options are listed below Entry helpers Elements Attributes and Entities entry helpers are available when an HTML document is active The entry helpers are context sensitive the items displayed in the entry helpers are those available at the current cursor location Use the HTML entry helpers as described in Text View Auto completion As you type markup text into your HTML document XMLSpy provides Auto completion help A pop up containing a list of all nodes available at the cursor insertion point is displayed As you type the selection jumps to the first closest match in the list see screenshot below Click the selected item to insert it at the cursor insertion point Auto completion for elements appears when the left bracket of node tags is entered When the start tag of an element node is entered in the document the end tag is automatically inserted as well This ensures well formedness Auto completion for attributes appears when a space is entered after the element name in a start tag When you click an attribute name in the Auto completion pop up the attribute is entered with quotes characters and the cursor positioned between the quotes The Entities entry helper contains character entities from the HTML 4 0 entity sets Latin 1 special characters and symbols HTML Info window The HTML In
488. w sourcegear com fortress A standard installation of SourceGear Fortress client will work with Altova products 2011 Altova GmbH Installing Source Control Systems 207 Source Control User Manual SourceGear SourceOffsite Client 4 2 0 Windows http www sourcegear com sos A standard installation of SourceOffsite client will work with Altova products SourceGear Vault 4 1 4 Client http www sourcegear com vault A standard installation of SourceGear Vault client will work correctly with Altova products TamTam CVS SCC 1 2 40 http www daveswebsite com software tamtam Requirements CVSNT 2 5 client at http www cvsnt org A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products To connect to the CVS repository you need to install CVSNT In the Altova product open the Source control Advanced options and enter the path to the cvs exe executable TamTam SVN SCC 1 2 24 http www daveswebsite com software tamtamsvn Requirements subversion command line client 1 5 4 at http subversion tigris org A standard installation will work correctly with Altova products To connect to the SVN repository you need to install the subversion command line client and specify the path to the executable svn exe in the Altova product Source control options After starting XMLSpy you must register the SCC provider On a Vista machine the SCC registration could fail If this is the case use Windows
489. ways i via the Source Control options Tools Options Source Control or ii in the Change Source Control dialog Project Source Control Change Source Control Note Note that a Source Control project is not the same as an XMLSpy project Source Control projects are directory dependent while XMLSpy projects are logical constructions without direct directory dependence Registry entry and plug ins Microsoft has defined a Registry entry where all Source Control compatible programs can register themselves This is the entry for XMLSpy HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE SourceCodeControlProvider InstalledSCCProviders Note that Source Control SC plug ins are not automatically installed by all SC products Please read the documentation supplied with your specific SC software for more information about plug ins In this section This section as organized as follows 2011 Altova GmbH 195 Source Control User Manual Supported Source Control Systems lists the Source Control Systems SCSs that are supported by XMLSpy Systems are listed alphabetically by server and for each server the supported clients are also listed Installing Source Control Systems contains notes about how to install the various SCSs SCSs and Altova DiffDog Differencing describes how various Source Control Systems can be set up to carry out differencing with Altova DiffDog Menu commands The menu commands for using Source Control Systems ar
490. works in the same way as the sorting described in the section Schema Overview Using keyboard shortcuts in Content Model View You can copy and paste elements in Content Model View using the shortcuts Ctrl c and Ctrl v To copy and paste elements 1 Select the elements you want to copy To select one element click on it To select more than one element click on the first element and use SHIFT and the down arrow key to select further elements 2 Press Ctrl c The elements are copied to the clipboard 3 Select the compositor you want to copy the elements to 4 Press Ctrl v The elements are pasted as child elements of the compositor To copy and paste elements in reverse order 1 Click on the lowermost element you want to copy and use SHIFT and the up arrow key to select further elements 2 Press Ctrl c The elements are copied to the clipboard 3 Select the compositor you want to copy the elements to 4 Press Ctrl v The elements are pasted such that the element that was the uppermost element is now the lowermost element About XML Schema annotations XML Schema annotations are held in the annotation element There are two types of annotation both of which are elements of the annotation element compositor or component documentation which contains information that could be useful for editors of the schema and is contained in the documentation child element of annotation application information which allows you to inser
491. ws Schema View 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 Expand Collapse All expands or collapses the tree respectively 3 3 6 Smart Restrictions When restricting a complex type parts of the content model of the base type are rewritten in the derived type This can be confusing if the content model is complex because while editing the derived type it might be hard to correctly remember exactly what the content model of the base type looks like Smart Restrictions combine and correlate the two content models in the graphical view of the derived content model In the derived complex type all particles of the base complex type and how they relate to the derived type can be seen Additionally Smart Restrictions provide visual hints to show you all possible ways to restrict the base type This makes it easy to correctly restrict the derived type To switch on Smart Restrictions Click the Smart Restrictions icon in the Schema Design toolbar The example that follows illustrates the features of Smart Restrictions Note that in Standard Edition Grid View is available as a read only view Editing in Schema View is available in the Enterprise and Professional editions The following complex type is the base type used in this example The complex type derived is derived from the base type as follows 1 Create a new complex type in the schema and call it derived 2 In the Details Entry Helper select base from the
492. xample para 3 which is short for para position 3 boundary whitespace only nodes are irrelevant since only the named elements para in the above example are selected Note however that boundary whitespace only nodes are relevant in patterns that use the wildcard for example 10 Numeric notation On output when an xs double is converted to a string scientific notation for example 1 0E12 is used when the absolute value is less than 0 000001 or greater than 1 000 000 Otherwise decimal or integer notation is used Precision of xs decimal The precision refers to the number of digits in the number and a minimum of 18 digits is required by the specification For division operations that produce a result of type xs decimal the precision is 19 digits after the decimal point with no rounding Implicit timezone When two date time or dateTime values need to be compared the timezone of the values being compared need to be known When the timezone is not explicitly given in such a value the implicit timezone is used The implicit timezone is taken from the system clock and its value can be checked with the fn implicit timezone function Collations Only the Unicode codepoint collation is supported No other collations can be used String comparisons including for the fn max and fn min functions are based on this collation Namespace axis The namespace axis is deprecated in XPath 2 0 Use of the namespace axis is however supp
493. xs string external Collations The default collation is the Unicode codepoint collation No other collation is currently supported Comparisons including the fn max function are based on this collation 2011 Altova GmbH XQuery 1 0 Engine Implementation Information 339 Engine Information Appendices Character normalization No character normalization form is supported Precision of numeric types The xs integer datatype is arbitrary precision i e it can represent any number of digits The xs decimal datatype has a limit of 20 digits after the decimal point The xs float and xs double datatypes have limited precision of 15 digits XQuery Instructions Support The Pragma instruction is not supported If encountered it is ignored and the fallback expression is evaluated XQuery Functions Support For information about implementation specific behavior of XQuery 1 0 functions see the section XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 340 Engine Information XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 1 4 XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 functions are evaluated by the Altova XPath 2 0 Engine which i is a component of the Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine and ii is used in the XPath Evaluator of Altova s XMLSpy product to evaluate XPath expressions with respect to the XML document that is active in the XMLSpy interface the Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine
494. xternal Folder to Project 2 Select the folder you want to include from the Browse for Folder dialog box and click OK to confirm The selected folder now appears in the project window 3 Click the plus icon to view the folder contents Filtering contents of folders To filter the contents of the folder 1 Right click the local folder and select the popup menu option Properties This opens the Properties dialog box 2011 Altova GmbH Project Menu 257 User Reference User Manual 2 Click in the File extensions field and enter the file extensions of the file types you want to see You can separate each file type with a semicolon to define multiple types XML and Schema XSDs in this example 3 Click OK to confirm The Project window now only shows the XML and XSD files of the tutorial folder Validating external folders To validate and check an external folder for well formedness 1 Select the file types you want to see or check from the external folder 2 Click the folder and click the Check well formedness or Validate icon hotkeys F7 or F8 All the files visible under the folder are checked If a file is malformed or invalid then this file is opened in the Main Window allowing you to edit it 3 Correct the error and run the validation process once more to recheck Updating a project folder You might add or delete files in the local or network directory at any time To update the folder view right click t
495. yleVision Power Stylesheet immediately in StyleVision 12 8 4 Select New Row with XML Data for Editing The Select New Row with XML Data for Editing command enables you to select a new row from the relevant table in an XML DB such as IBM DB2 This row appears in Authentic View can be edited there and then saved back to the DB When an XML DB is used as the XML data source the XML data that is displayed in Authentic View is the XML document contained in one of the cells of the XML data column The Select New Row with XML Data for Editing command enables you to select an XML document from 292 User Reference Authentic Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 another cell or row of that XML column Selecting the Select New Row command pops up the Choose XML Field dialog screenshot below which displays the table containing the XML column You can enter a filter for this table The filter should be an SQL WHERE clause just the condition without the WHERE keyword for example CID gt 1002 Click Update to refresh the dialog In the screenshot above you can see the result of a filtered view Next select the cell containing the required XML document and click OK The XML document in the selected cell row is loaded into Authentic View 12 8 5 Define XML Entities You can define entities for use in Authentic View whether your document is based on a DTD or an XML Schema Once defined these entities are displayed in the Enti
496. you click a link in your XML document and want to return to your XML document In Schema View the Back command takes you to the previously viewed component The shortcut key is Alt Left Arrow Using the Back command up to 500 previously viewed positions can be re viewed 12 10 2 Forward Alt Right Arrow The Forward command is only available once you have used the Back command It moves you forward through i previously viewed pages in Browser View and ii previous views of schema components in Schema View 12 10 3 Stop The Stop command instructs the browser to stop loading your document This is useful if large external files or graphics are being downloaded over a slow Internet connection and you wish to stop the process 12 10 4 Refresh F5 The Refresh F5 command updates the Browser View by reloading the document and related documents such as CSS and XSL stylesheets and DTDs 12 10 5 Fonts The Fonts command allows you to select the default font size for rendering the text of your XML document It is similar to the Font Size command in most browsers 12 10 6 Separate Window 302 User Reference Browser Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 The Separate Window command opens the Browser View in a separate window so that side by side viewing is possible If you have separated the Browser View press F5 in editing view to automatically refresh the corresponding Browser View To dock separate windows bac
497. you select in this combo box Open non XML files in Existing and new non XML files are opened with the encoding you select in this combo box You can change the encoding of the document by using the File Encoding command BOM Byte Order Mark When a document with two byte or four byte character encoding is saved the document can be saved either with i little endian byte ordering and a little endian BOM Always create BOM if not UTF 8 or ii the detected byte ordering and the detected BOM Preserve detected BOM on saving After making the settings click OK to finish and close the Options dialog XSL The XSL tab screenshot below enables you to define options for XSLT transformations and XSL FO transformations carried out from within the application 320 User Reference Tools Menu 2011 Altova GmbH Altova XMLSpy 2011 XSLT transformations XMLSpy contains the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine and Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine which you can use for XSLT transformations The appropriate XSLT engine 1 0 or 2 0 is used according to the value of the version attribute of the xsl stylesheet or xsl transform element For transforming XML documents using XSLT you could use one of the following The built in Altova XSLT Engine comprising the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine and the Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine The MSXML 3 0 4 0 or 6 0 parser which is pre installed If you know which version of the MSXML parser is running on your machine you

Altova XMLSpy 2011

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents